ITT NOKIA 6381 PIP DIGIVISION BLACKLINE CHASSIS DIGI BE-2 INTERNAL VIEW

ITT NOKIA 6381 PIP DIGIVISION  BLACKLINE  CHASSIS  DIGI BE-2 GENERAL Circuit Description for ITT DIGIVISION CHASSIS Digi BE-2I
n the new generation, the well-known colour ` concept has been further refined, and adapted to the latest state-of-the-art.
This has resulted in a series of improvements in the concept itself and in the circuit design, and also in the more rationalized configuration, all largely made possible by funher progress in VLSI technology. The most important differences compared with
the previous chassis can be seen in the block diagram (Fig. 1), and comprise the following points:
1. The operating unit panel at the front of the set now contains only the entry keyboard, the display and the infra-red receiver. The chip of the central control unit IC 1520 (CCU SEL 04), has now been relocated on the Digi-Chassis B (motherboard). This is also the location for the peripheral modules IC 1540, MEA 2901 as the tuner interface or
IC 1560, MDA 2062 as the external memory for storing
channel tuning data (now for up to 60 channels). To extend
the memory capacity, there is a second MDA 2062 of Digital
Board B (IC 690), in which the digital data for the set-specific
values, switch-on values and the sen/ice alignment are
stored.
2. In the vicinity of the power pack, which as previously is
located on the motherboard, the introduction of an integrated
circuit for controlling the isolating transformer has simplified
the circuitry significantly. Power pack IC 710, TEA 2165, also
offers the option of stand-by mode coupled with significantly
reduced transformer output. This means that the stand-by
power pack with mains transformer on the operating unit
board is no longer necessary and has been dispensed with.
A new circuit (IC 740, TSA 0416) has also been incorporated
in the design for the control function of the transformer power
pack.
3. Digital Board B has been reconfigured. The digital audio
signal processing function with the two IC’s 3101,
ADC 2310 E and 3201, APU 2470 T are now located inside
stereo module B together with the sound output stages
(2 X TDA 2040 H).
New additions to Digital Board B are IC 630, SPU 2220 as
the SECAM signal processor, replacing the discrete SECAM-
PAL transcoder, plus IC 680, DTI 2222, a circuit for improving
colour signal transitions.

Case Study: Digital TV - Digivision ITTI will explain why this system is the father of all digital video/audio modern application field.
Today there is a race to design interoperable video systems for basic digital computer functions, involving multimedia applications in areas such as media information, education, medecine and entertainment, to name but a few. This chapter provides an overview of the current status in industry of digitized television including techniques used and their limitations, technological concerns and design methodologies needed to achieve the goals for highly integrated systems. Digital TV functions can be optimized for encoding and decoding and be implemented in silicon in a more dedicated way using a kind of automated custom design approach allowing enough flexibility.

Significance of VLSI for Digital TV Systems

When, at the 1981 Berlin Radio and TV Exhibition, the ITT Intermetall company exhibited to the public for the first time a digital television VLSI concept [1], [2], opinions among experts were by no means unanimously favourable. Some were enthusiastic, while others doubted the technological and economic feasibility. Today, after 13 years, more than 30 million TV sets worldwide have already been equipped with this system. Today, the intensive use of VLSI chips does not need a particular justification, the main reasons being increased reliability mainly because of the long-term stability of the color reproduction brought about by digital systems, and medium and long-term cost advantages in manufacturing which are essential for ensuring international competitiveness.

Digital signal processing permits solutions that guarantee a high degree of compatibility with future developments, whether in terms of quality improvements or new features like intermediate picture storage or adaptive comb filtering for example. In addition to these benefits, a digital system offers a number of advantages with regard to the production of TV sets:

- Digital circuits are tolerance-free and are not subject to drift or aging phenomena. These well-known properties of digital technology considerably simplify factory tuning of the sets and even permit fully automated, computer-controlled tuning.

- Digital components can be programmable. This means that the level of user convenience and the features offered by the set can be tailored to the manufacturer's individual requirements via the software.

- A digital system is inherently modular with a standard circuit architecture. All the chips in a given system are compatible with each other so that TV models of various specifications, from the low-cost basic model to the multi-standard satellite receiver, can be built with a host of additional quality and performance features.

- Modular construction means that set assembly can be fully automated as well. Together with automatic tuning, the production process can be greatly simplified and accelerated.

Macro-function Processing

The modular design of digital TV systems is reflected in its subdivision into largely independent functional blocks, with the possibility having special data-bus structures. It is useful to divide the structure into a data-oriented flow and control-oriented flow, so that we have four main groups of components:

1.- The control unit and peripherals, based on well-known microprocessor structures, with a central communication bus for flexibility and ease to use. An arrangement around a central bus makes it possible to easily expand the system constantly and thereby add on further quality-enhancing and special functions for the picture, text and/or sound processing at no great expense. A non-volatile storage element, in which the factory settings are stored, is associated to this control processor.

2.- The video functions are mainly the video signal processing and some additional features like for example deflection, a detailed description follows in the paper. However, the key point for VLSI implementations is a well-organized definition of the macro-blocks. This serves to facilitate interconnection of circuit components, and minimizes power consumption, which can be considerable at the processor speeds needed.

3.- The digital concept facilitates the decoding of today’s new digital sound broadcasting standards as well as the input of external signal sources, such as Digital Audio Tape (DAT) and Compact Disk (CD). Programmability permits mono, stereo, and multilingual broadcasts; the compatibility with other functions in the TV system is resolved with the common communication bus. This leads us to part two which is dedicated to the description of this problem.

4.- With a digital system, it is possible to add some special or quality-enhancing functions simply by incorporating a single additional macro-function or chip. Therefore, standards are no longer so important due to the high level of adaptability of digital solutions. For example adaptation to a 16:9 picture tube is easy.

In this chapter we first discuss the digitization of TV functions by analyzing general concepts based on existing systems. The second section deals with silicon technologies and, in particular design methodologies concerns. The intensive use of submicron technologies associated with fast on chip clock frequencies and huge numbers of transistors on the same substrate affects traditional methods of designing chips. As this chapter only outlines a general approach of the VLSI integration techniques for Digital TV

II. DIGITIZATION OF "TV FUNCTIONS"

The idea of digitization of TV functions is not new. The time some companies have started to work on it, silicon technology was not really adequate for the needed computing power so that the most effective solutions were full custom designs. This forced the block-oriented architecture where the digital functions introduced were the one to one replacement of an existing analog function. In Figure 2 there is a simplified representation of the general concept.

Fig.2: Block Diagram of first generation digital TV set

The natural separation of video and audio resulted in some incompatibilities and duplication of primary functions. The emitting principle is not changed, redundancy is a big handicap, for example the time a SECAM channel is running, the PAL functions are not in operation. New generations of digital TV systems should re-think the whole concept top down before VLSI system partitioning.

In today’s state-of-the-art solution one can recognize all the basic functions of the analog TV set with, however, a modularity in the concept, permitting additional features becomes possible, some special digital possibilities are exploited, e.g. storage and filtering techniques to improve signal reproduction (adaptive filtering, 100 Hz technology), to integrate special functions (picture-in-picture, zoom, still picture) or to receive digital broadcasting standards (MAC, NICAM). The Figure 3 shows the ITT Semiconductors solution which was the first on the market in 1983 !! !!

Fig.3: The DIGIT2000 TV receiver block diagram

Description:This invention relates generally to digital television receivers and, particularly, to digital television receivers arranged for economical interfacing with a plurality of auxiliary devices.

With the proliferation of low cost microprocessors and microprocessor controlled devices, television (TV) receivers are being designed to utilize digitized signals and controls. There are many advantages associated with digital TV receivers, including uniformity of product, precise control of signal parameters and operating conditions, elimination of mechanical switches and a potential for reliability that has been heretofore unknown. Digital television receivers include a high speed communication bus for interconnecting a central control unit microprocessor (CCU) with various TV function modules for processing a TV signal. These modules include a deflection processing unit (DPU), a video processing unit (VPU), an automatic phase control (APC), a video codec unit (VCU), an audio analog to digital converter (ADC) and an audio processing unit (APU). The CCU has associated with it a non-volatile memory, a hardware-generated clock signal source and a suitable interface circuit for enabling the CCU to control processing of the TV signal throughout the various TV function modules. The received TV signal is in analog form and suitable analog to digital (A/D) converters and digital to analog (D/A) converters are provided for converting the digital and analog signals for signal processing and for reconverting them after processing for driving a cathode ray tube (CRT) and suitable speakers. The CCU microprocessor is heavily burdened because of the high speed timing required to control the various TV function modules.

To further complicate matters, modern TV receivers are increasingly being used with auxiliary devices for other than simple processing of TV signals. For example, the video cassette recorder (VCR) has enabled so-called "time-shifting" of program material by recording TV signals for later, more convenient viewing. The VCR is also extensively used with prerecorded material and with programs produced by users having access to a video camera. Other auxiliary devices providing features such as "Space Phone" whereby the user is enabled to make and receive telephone calls through his TV receiver, are desirable options. Additionally, a source selector auxiliary device enables a host of different signal sources, such as cable, over-the-air antenna, video disk, video games, etc. to be connected for use with the signal processing circuitry of the TV. In addition, all of these many auxiliary devices are preferably controllable from a remote position. A great deal of flexibility is available since each of the above auxiliary devices includes a microprocessor for internally controlling functioning of the device.
In the digital TV system described, the CCU microprocessor and the microprocessors in the auxiliary devices may be conventionally arranged to communicate over the main communication bus. Such a system would entail a specialized microprocessor with a hardware-generated clock signal in each auxiliary device in order to communicate at the high speeds used on the main communication bus. A specialized microprocessor, that is, one that is hardware configured, is significantly more expensive than an off-the-shelf microprocessor. Also, the auxiliary devices may not be required, or even desired, by all users and their low volume production cost becomes very important. It would therefore be desirable to provide a digital TV in which such auxiliary devices utilized off-the-shelf microprocessors for their control.



A digital TV system includes a CCU that is interconnected by a three-wire, high speed bus to a plurality of TV signal function modules for controlling operation thereof by means of a high speed hardware generated clock signal. A software generated clock signal in the CCU is supplied on a low speed two-wire auxiliary device bus which is connected to microprocessors in a plurality of auxiliary devices for performing functions ancillary to TV signal processing. The microprocessor in each auxiliary device is an off-the-shelf type that does not require any special hardware because the timing on the auxiliary device bus is sufficiently slow to enable software monitoring of the line and data transfer.
As mentioned, the three-wire IM bus 21 is a high speed bidirectional bus in which CCU 20 functions as the master and all of the interconnected TV signal processing function modules are slaves that communicate with the CCU in accordance with the protocol established for the system. CCU 20 is also indicated as including a software generated clock which supplies a two-wire auxiliary device bus 50. Two-wire bus 50 includes a clock lead 51 and a data lead 52 coupled to a plurality of auxiliary devices. A VCR 54, including an off-the-shelf microprocessor 55, is coupled to bus 50. A Source Selector 56, including an off-the-shelf microprocessor 57, is also coupled to bus 50. Source Selector 56 has access to four RF inputs, two baseband video and audio inputs and one separate baseband audio input. It will be appreciated that Source Selector 56 may have a greater or lesser number of signal sources to which it has access. Source Selector 56 outputs are coupled to VCR 54 and also to tuner 10 and supply, under control of CCU 20 and keyboard 44, the signal from the signal source selected by keyboard 44 or IR transmitter 46 for use with the digital TV. Auxiliary device bus 50 is also coupled to a Space Phone 58 which includes an off-the-shelf microprocessor 59 and a modem 60 that is connectable to a conventional telephone terminal.
Two-wire auxiliary device bus 50 is a relatively low speed bus and there is no need for separate hardware generated clock signals to be developed by the auxiliary device microprocessors. As mentioned above, this feature involves a significant savings in the cost and complexity of the auxiliary devices.
The protocol used on the two-wire auxiliary device bus consists of a 16 bit sequence, the first eight bits of which are used for bus address commands for the auxiliary devices. Each auxiliary device may respond to 16 addresses which allows the CCU to write into or read from various storage registers in the devices which are used for control or data storage. Thus, with this low cost system, as many as 16 auxiliary devices may be connected to the auxiliary device bus. The second eight bits of the 16 bit sequence contain data which is either transferred from the CCU to the auxiliary device addressed, or transferred from the auxiliary device to the CCU, based upon the bus address used. Thus, the various bus addresses to which a given auxiliary device will respond determine whether the auxiliary device will receive data from the CCU or send data to the CCU. The clock line timing, generated by software in CCU 20, is slow enough to permit software monitoring of the line and data reception by simple auxiliary device microprocessors that are not equipped with an external interrupt feature. The timing on the auxiliary device bus is made sufficiently fast to avoid too many instruction steps or the need for special registers in CCU 20. In the system described, data is clocked every 82.5 microseconds, thus permitting a 16 bit word to be clocked in 1.32 milliseconds. A pause of 277.5 microseconds between the first 8 bits and the second 8 bits permits the slave auxiliary device to process the bus address data contained in the first 8 bits. This timing fits into the 2 millisecond timing block structure used for the CCU in controlling the DIGIT 2000 digital TV. Two-2 millisecond timing blocks have been established in the CCU, which has a 20 millisecond timing loop divided into ten-2 millisecond timing blocks. Thus, two control words may be sent to an auxiliary device every 20 milliseconds, or a request by the CCU to receive data and the actual receipt of that data may take place in that time period.



Referring to the drawing, a digital TV includes a tuner 10 coupled to an IF/Detector 12 which has a pair of outputs 13 and 14 supplying video and audio signals, respectively. Control signals for tuner 10 are supplied through an interface circuit 16 from a CCU microprocessor 20 which functions as a single master control unit for the system. Microprocessor 20 is interconnected by means of a bidirectional three-wire IM (Intermetal) bus 21 to a DPU 22, a VPU 26, an APC 30, a TTX (teletext processor) 38, an APU 36, an ADC 32 and a non-volatile memory 24. A serial control line 29 interconnects a hardware generated clock 28, VPU 26 and VCU 34. VPU 26 and VCU 34 are also interconnected by a seven wire cable and TTX 38 is interconnected with a DRAM 42. DRAM 42 is a dynamic RAM in which TTX information is stored for display. VCU 34 is supplied with video signal and supplies a digitized 7 bit grey coded video signal to VPU 24 for processing and RGB color signals to a Video Drive 40 which, in turn, supplies a cathode ray tube (not shown). A keyboard 44 is coupled to CCU 20 and includes an IR detector that is responsive to coded IR signals supplied from an IR transmitter (IRX) 46. A resident microprocessor in keyboard 44 decodes the received IR signals and generated control commands and supplies appropriate outputs to CCU 20. The diagram, as described, is substantially identical to that for a "DIGIT" 2000 VLSI Digital TV System developed by ITT Intermetal and published in Edition 1984/85 Order No. 6250-11-2E

--------------------------

By its very nature, computer technology is digital, while consumer electronics are geared to the analog world. Starts have been made only recently to digitize TV and radio broadcasts at the transmitter end (in form of DAB, DSR, D2-MAC, NICAM etc). The most difficult technical tasks involved in the integration of different media are interface matching and data compression [5].

After this second step in the integration of multimedia signals, an attempt was made towards standardization, namely, the integration of 16 identical high speed processors with communication and programmability concepts comprised in the architecture !

Many solutions  proposed today (for MPEG 1 mainly) are derived from microprocessor architectures or DSPs, but there is a gap between today’s circuits and the functions needed for a real fully HDTV system. The AT&T hybrid codec [29], for instance, introduces a new way to design multimedia chips by optimizing the cost of the equipment considering both processing and memory requirements.

The concept is to provide generic architectures that can be applied to a wide variety of systems taking into account that certain functions have to be optimized and that some other complex algorithms have to be ported to generic processors.

Basics of current video coding standards

Compression methods take advantage of both data redundancy and the non-linearity of human vision. They exploit correlation in space for still images and in both space and time for video signals. Compression in space is known as intra-frame compression, while compression in time is called inter-frame compression. Generally, methods that achieve high compression ratios (10:1 to 50:1 for still images and 50:1 to 200:1 for video) use data approximations which lead to a reconstructed image not identical to the original.

Methods that cause no loss of data do exist, but their compression ratios are lower (no better than 3:1). Such techniques are used only in sensitive applications such as medical imaging. For example, artifacts introduced by a lossy algorithm into a X-ray radiograph may cause an incorrect interpretation and alter the diagnosis of a medical condition. Conversely, for commercial, industrial and consumer applications, lossy algorithms are preferred because they save storage and communication bandwidth.

Lossy algorithms also generally exploit aspects of the human visual system. For instance, the eye is much more receptive to fine detail in the luminance (or brightness) signal than in the chrominance (or color) signals. Consequently, the luminance signal is usually sampled at a higher spatial resolution. Second, the encoded representation of the luminance signal is assigned more bits (a higher dynamic) than are the chrominance signals. The eye is less sensitive to energy with high spatial frequency than with low spatial frequency [7]. Indeed, if the images on a personal computer monitor were formed by an alternating spatial signal of black and white, the human viewer would see a uniform gray instead of the alternating checkerboard pattern. This deficiency is exploited by coding the high frequency coefficients with fewer bits and the low frequency coefficients with more bits.

All these techniques add up to powerful compression algorithms. In many subjective tests, reconstructed images that were encoded with a 20:1 compression ratio are hard to distinguish from the original. Video data, even after compression at ratios of 100:1, can be decompressed with close to analog videotape quality.

Lack of open standards could slow the growth of this technology and its applications. That is why several digital video standards have been proposed:

• JPEG (Joint Photographic Expert Group) for still pictures coding
• H.261 at p times 64 kbit/s was proposed by the CCITT (Consultative Committee on International Telephony and Telegraphy) for teleconferencing
• MPEG-1 (Motion Picture Expert Group) up to 1,5 Mbit/s was proposed for full motion compression on digital storage media
• MPEG-2 was proposed for digital TV compression, the bandwith depends on the chosen level and profile [33].

Another standard, the MPEG-4 for very low bit rate coding (4 kbit/s up to 64 kbit/s) is currently being debated.

Digitalization of the fundamental TV functions is of great interest since more than 30 years. Several million of TV sets have been produced containing digital systems. However, the real and full digital system is for the future. A lot of work is done in this field today, the considerations are more technical than economical which is a normal situation for an emerging technology. The success of this new multimedia technology will be given by the applications running with this techniques.

The needed technologies and methodologies were discussed to emphasize the main parameters influencing the design of VLSI chips for Digital TV Applications like parallelization, electrical constraints, power management, scalability and so on...............................

ITT NOKIA 6381 PIP DIGIVISION  BLACKLINE  CHASSIS  DIGI BE-2  Power supply circuit description ITT DIGIVISION CHASSIS DIGI BE-2:
After Pressing the_ON/OFF button
A d.c. voltage is passed from the bridge rectifier via D 715 to
Pin 16 of IC 710 (Fig. 28).
When the voltage reaches a level of 9 V, a switch inside the IC
will switch on the IC (see Figs. 29 and 32).
Capacitor C 710 is now charged to about 1 V with a large
current. Once this value has been reached, control pulses
(narrow at first, and then wider in dependence on the voltage at
Pin 10, which is the charging voltage of C 710), are outputted at
Pin 14, until about 1.8 V are reached at Pin 10. Ft 719
determines the maximum pulsewidth at the end of the start
phase.
In the case of voltages above approx. 1.8 V, no more control
pulses are generated by TDA 2165. From this point onwards,
control pulses must be available at Pin 6, otherwise stan-up will
be re-attempted after approx. 100 ms. These periodical start-up
attempts are clearly audible, and indicate that no pulses are
reaching Pin 6 of IC TEA 2165 from IC 740, TEA 2170 orTSA
0416 (Pin 1).

In the unsynchronized phase (no pulses at Pin 6 of IC 710), all
output voltages are approx. 25 % of the set-point values.
Example: U I only approx. 35 V instead of 145 V. Voltage UV"
is an exception here. This voltage is available at
almost its full level, since it is obtained during the
conducting phase of the switching transistor.
Supply voltage IC 740
In the start-up phase, voltage VV" (8 V) is available immediately.
VV" is also used as an operating voltage at Pin 2 during
switched-on status.
Oscillator with start program of IC 710
The sawtooth oscillator oscillates at a basic frequency of
approx. 14.6 kHz, which is determined by components Fl 717
and C 718. Its frequency, in conjunction with the start program,
sen/es during the start-up phase as an actuation signal for
switching transistorT 731.
As long as there are no control pulses being received at Pin 6,
the oscillator is switched on and off periodically, with the
oscillating frequency in ON state measuring 14.6 kHz (see also
Fig. 31). As soon as line-frequency needle pulses appear at Pin
6 of IC 710, the oscillator is synchronized to line frequency via a
start-stop flip-flop, and oscillates continuously, but is no longer
utilized for obtaining the control pulse at Pin 14. The information
from the start-stop flip-flop is now passed directly to the driver !

ITT NOKIA 6381 PIP DIGIVISION  BLACKLINE  CHASSIS  DIGI BE-2 TEA2164 /2165 SWITCH MODE POWER SUPPLY PRIMARY CIRCUIT



.POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE OUTPUT CURRENT
UP TO 1.2AAND – 1.7A .A TWO LEVEL COLLECTOR CURRENT LIMITATION
.COMPLETE TURN OFF AFTER LONG DURATION
OVERLOADS .UNDER AND OVER VOLTAGELOCK-OUT .SOFT START BY PROGRESSIVE CURRENT
LIMITATION .DOUBLE PULSE SUPPRESSION .BURST MODE OPERATION UNDER STANDBY
CONDITIONS
DESCRIPTION
In amaster slave architecture, the TEA2164control
IC achieves the slave function. Primarily designed
for TV receivers and monitors applications, this
circuit provides an easy synchronizationand smart
solution for low power stand by operation.
Located at the primary side the TEA2164 Control
IC ensures :
- the power supply start-up
- the power supply control under stand-by conditions
- the process of the regulation signals sent by the
master circuit located at the secondary side
- directbasedrive of the bipolarswitching transistor
- the protection of the transistor and the power
supply under abnormal conditions.

II. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
In a master slave architecture, the TEA2164 Control
IC, located at the primary side of an off line
power supply achievesthe slave function ;whereas
the master circuit is located at the secondary side.
The link between both circuits is realized by a small
pulse transformer

In the operation of the master-slave architecture,
four majors cases must be considered :
- normal operating
- stand-bymode
- power supply start-up
- abnormal conditions : off load, short circuit, ...
II.1. Normal Operating (master slave mode)
In this configuration, the master circuit generatesa
pulse widthmodulatedsignal issued from themonitoring
of the output voltage which needs the best
accuracy (in TV applications : the horizontal deflection
stagesupplyvoltage).Themaster circuit power
supply can be supplied by another output.
The PWM signal are sent towards the primary side
through small differentiating transformer. For the
TEA2164 positive pulses are transistor switchingon
commands ; and negative pulses are transistor
switching-offcommands (Figure 4). In this configuration,
only by synchronizing the master oscillator,
the switching transistor may be synchronized with
an external signal.
II.2. Stand-by Mode
In this configuration the master circuit no longer
sends PWM signals, the structure is not synchronized
; and the TEA2164 operates in burst mode.
The average power consumption at the secondary
side may be very low 1W 3 P 3 6W (as it is
consumed in TV set during stand by).
By action on the maximum duty cycle control, a
primary loop maintains a semi-regulation of the
output voltages.Voltage on feed-back is applied on
Pin 9.
Burst period is externally programmedby capacitor
C1.
II.3. Power Supply Start-up
After the mains have been switched-on, the VCC
storage capacitor of the TEA2164 is charged
through a high value resistor connected to the
rectified high voltage.When Vcc reaches VCC start
threshold (9V typ), the TEA2164 starts operatingin
burst mode. Since available output power is low in
burst mode the output power consumption must
remain low before complete setting-up of output
voltage. In TV application it can be achieved by
maintaining the TV in stand-by mode during startup.

Overvoltage Protection
When VCC exceeds VCC max, an internal flip-flop
stops output conduction signals. The circuit will
start again after the capacitor C1 discharge ; it
means : after loss of synchronization or after Vcc
stop crossing (Figure 7).
In flyback converters, this function protects the
power supply against output voltage runaway.

ITT NOKIA 6381 PIP DIGIVISION  BLACKLINE  CHASSIS  DIGI BE-2  Function of the Stand-By Circuit
In set stand-by mode, the approx. 3.5 ps narrow on/off pulses
are fed from TSA 0416 via pulse transformer Tr. 751 to
TEA2165. This causes all output voltages of the transformer
power pack to be reduced to approx. 1/6 of their normal levels.
Voltage VV", however, is only slightly altered in comparison with
normal operation, since this voltage is not obtained from the
blocking phase of the switching transistor, but from the
conducting phase, due to the reverse polarity of D 790 in
relation to D 782 (see Fig. 33). This ensures that power supply
TSA 0416 (from VV", 8 V) and DPU (5 V, Vvm) can be supplied
with operating voltage during stand-by mode.
Switch-over of the output pulsewidth is performed at Pin 7 of
TSA 0416. When the mains switch is set to ON, a Low passes
to Pin 7 of IC 740 (TSA 0416) via mains switch S 1401/AZ 12
1505/D 741/Fi 745. This reduces the negative feedback of the
lower difference amplifier. At the same time, the pulsewidth ratio
at Pin 1 of TSA 0416 also alters. In stand-by mode it measures
approx. 3 ps, and in normal operating mode approx. 30 us.
When switched from stand-by to normal operating mode by the
remote control, the CCU/IC 1520 puts the requisite low at Pin 5.

Driver Circuit- IC 710 /TEA 2165
The driver circuit obtains the necessary current from Pin 15,
with the majority of the power being taken from the switching
transformer via D 722.
Diodes D 730, 731, 731 ensure the requisite clearing function of
the switching transistor. They clamp Pins 5, 4, 12 and 13 to
approx. minus 2.1 V against ground. This produces a negative
content of approx. -2 V at the control pulse at Pin 14 as well.
A short circuit at one of the 3 diodes D 730-325 reduces the
negative voltage at Pins 5, 4, 12 and 13, or the negative content
at Pin 14. This results in a higher power dissipation at T 731,
which sooner or later will destroy the transistor.

 ITT NOKIA 6381 PIP DIGIVISION  BLACKLINE  CHASSIS  DIGI BE-2 Synchronized switch-mode power supply:

In a switch mode power supply, a first switching transistor is coupled to a primary winding of an isolation transformer. A second switching transistor periodically applies a low impedance across a second winding of the transformer that is coupled to an oscillator for synchronizing the oscillator to the horizontal frequency. A third winding of the transformer is coupled via a switching diode to a capacitor of a control circuit for developing a DC control voltage in the capacitor that varies in accordance with a supply voltage B+. The control voltage is applied via the transformer to a pulse width modulator that is responsive to the oscillator output signal for producing a pulse-width modulated control signal. The control signal is applied to a mains coupled chopper transistor for generating and regulating the supply voltage B+ in accordance with the pulse width modulation of the control signal.

Description:

The invention relates to switch-mode power supplies.

Some television receivers have signal terminals for receiving, for example, external video input signals such as R, G and B input signals, that are to be developed relative to the common conductor of the receiver. Such signal terminals and the receiver common conductor may be coupled to corresponding signal terminals and common conductors of external devices, such as, for example, a VCR or a teletext decoder.

To simplify the coupling of signals between the external devices and the television receiver, the common conductors of the receiver and of the external devices are connected together so that all are at the same potential. The signal lines of each external device are coupled to the corresponding signal terminals of the receiver. In such an arrangement, the common conductor of each device, such as of the television receiver, may be held "floating", or conductively isolated, relative to the corresponding AC mains supply source that energizes the device. When the common conductor is held floating, a user touching a terminal that is at the potential of the common conductor will not suffer an electrical shock.

Therefore, it may be desirable to isolate the common conductor, or ground, of, for example, the television receiver from the potentials of the terminals of the AC mains supply source that provide power to the television receiver. Such isolation is typically achieved by a transformer. The isolated common conductor is sometimes referred to as a "cold" ground conductor.

In a typical switch mode power supply (SMPS) of a television receiver the AC mains supply voltage is coupled, for example, directly, and without using transformer coupling, to a bridge rectifier. An unregulated direct current (DC) input supply voltage is produced that is, for example, referenced to a common conductor, referred to as "hot" ground, and that is conductively isolated from the cold ground conductor. A pulse width modulator controls the duty cycle of a chopper transistor switch that applies the unregulated supply voltage across a primary winding of an isolating flyback transformer. A flyback voltage at a frequency that is determined by the modulator is developed at a secondary winding of the transformer and is rectified to produce a DC output supply voltage such as a voltage B+ that energizes a horizontal deflection circuit of the television receiver. The primary winding of the flyback transformer is, for example, conductively coupled to the hot ground conductor. The secondary winding of the flyback transformer and voltage B+ may be conductively isolated from the hot ground conductor by the hot-cold barrier formed by the transformer.

It may be desirable to synchronize the operation of the chopper transistor to horizontal scanning frequency for preventing the occurrence of an objectionable visual pattern in an image displayed in a display of the television receiver.

It may be further desirable to couple a horizontal synchronizing signal that is referenced to the cold ground to the pulse-width modulator that is referenced to the hot ground such that isolation is maintained.

A synchronized switch mode power supply, embodying an aspect of the invention, includes a transfromer having first and second windings. A first switching arrangement is coupled to the first winding for generating a first switching current in the first winding to periodically energize the second winding. A source of a synchronizing input signal at a frequency that is related to a deflection frequency is provided. A second switching arrangement responsive to the input signal and coupled to the second winding periodically applies a low impedance across the energized second winding that by transformer action produces a substantial increase in the first switching current. A periodic first control signal is generated. The increase in the first switching current is sensed to synchronize the first control signal to the input signal. An output supply voltage is generated from an input supply voltage in accordance with the first control signal.


ITT NOKIA 6381 PIP DIGIVISION  BLACKLINE  CHASSIS  DIGI BE-2 Switch-mode power supply with burst mode standby operation:

In a switch mode power supply, a first switching transistor is coupled to a primary winding of a transformer for generating pulses of a switching current. A secondary winding of the transformer is coupled via a switching diode to a capacitor of a control circuit for developing a control signal in the capacitor. The control signal is applied to a mains coupled chopper second transistor for generating and regulating supply voltages in accordance with pulse width modulation of the control signal. During standby operation, the first and second transistors operate in a burst mode that is repetitive at a frequency of the AC mains supply voltage such as 50 Hz. In the burst mode operation, during intervals in which pulses of the switching current occur, the pulse width and peak amplitude of the switching current pulses progressively increase in accordance with the waveform of the mains supply voltage to provide a soft start operation in the standby mode of operation within each burst group.

Description:

The invention relates to switch-mode power supplies.

In a typical switch mode power supply (SMPS) of a television receiver the AC mains supply voltage is coupled to a bridge rectifier. An unregulated direct current (DC) input supply voltage is produced. A pulse width modulator controls the duty cycle of a chopper transistor switch that applies the unregulated supply voltage across a primary winding of a flyback transformer. A flyback voltage at a frequency that is determined by the modulator is developed at a secondary winding of the transformer and is rectified to produce DC output supply voltages such as a voltage B+ that energizes a horizontal deflection circuit of the television receiver and a voltage that energizes a remote control unit.

During normal operation, the DC output supply voltages are regulated by the pulse width modulator in a negative feedback manner. During standby operation, the SMPS is required to generate the DC output supply voltage that energizes the remote control unit. However, most other stages of the television receiver are inoperative and do not draw supply currents. Consequently, the average value of the duty cycle of the chopper transistor may have to be substantially lower during standby than during normal operation.

Because of, for example, storage time limitation in the chopper transistor, it may not be possible to reduce the length of the conduction interval in a given cycle below a minimum level. Thus, in order to maintain the average value of the duty cycle low, it may be desirable to operate the chopper transistor in an intermittent or burst mode, during standby. During standby, a long dead time interval occurs between consecutively occurring burst mode operation intervals. Only during the burst mode operation interval switching operation occurs in the chopper transistor. The result is that each of the conduction intervals is of a sufficient length.

In accordance with an aspect of the invention, burst mode operation intervals are initiated and occur at a rate that is determined by a repetitive signal at the frequency of the AC mains supply voltage. For example, when the mains supply voltage is at 50 Hz, each burst mode operation interval, when switching cycles occur, may last 5 milliseconds and the dead time interval when no switching cycles occur, may last during the remainder portion or 15 milliseconds. Such arrangement that is triggered by a signal at the frequency of the mains supply voltage simplifies the design of the SMPS.

The burst mode operation intervals that occur in standby operation are synchronized to the 50 Hz signal. During each such interval, pulses of current are produced in transformers and inductances of the SMPS. The pulses of current occur in clusters that are repetitive at 50 Hz. The pulses of current occur at a frequency that is equal to the switching frequency of the chopper transistor within each burst mode operation interval. Such qurrent pulses might produce an objectionable sound during power-off or standby operation. The objectionable sound might be produced due to possible parasitic mechanical vibrations as a result of the pulse currents in, for example, the inductances and transformers of the SMPS.

In accordance with another aspect of the invention, the change in the AC mains supply voltage during each period causes the length of the conduction interval in consecutively occurring switching cycle during the burst mode operation interval to increase progressively. Such operation that occurs during each burst mode operation interval may be referred to as soft start operation. The soft start operation causes, for example, gradual charging of capacitors in the SMPS. Consequently, the parasitic mechanical vibrations are substantially reduced. Also, the frequency of the switching cycles within each burst mode operation interval is maintained above the audible range for further reducing the level of such audible noise during standby operation.

A switch mode power supply, embodying an aspect of the invention, for generating an output supply voltage during both a standby-mode of operation and during a run-mode of operation includes a source of AC mains input supply voltage. A control signal at a given frequency is generated. A switching arrangement energized by the input supply voltage and responsive to the first control signal produces a switching current during both the standby-mode of operation and the run-mode operation. The output supply voltage is generated from the switching current. An arrangement coupled to the switching arrangement and responsive to a standby-mode/run-mode control signal and to a signal at a frequency that is determined by a frequency of the AC mains input supply voltage controls the switching arrangement in a burst mode manner during the standby-mode of operation. During a burst interval, a plurality of switching cycles are performed and during an alternating dead time interval no switching cycles are performed. The two intervals alternate at a frequency that is determined by the frequency of the AC mains input supply voltage.

TEA2164/TEA2165 EXTENDED OVERLOAD PROTECTION CIRCUIT FOR A SWITCH MODE POWER SUPPLY HAVING CYCLE DETECTOR, MEMORY AND FLIP-FLOP INHIBITION:

 

 A protection device for switch mode power supplies includes a main switch controlled by the output signals of a flip-flop. The flip-flop input receives regulation control signals. A first protection circuit supplies priority signals with respect to the regulation signals on the reset input of the flip-flop. The protection device also includes a cycle detector of the first protection circuit, a memory for accumulating at each cycle a value proportional to the duration between a signal of the detector and the set signal associated with the regulation cycle of the following cycle, and inhibiting of the flip-flop when the memory has accumulated a signal higher than a predetermined threshold.

 

 

Inventors:Maige, Philippe (Syssinet Pariset, FR) Thomson-csf (Paris, FR) 

 

 

 1. A device for protection against long duration overloading in switch mode power supplies comprising a main switch controlled by output signals from a first flip-flop, the set and reset inputs of which receive regulation control signals, a first protection circuit supplying on the reset input priority signals with respect to the regulation signals when the current in the main switch exceeds a predetermined threshold, further comprising a second protection circuit itself comprising:

means for detecting cycles for which the first protection circuit is active and interrupts the on state of the main switch prior to the arrival of the order for the off state of the regulation signal;

memorization means accumulating at each cycle a value proportional to the duration between a signal from the detection means and the set signal associated with the regulation signal of the following cycle; and

inhibition means for inhibiting the set input of the flip-flop when the memorization means has accumulated a signal higher than a predetermined threshold;

wherein the means for detecting includes a second flip-flop, a third flip-flop and an AND gate, the second flip-flop receiving at its reset input the starting output of the regulation signal, the set input of the second flip-flop receiving the output of the AND gate and the output of the second flip-flop controlling the memorization means; the third flip-flop having its set input connected to the reset input of the second flip-flop, the reset input of the third flip-flop connected to the reset regulation signal and the output of the third flip-flop connected to a first input of the AND gate; the second input of the AND gate being connected to the output of the first protection circuit.


2. A device for protection according to claim 1, wherein the memorization means comprise a capacitor permanently discharged by a discharging means and temporarily charged by a charging means only when the detection means supplies a signal.

3. A device for protection according to claim 2, wherein the charge and discharge means are current supplies and the charge current supply is connected to the capacitor through a controlled switch actuated by the output of the second flip-flop of the detection means.

4. A device for protection according to claim 1, wherein the inhibition means comprise a comparator comparing the signal accumulated by the memorization means with a reference value, the output signal of this comparator inhibiting the set input of the first flip-flop when the memorized signal becomes higher than a reference value.

5. A device for protection according to claim 4, wherein the output of said comparator is connected to the set input of a fourth flip-flop of which the output is connected to the set input of the first flip-flop through an AND gate of which the other input receives the sginal for triggering the regulation signal.

6. A device for protection according to claim 5, wherein the AND gate connected to the validation input of the first flip-flop receives other inhibition signals issuing from other switch mode power circuits, such as automatic starting control circuits.

Description:

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

1. Field of the Invention

The present invention concerns stabilized power supplies known as "switch mode power supplies".

A switch mode supply functions in the following manner: a primary transformer winding receives a current that is, for example, issuing from a rectifying bridge receiving power from the alternating power mains. The current in the transformer is chopped by a switch (for example a power transistor) placed in series with the primary winding.

A control circuit of the transistor establishes periodic square pulses to turn on the transistor. During the square pulse period current passage is authorized; outside of this square pulse period current passage is prohibited.

On one (or several) secondary winding(s) of the transformer, an alternating voltage is thus received. This voltage is rectified and filtered in order to produce a direct voltage that is the output direct voltage of the switch mode supply.

In order to stabilize the value of this direct voltage, the duty cycle of the switch is modified, i.e. the ratio between the conduction duration and the blocking duration in a chopped period.

FIG. 1 represents by way of example a switch mode power structure manufactured by the applicant in which two integrated circuits are used. One of the circuits, CI1, acts to control the base of a power switching transistor Tp for applying thereto periodic control signals for putting under conduction and blocking control. This base control circuit CI1 is placed on the side of the primary winding EP of the transformer TA for reasons which will become apparent from the description given herein-below. The other integrated circuit, regulation circuit CI2, is on the contrary placed on the side of the secondary winding ES1 and is used to examine the output voltage Vs of the power supply in order to produce regulation signals that it transmits to the first integrated circuit through a small transformer TX. The first integrated circuit CI1 uses these regulation signals to modify the duty cycle of conduction of the switching transistor Tp and thus of adjusting the output voltage Vs of the power supply.

FIG. 1 shows the line of the public electric distribution mains under reference 10 (local supply circuit or mains at 110 or 220 volts, 50 or 60 hertz). This line is connected through a filter 12 to the input of a rectifying bridge 14, the output of which is connected on the one hand to a primary electric mass, represented throughout by a black triangle pointing downwards, and on the other hand to one end of the primary winding EP of the supply transformer TA.

A filtering capacitor 16 is placed in parallel on the outputs of the rectifying bridge 14. The other end of the primary winding is connected to the collector of the switching transistor Tp, the emitter of which is connected to the primary mass through a small current measuring resistance 18.

The transformer is provided with several secondary windings that are preferably galvanically insulated from the mains and connected for example to a secondary electric mass galvanically insulated from the primary mass.

In the present description, each of the secondary windings has one end connected to the secondary mass. The other end supplies a respective low-pass filtering capacitor through a respective rectifying diode.

Reference in the following description will be made to a single secondary winding ES1, connected by a diode 20 to a capacitor 22. The direct output voltage of the switch mode supply is the voltage Vs at the terminals of the capacitor 22; but it is well understood that other direct output voltages can be obtained at the terminals of the other filtering capacitors connected to the secondary windings. These output voltages constitute stabilized power supplies for utilization circuits (not represented). By way of example, a secondary winding ES2 supplies a stabilized power voltage of several volts for the regulation integrated circuit CI2 to which reference was made herein-above. It is thus checked that the circuit is not powered and therefore cannot supply signals as long as the switching does not function.

The same is true a priori for the base control integrated circuit CI1 of the power transistor Tp, which circuit is powered by a stabilized voltage supplied from a secondary winding ES3, from a diode 24 and from a capacitor 26 (it will be noted that this winding, although being a secondary winding is connected to the primary ground and not to the secondary mass, this for the very simple reason that the integrated circuit CI1 is necessarily galvanically connected to the primary).

However, as it is necessary to ensure starting of the chopped power supply, it has been foreseen that the power terminal 28 of the integrated circuit CI1 is also directly connected to the mains through a high resistance 30 and a diode 32; this is possible since the integrated circuit CI1 is connected to the primary ground; it is not possible for the circuit CI2 which must remain galvanically insulated from the mains. Once the switch mode power supply functions normally, the stabilized direct voltage issuing from the winding ES3 and from the diode 24 has priority over the voltage issuing from the mains and from the diode 32; this diode 32 is blocked and the direct power supply through the mains no longer intervenes after the initial starting phase.

The role of the integrated circuits CI1 and CI2 will now be defined.

The regulation circuit CI2 receives from a divider bridge 34, placed at the terminals of the capacitor 22, i.e. at the output of the stabilized power supply, data as to the value of the voltage to be stabilized Vs.

This data is compared with a desired value and applied to a pulse width modulator that establishes periodic square pulses having variable width in function of the value of the output voltage Vs; the lower is Vs the larger will be the width of the square pulses.

The square pulses are established at the switching frequency of the switch mode supply. This frequency is thus established on the side of the secondary of the circuit; it is generated either inside the circuit CI2, or outside in a circuit (not shown) in the form of a saw-tooth shaped voltage at the selected switching frequency. This saw-tooth voltage is used in a manner known per se to perform the width modulation.

The variable width square pulses, at the switching frequency, are applied to a primary winding 36 of a small transformer TX, the secondary winding, 38, of which is galvanically insulated from the primary, supplies positive and negative pulses to the rising and descending edges, respectively of the variable width square pulses.

It is these position and frequency pulses determined by the regulation circuit CI2, which constitute regulation signals applied to an input 40 of the base control circuit CI1.

The transformer TX is constituted by several coil turns wound on a ferrite rod, the turns of the primary and the turns of the secondary being sufficiently spaced apart from one another to respect the galvanic insulation standards between primary circuits and secondary circuits of the switch mode supply.

The base control integrated circuit CI1 comprises various inputs among which have been mentioned herein-above a power input 28 and a regulation signal input 40; a current measuring input 44 connected to the current measuring resistor 18; and an inhibition input allowing to check the magnetization state of a transformer. Furthermore, inputs can be provided to connect the elements (resistors, capacitors) that should form part of the integrated circuit itself but which for technological reasons (of bulk) or for practical reasons (possibilities of adjustment by the user) are externally mounted.

The integrated circuit CI1 furthermore comprises an output 46 which is intended to be connected by a direct galvanic connection to the base of the power transistor Tp. This output supplies square pulses for bringing the transistor Tp to the on or off state.

FIG. 2 represents partially the general structure of the integrated circuit CI1.

The output 46 of the circuit, intended for the base control of the transistor Tp, is the output of a push-pull amplification stage designated by the reference 48, this stage preferably comprising two separated amplifiers one of which receives square pulses which are inverted and delayed by several microseconds for to producing to the on state. Such amplifiers are well known.

The signals for switching to the on stae are issued from a logic flip-flop 50 having a set input 52 and a reset input 54. The set input triggers the on state of the power transistor. The reset input triggers the off state.

The set input 52(S) receives the pulses that pass through an AND gate 58, so that the triggering of the on state only occurs when several conditions are simultaneously satisfied; if a single condition is not satisfied, this is sufficient to inhibit the triggering of the on state.

The reset input 54(R) receives the pulses which pass through an OR gate 60, so that the interruption of the on state (after triggering of the on state) occurs once a halt signal is present on one of the inputs of this gate.

On the diagram of FIG. 2, the AND gate 58 has three inputs. One of these inputs receives periodic pulses issuing from an output 62 of a high frequency oscillator 64; the other inputs act to inhibit the transmission of these pulses.

The oscillator defines the switching period of the power supply (20 kilohertz for example). In normal operating state the oscillator 64 is synchronized by the regulation signals. In starting state it is self-oscillating at a free frequency defined by the values of a resistor Ro and of a capacitor Co outside the integrated circuit CI1 and respectively connected to an access terminal 66 and an access terminal 68. The free frequency Fo is as a rule slightly lower than the normal switching frequency.

The oscillator 64 is a relaxation oscillator that produces on an output 70 a saw-tooth, the reset to zero of which is set by the appearance of a positive pulse arriving at the terminal 40. This is the reason why the oscillator 64 is represented with an input connected to an output 72 of a separation and shaping circuit 74 that receives the regulation signals from the terminal 40 and shapes them by separating the positive pulses from the negative pulses. The shaping circuit 74 has two outputs: 72 for the positive pulses, 76 for the negative pulses (the notation of positive pulse and negative pulse will be retained in order to distinguish the triggering pulses for the on state and the triggering pulses for the off state even if the shaping circuit establishes pulses of a single sign on its two outputs 72 and 76).

The oscillator 64 has two outputs; an output 70 supplying a saw-tooth signal and an output 62 supplying a short pulse when the saw-tooth is reset to zero.

A pulse width modulator 78 is connected on the one hand to the output 70 of the oscillator and on the other hand to an adjustable reference voltage through a resistor R1 outside the integrated circuit and connected to an access terminal 80 to the circuit. The modulator 78 supplies periodic square pulses synchronized with the oscillator signals, these square pulses defining a maximal duration of the on state Tmax beyond which the off state of the power transistor must be triggered in any case as a matter of security. These square pulses of modulator 78 are applied to an input of the OR gate 60. The duration Tmax is adjustable through the external resistor R1.

The elements that have been described herein-above ensure the essential of the operating at normal condition of the integrated circuit CI1. The following elements are more specifically provided for controlling the anomalous operating or the starting of the power supply.

A very low frequency oscillator 82 is connected to an external capacitor C2 through an access terminal 86. This external capacitor adjusts the very low oscillation frequency. The frequency can be 1 hertz, for example.

The oscillator 82 is a relaxation oscillator supplying a saw-tooth signal which is applied on the one hand to a threshold comparator 88 which establishes periodic square pulses which are synchronized on the saw-tooth at a low frequency of the oscillator. These square pulses have a brief duration compared to the saw-tooth period. This duration is fixed by the threshold of the comparator 88. It can be for example of 10% of the period. It must be long with respect to the free oscillation period of the high frequency oscillator 64 so that a burst of numerous pulses of the high frequency oscillator can be emitted and utilized during this 10% of the period at very low frequency. This burst defines an attempt at starting during the first part of a starting cycle. It is followed by a pause during the remainder of the period, i.e. during the remaining 90% of the period.

The oscillator 82 only functions for the starting. It is inhibited when the regulation signals appear on the terminal 40 and indicate that the switch mode supply is functioning. This is the reason why an inhibition control of this oscillator has been represented, connected to the output 72 of the shaping circuit 74 through a flip-flop 89 which changes its condition under the effect of the pulses appearing at the output 72. It is returned to its initial condition by the output 62 of the oscillator 64 when there are no more pulses on the output 71.

The saw-tooth signals of the oscillator at very low frequency are furthermore transmitted to a circuit 90 for producing a variable threshold whose function is to establish a threshold signal (current or voltage) having a first value Vs1 in normal operating condition, and a cyclically variable threshold between the first value and a second value at starting condition.

The threshold signal established by the circuit 90 is applied to an input of a comparator 92, the other input of which is connected to the terminal 44 already mentioned, in order to receive on this input a signal that is representative of the amplitude of the current flowing through the power switching device. The output of the comparator 92 is applied to an input of the OR gate 60. It thus triggers the off state of the power transistor Tp, after an on state firing, the off state occuring, when exceeding the threshold (fixed or variable) defined by the circuit 90 has been detected.

Another threshold comparator 94 has an input connected to the current measuring terminal 44 while another input receives a signal representing a third threshold value Vs3. The third value Vs3 corresponds to a current in the switch which is higher than the first value vs1 defined by the circuit 90. The output of the comparator 94 is connected through a latch 96 to an input of the AND gate 58 whereby if the current in the power switch exceeds the third threshold value Vs3, an interruption of the on state of the transistor Tp is not triggered (this interruption is triggered by the comparator 92) but an inhibition of any firing of the transistor. This inhibition lasts until the flip-flop 96 is reset to its initial state corresponding to a normal operating.

As a rule, this return will only occur when the integrated circuit CI1 will have ceased to be normally supplied with power and will be again set under voltage. For example, the return of the latch 96 occurs through a hysteresis threshold comparator 98 which compares one fraction of the power supply voltage Vcc of the circuit (drawn off from the terminal 28) with a reference value and which resets the latch during the first passage of Vcc above this reference after a drop of Vcc below another reference value that is lower than the first one (hysteresis).

Moreover, it can be specified that the output of the flip-flop 89 (which detects the presence of regulation signals on the terminal 40 thus the normal operating of the power supply) is connected to an input of an OR gate 100 which receives on another input the output of the comparator 88 so that the output of the comparator 88 ceases to inhibit the firing of the transistor Tp (inhibition during 90% of the very low frequency cycles) once the operating of the power circuit becomes normal.

OBJECT OF THE INVENTION

Therefore, in the device previously manufactured by the applicant and described in detail herein-above, particular procedures for the starting phases and particular protective procedures in the case of functioning incidents are foreseen.

The present invention aims at further improving the operating safety by detecting operating deficiencies over a longer period of time than was the case with circuits of the prior art. Although the invention presents a novel and distinct contribution with respect to the process of the prior art, the prior device has been described in full detail herein-above in order to render apparent the numerous restrictions which are imposed during production of a novel safety device which must take into account all the possible types of operating foreseen in an already existing circuit without introducing deficiencies or blockages in the normal operating of the circuit in its differnt modes. Consequently, any novel contribution to a complex structure such as that described herein-above requires numerous selections and very numerous attempts between various solutions that could appear a priori as simple must be carried out.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

Therefore, the present invention provides a device for protection against extended overloading in switch mode power supplies comprising a main switch controlled by output signals from a flip-flop of which the inputs for setting to 1 and for resetting to zero receive regulation control signals, a first protection circuit supplying on the input for resetting to zero signals which have priority with respect to the regulation signals when the current in the main switch exceeds a predetermined threshold, further comprising a second protection circuit itself comprising:

means for detecting cycles for which the first protection circuit operates and interrupts the on state of the main switch prior to the arrival of the switching off order of the regulation signal;

memorization means accumulating at each cycle a value proportional to the duration between a signal of the detection means and the setting to 1 signal associated to the regulation signal of the following cycle; and

inhibition means for inhibiting the set input of the flip-flop when the memorization means have accumulated a signal higher than a predetermined threshold.

According to one embodiment of the present invention, the detection means comprise a second flip-flop, a third flip-flop and an AND gate:

the second flip-flop receiving at its reset input the output for starting the regulation, the set input of this flip-flop receiving the output of the AND gate and the output of this flip-flop controlling the memorization means;

the third flip-flop having its set input connected to the reset input of the second flip-flop, its reset input connected to the reset signal of the regulation signal, and its output connected to a first input of the AND gate,

the second input of the AND gate being connected to the output of the first protection circuit.

According to one embodiment of the present invention, the memorization means comprise a capacitor permanently discharged by discharging means and temporarily charged by charging means only when the detection circuit supplies a signal.

According to another embodiment of the invention, the inhibition means comprise a comparator comparing the signal accumulated by the memorization means with a reference value, the output signal of this comparator inhibiting the set input of the flip-flop when the memorized signal becomes higher than a reference value.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWING

These objects, features and advantages and others of the present invention will become apparent from the following embodiment given by way of non-limitative illustration with reference to the appended drawing in which:

FIGS. 1 and 2 illustrate a switch mode power supply according to the prior art and have been described herein-above;

FIG. 3 is a simplified representation of a protection circuit against the overloading of a switch mode power supply according to the prior art;

FIG. 4 illustrates the protection circuit against overloads of long duration according to the present invention for switch mode power supplies; and

FIGS. 5-a to to 5-b are time charts intended to illustrates the functioning of the circuits represented in FIGS. 3 and 4.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS

FIG. 3 once again represents in a simplified manner the essential components of the circuit represented in FIG. 2 constituting a protection circuit against the excess currents in the main transistor Tp. The on state in the transistor Tp is normally controlled by a signal available on a terminal 40, resulting from a pulse width modulation circuit which controls a flip-flop 50 through a shaping circuit 74. The flip-flop 50 energizes the base of the power transistor Tp through a preamplification circuit (driver) 48 and an access terminal 46. When the current in the power transistor exceeds a given threshold, the voltage at the terminals of a resistor 18 available at the terminal 44 is compared with a threshold voltage Vs by a comparator 92 and, should this voltage exceed the threshold, the reset input R of the flip-flop 50 is energized through an OR gate 60, the other input of which receives an output signal from the shaping circuit 74.

This protection device effectively protects the switch Tp against a current overloading but does not always allow good protection of the power supply, for example in the case of long duration overloading. In fact, there is no protection against excessive heating of the transformer TA or of the rectifying diodes 20 (cf. FIG. 1) or of other components of the circuit connected to the secondary of the main transformer and it is generally necessary to over-size these components in order to take into account long duration overloadings which could occur as a result, for example, of short-circuiting on the secondary winding.

The invention which will be described herein-below with respect to FIGS. 4 and 5 concerns a device which, added to the conventional current limitation circuit described herein-above, provokes the total and definitive shut down of the power supply in the case of long duration functioning of the current limitation system. Expensive over-sizing of certain components is thus avoided and the operating safety of the power supply is as a whole increased.

The restarting of the power supply can be obtained by the momentary setting out of voltage of the system or at least of the device concerned.

As represented on FIG. 4, the present invention comprises a circuit 100 for detecting the operating of an overload circuit, comprising flip-flops FF2 and FF3 and an AND gate 101, and a circuit 102 for memorization and inhibition of the switch mode power supply. The circuit 102 operates the above described base current control flip-flop 50 through an AND gate 58.

The memorization and inhibition circuit 102 comprises a capacitor 103, a discharge system constituted by a current supply 104 functioning permanently, a system for charging this capacitor constituted by a current supply 105 controlled in all or nothing by a switch 107 receiving the output of the detection circuit 100. When the detection circuit 100 indicates that the current limitation circuit in the power switch Tp does not function, only the discharge system 104 functions and the capacitor 103 remains discharged. When the current limitation system 100 is energized, the charge system (current supply 105) is activated. The ratio between the discharge current and the charge current is selected so that overall the capacitor 103 is charged. When the voltage at the terminals of the capacitor reaches a determined value, fixed by a comparator 106, a flip-flop FF4 is triggered which definitively inhibits the on state of the switch Tp.

In the circuit 100 for detecting the functioning of the current limitation circuit, the flip-flop FF2 has its reset input R2 connected to the output 72 of the form shaping circuit 74, its set input S2 connected to the output of the AND gate 101 and its output Q2 connected to the control terminal of the switch 107 of the circuit 102. The second flip-flop FF3 has its set input S3 connected to the output 72 of the shaping circuit 74, its reset input R3 connected to the output 76 of this shaping circuit and its output Q3 connected to a first input of the AND gate 101 of which the other input is connected to the output of the comparator 92 detecting the excess currents in the power transistor Tp.

FIG. 5 indicates a time chart of the signals appearing in different points of the circuit in four particular operating cases. In FIG. 5

the line a indicates the signals present at the terminal 40 or more exactly the control signals from which result the signals at the terminal 40 following the action of the insulating transformer TX (cf. FIG. 1). Those signals correspond to more or less long square pulses according to the error signal detected;

the line b indicates the signal present at the output 76 of the shaping circuit 74, normally provoking the setting to 1 of the flip-flop 50;

the line c indicates the signal at the output 76 of the shaping circuit 74, normally controlling the reset of the flip-flop 50;

the line d indicates the signal at the output Q2 of the flip-flop FF2 controlling the switch 107;

the line e indicates the signal Q3 at the output of the flip-flop FF3;

the line f indicates the signal at the input R of the flip-flop 50, i.e. the signal at the output of the OR gate 60. This signal corresponds to the rising edge of the pulse at the output 76 of the shaping circuit 74 or at the output of the comparator 92;

the line g indicates the current in the power transistor that corresponds to the signal present on the input 44 of the comparator 92;

the line h indicates the signal at the output of the comparator.

The operating of this circuit in four possible functioning modes will now be studied.

1. Normal operating without overloading

No signal is supplied to the output of the comparator 92 and it is the outputs 72 and 76 (signals of lines b and c) that control the inputs S and R of the flip-flop 50. The circuit 102 not receiving any output signal from the circuit 100 supplies to the output Q4 of the flip-flop FF4 a high level signal and the AND gate 58 is validated thereby allowing the output signal 72 of the shaping circuit 74 to reach the input S of the flip-flop 50.

2. Functioning in lower overloading limit

As shown by line g of FIG. 5, it concerns the case where the reset pulse of the flip-flop 50 tends to bring the switch Tp at the off state prior to an overloading detection (current in Tp higher than I Max) occuring, but where an overloading occurs between the off state order and the effective off state of the power transistor. This delay is due to the blocking period or storing time ts of the switch which is not nil in particular in the case where a high voltage bipolar transistor is utilized. The current limitation comparator 92 is thus energized. However, the output signal of the comparator 92 does not reach the flip-flop FF2 to supply an output signal Q2 since the flip-flop FF3 has been previously reset by the signal 76 and blocks the AND gate 101. the flip-flop FF2 thus remains at zero and as in the preceding case, the circuit 102 is not energized and the regulation circuit continues to operate normally. It would in fact be inconvenient to shut down the operating of the chopping power supply in this particular case.

3. Operating in moderate overloading

As in the previous case, it is the output signal 72 of the shaping circuit 74 that provokes the bringing to the on state of the power transistor but, as shown by line g, the overload level of the power transistor Tp is reached prior to the normal off state signal of the transistor (line c) occuring. In this case, the comparator 92 supplies a signal which is transmitted through AND gate 101 enabled by the flip-flop FF3 to the flip-flop Q2 which is set to 1. The switch 107 of the memorization and inhibition circuit 102 is thus closed and the charge process of the capacitor 103 begins.

It will be noted that the signal Q2 (line d) remains at high level until the triggering pulse of the following cycle (bringing of the output 72 at high level). Therefore, the earlier overloading arrives in the cycle, the more the signal Q2 is present during a long period. After several functioning cycles, the voltage accumulated on the capacitor 103 will be higher than the reference voltage VRef applied to the second terminal of the comparator 106. Subsequently, the flip-flop FF4 supplies a signal at low level to its output Q4 and the AND gate 58 invalidates the input S of the flip-flop 50. This occurs only if the overloading lasts over a certain number of cycles. Thus, the functioning of the switch mode power supply is definitively brought to the off state indicating an operating failure of the device, for example a short-circuiting of a secondary winding of the transformer TA (cf. FIG. 1). To start up again the switch mode power supply, it is necessary to apply a new signal to the input R4 of the flip-flop FF4. This input can for example be connected to an initialization device when the whole of the switch mode power supply is powered.

4. Operating under strong overloading

This operating mode is illustrated on the right side of FIG. 5. It is as a whole identical to the case of a moderate overloading but it has been represented only to show the elongation of the pulses Q2 when the overloading occurs very early in an operating cycle of the switch mode power supply.

The various advantages of the present invention thus become apparent. On the one hand; the operating delay time is easily programmable by means of a single component, for example the value of the capacity of the capacitor 103. On the other hand, automatically, due to the elongation of the pulse Q2 when the overloading occurs early in a cycle, the action delay is modulated in function of the intensity of the overloading. Therefore, the greater is the overloading, the shorter is the operating delay time.

Another advantage lies in the perfect simultaneity of the triggering of the timing of the device according to the invention and of the operating of the conventional limitation of the current as described in the description of the prior art. This results in very good operating security. The risk of spurious triggering of the device close to the lower current limit is thus prevented.

On the other hand, as has been seen, the device according to the invention operates well with a power switch constituted by a bipolar transistor in which the storage time is relatively long, but this circuit is perfectly adaptable to a switch of which the off state delay tends towards zero such as a MOS power transistor.

Similarly, accordng to another advantage of the invention, this circuit is perfectly compatible with the other protection and starting assistance circuits which utilized the circuits according to the prior art. Indeed, it will be noted that the components of the circuit according to the invention are perfectly compatible with the components of the current limitation circuit described herein-above. Furthermore, the AND gate 58 that has the circuit at the off state when it is not operating bears the same reference as the AND gate 58 described in relation with FIG. 2. In fact, it can be the same gate comprising simply a supplementary input. Herein lies another advantage of the invention, i.e. it is perfectly compatible with the automatic starting circuit described in relation with FIGS. 1 and 2. In this automatic starting mode, which may be called burst mode, it is also desired to be able to detect and stop the power supply in the case of overloading. However, as mentioned herein-above in the initial burst method, the circuit operates only with a duty cycle of about 10%. In this case, the capacitor 103 risks to be insufficiently charged during this brief action period and to discharge during the 90% of non-operating. To overcome this, it is foreseen according to the present invention to inhibit the discharging of the capacitor 103 by providing a controlled switch (not represented) in series with the discharge current supply 104 and energized by a signal indicative of the fact that operating is taking place in the burst mode. Therefore, in the case of overloading in the burst method, the capacitor is charged a little at each burst and retains its voltage between the bursts. It is therefore possible to reach the voltage VRef after a certain number of burst.

ITT NOKIA 6381 PIP DIGIVISION  BLACKLINE  CHASSIS  DIGI BE-2  CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENT IN A PICTURE DISPLAY DEVICE UTILIZING A STABILIZED SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT:
Line synchronized switch mode power supply:
A stabilized supply voltage circuit for a picture display device comprising a chopper wherein the switching signal has the line frequency and is duration-modulated. The coil of the chopper constitutes the primary winding of a transformer a secondary winding of which drives the line output transistor so that the switching transistor of the chopper also functions as a driver for the line output stage. The oscillator generating the switching signal may be the line oscillator. In a special embodiment the driver and line output transistor conduct simultaneously and in order to limit the base current of the line output transistor a coil shunted by a diode is incorporated in the drive line of the line output transistor. Other secondary windings of the transformer drive diodes which conduct simultaneously with the efficiency diode of the chopper so as to generate further stabilized supply voltages.

1. An electrical circuit arrangement for a picture display device operating at a given line scanning frequency, comprising a source of unidirectional voltage, an inductor, first switching transistor means for periodically energizing said inductor at said scanning frequency with current from said source, an electrical load circuit coupled to said inductor and having applied thereto a voltage as determined by the ratio of the ON and OFF periods of said transistor, means for maintaining the voltage across said load circuit at a given value comprising means for comparing the voltage of said load circuit with a reference voltage, means responsive to departures of the value of the load circuit voltage from the value of said reference voltage for varying the conduction ratio of the ON and OFF periods of said transistor thereby to stabilize said load circuit voltage at the given value, a line deflection coil system for said picture display device, means for energizing said line deflection coil system from said load voltage circuit means, means for periodically interrupting the energization of said line deflection coil comprising second switching means and means coupled to said inductor for deriving therefrom a switching current in synchronism with the energization periods of said transistor and applying said switching current to said switching means thereby to actuate the same, and means coupled to said switching means and to said load voltage circuit for producing a voltage for energizing said 2. A circuit as claimed in claim 1 wherein the duty cycle of said switching 3. A circuit as claimed in claim 1 further comprising an efficiency first 4. A circuit as claimed in claim 3 further comprising at least a second diode coupled to said deriving means and to ground, and being poled to 5. A circuit as claimed in claim 1 wherein said second switching means comprises a second transistor coupled to said deriving means to conduct simultaneously with said first transistor, and further comprising a coil coupled between said driving means and said second transistor and a third diode shunt coupled to said coil and being poled to conduct when said 6. A circuit as claimed in claim 1 further comprising a horizontal oscillator coupled to said first transistor, said oscillator being the 7. A circuit as claimed in claim 1 further comprising means coupled to said inductor for deriving filament voltage for said display device.

Description:

The invention relates to a circuit arrangement in a picture display device wherein the input direct voltage between two input terminals, which is obtained be rectifying the mains alternating voltage, is converted into a stabilized output direct voltage by means of a switching transistor and a coil and wherein the transistor is connected to a first input terminal and an efficiency diode is connected to the junction of the transistor and the coil. The switching transistor is driven by a pulsatory voltage of line frequency which pulses are duration-modulated in order to saturate the switching transistor during part of the period dependent on the direct voltage to be stabilized and to cut off this transistor during the remaining part of the period. The pulse duration modulation is effected by means of a comparison circuit which compares the direct voltage to be stabilized with a substantially constant voltage, the coil constituting the primary winding of a transformer.

Such a circuit arrangement is known from German "Auslegeschrift" 1.293.304. wherein a circuit arrangement is described which has for its object to convert an input direct voltage which is generated between two terminals into a different direct voltage. The circuit employs a switch connected to the first terminal of the input voltage and periodically opens and closes so that the input voltage is converted into a pulsatory voltage. This pulsatory voltage is then applied to a coil. A diode is arranged between the junction of the switch and the coil and the second terminal of the input voltage whilst a load and a charge capacitor in parallel thereto are arranged between the other end of the coil and the second terminal of the input voltage. The assembly operates in accordance with the known efficiency principle i.e., the current supplied to the load flows alternately through the switch and through the diode. The function of the switch is performed by a switching transistor which is driven by a periodical pulsatory voltage which saturates this transistor for a given part of the period. Such a configuration is known under different names in the literature; it will be referred to herein as a "chopper." A known advantage thereof, is that the switching transistor must be able to stand a high voltage or provide a great current but it need not dissipate a great power. The output voltage of the chopper is compared with a constant reference voltage. If the output voltage attempts to vary because the input voltage and/or the load varies, a voltage causing a duration modulation of the pulses is produced at the output of the comparison arrangement. As a result the quantity of the energy stored in the coil varies and the output voltage is maintained constant. In the German "Auslegeschrift" referred to it is therefore an object to provide a stabilized supply voltage device.

In the circuit arrangement according to the mentioned German "Auslegeschrift" the frequency of the load variations or a harmonic thereof is chosen as the frequency for the switching voltage. Particularly when the load fed by the chopper is the line deflection circuit of a picture display device, wherein thus the impedance of the load varies in the rhythm of the line frequency, the frequency of the switching voltage is equal to or is a multiple of the line frequency.

It is to be noted that the chopper need not necessarily be formed as that in the mentioned German "Auslegeschrift." In fact, it is known from literature that the efficiency diode and the coil may be exchanged. It is alternatively possible for the coil to be provided at the first terminal of the input voltage whilst the switching transistor is arranged between the other end and the second terminal of the input voltage. The efficiency diode is then provided between the junction of said end and the switching transistor and the load. It may be recognized that for all these modifications a voltage is present across the connections of the coil which voltage has the same frequency and the same shape as the pulsatory switching voltage. The control voltage of a line deflection circuit is a pulsatory voltage which causes the line output transistor to be saturates and cut off alternately. The invention is based on the recognition that the voltage present across the connections of the coil is suitable to function as such a control voltage and that the coil constitutes the primary of a transformer. To this end the circuit arrangement according to the invention is characterized in that a secondary winding of the transformer drives the switching element which applies a line deflection current to line deflection coils and by which the voltage for the final anode of a picture display tube which forms part of the picture display device is generated, and that the ratio between the period during which the switching transistor is saturated and the entire period, i.e., the switching transistor duty cycle is between 0.3 and 0.7 during normal operation.

The invention is also based on the recognition that the duration modulation which is necessary to stabilize the supply voltage with the switching transistor does not exert influence on the driving of the line output transistor. This resides in the fact that in case of a longer or shorter cut-off period of the line output transistor the current flowing through the line deflection coils thereof is not influenced because of the efficiency diode current and transistor current are taken over or, in case of a special kind of transistor, the collector-emitter current is taken over by the base collector current and conversely. However, in that case the above-mentioned ratios of 0.3 : 0.7 should be taken into account since otherwise this take-over principle is jeopardized.

As will be further explained the use of the switching transistor as a driver for the line output transistor in an embodiment to be especially described hereinafter has the further advantage that the line output transistor automatically becomes non-conductive when this switching transistor is short circuited so that the deflection and the EHT for the display tube drop out and thus avoid damage thereof.

Due to the step according to the invention the switching transistor in the stabilized supply functions as a driver for the line deflection circuit. The circuit arrangement according to the invention may in addition be equipped with a very efficient safety circuit so that the reliability is considerably enhanced, which is described in the U.S. Pat. No. 3,629,686. The invention is furthermore based on the recognition of the fact that the pulsatory voltage present across the connections of the coil is furthermore used and to this end the circuit arrangement according to the invention is characterized in that secondary windings of the transformer drive diodes which conduct simultaneously with the efficiency diode so as to generate further stabilized direct voltages, one end of said diodes being connected to ground.

In order that the invention may be readily carried into effect, a few embodiments thereof will now be described in detail by way of example with reference to the accompanying diagrammatic drawings in which:

FIG. 1 shows a principle circuit diagram wherein the chopper and the line deflection circuit are further shown but other circuits are not further shown.

FIGS. 2a, 2b and 2c show the variation as a function of time of two currents and of a voltage occurring in the circuit arrangement according to FIG. 1.

FIGS. 3a 3b, 3c and 3d show other embodiments of the chopper.

FIGS. 4a and 4b show modifications of part of the circuit arrangement of FIG. 1.

In FIG. 1 the reference numeral 1 denotes a rectifier circuit which converts the mains voltage supplied thereto into a non-stabilized direct voltage. The collector of a switching transistor 2 is connected to one of the two terminals between which this direct voltage is obtained, said transistor being of the npn-type in this embodiment and the base of which receives a pulsatory voltage which originates through a control stage 4 from a modulator 5 and causes transistor 2 to be saturated and cut off alternately. The voltage waveform 3 is produced at the emitter of transistor 2. In order to maintain the output voltage of the circuit arrangement constant, the duration of the pulses provided is varied in modulator 5. A pulse oscillator 6 supplies the pulsatory voltage to modulator 5 and is synchronized by a signal of line frequency which originates from the line oscillator 6' present in the picture display device. This line oscillator 6' is in turn directly synchronized in known manner by pulses 7' of line frequency which are present in the device and originate for example from a received television signal if the picture display device is a television receiver. Pulse oscillator 6 thus generates a pulsatory voltage the repetition frequency of which is the line frequency.

The emitter of switching transistor 2 is connected at one end to the cathode of an efficiency diode 7 whose other end is connected to the second input voltage terminal and at the other end to primary winding 8 of a transformer 9. Pulsatory voltage 3 which is produced at the cathode of efficiency diode 7 is clamped against the potential of said second terminal during the intervals when this diode conducts. During the other intervals the pulsatory voltage 3 assumes the value V _i . A charge capacitor 10 and a load 11 are arranged between the other end of winding 8 and the second input voltage terminal. The elements 2,7,8,10 and 11 constitute a so-called chopper producing a direct voltage across charge capacitor 10, provided that capacitor 10 has a sufficiently great value for the line frequency and the current applied to load 11 flowing alternately through switching transistor 2 or through efficiency diode 7. The output voltage V _o which is the direct voltage produced across charge capacitor 10 is applied to a comparison circuit 12 which compares the voltage V _o with a reference voltage. Comparison circuit 12 generates a direct voltage which is applied to modulator 5 so that the duration of the effective period δ T of switching transistor 2 relative to the period T of pulses 3 varies as a function of the variations of output voltage V ₀ . In fact, it is readily evident that output voltage V _o is proportional to the ratio δ :

V _o = V _i ^. δ

Load 11 of the chopper consists in the consumption of parts of the picture display device which are fed by output voltage V ₀ . In a practical embodiment of the circuit arrangement according to FIG. 1 wherein the mains alternating voltage has a nominal effective value of 220 V and the rectified voltage V i is approximately 270 V, output voltage V _o for δ = 0.5 is approximately 135 V. This makes it also possible, for example, to feed a line deflection circuit as is shown in FIG. 1 wherein load 11 then represents different parts which are fed by the chopper. Since voltage V _o is maintained constant due to pulse duration modulation, the supply voltage of this line deflection circuit remains constant with the favorable result that the line amplitude(= the width of the picture displayed on the screen of the picture display tube) likewise remains constant as well as the EHT required for the final anode of the picture display tube in the same circuit arrangement independent of the variations in the mains voltage and the load on the EHT generator (= variations in brightness).

However, variations in the line amplitude and the EHT may occur as a result of an insufficiently small internal impedance of the EHT generator. Compensation means are known for this purpose. A possibility within the scope of the present invention is to use comparison circuit 12 for this purpose. In fact, if the beam current passes through an element having a substantially quadratic characteristic, for example, a voltage-dependent resistor, then a variation for voltage V _o may be obtained through comparison circuit 12 which variation is proportional to the root of the variation in the EHT which is a known condition for the line amplitude to remain constant.

In addition this facilitates smoothing of voltage V _o since the repetition frequency of pulsatory voltage 3 is many times higher than that of the mains and a comparatively small value may be sufficient for charge capacitor 10. If charge capacitor 10 has a sufficiently high value for the line frequency, voltage V _o is indeed a direct voltage so that a voltage having the same form as pulsatory voltage 3 is produced across the terminals of primary winding 8. Thus voltages which have the same shape as pulsatory voltage 3 but have a greater or smaller amplitude are produced across secondary windings 13, 14 of transformer 9 (FIG. 1 shows only 2 secondary windings but there may be more). The invention is based on the recognition that one end of each secondary winding is connected to earth while the other end thereof drives a diode, the winding sense of each winding and the direction of conductance of each diode being chosen to be such that these diodes conduct during the same period as does efficiency diode 7. After smoothing, stabilized supply voltages, for example, at terminal 15 are generated in this manner at the amplitudes and polarities required for the circuit arrangements present in the picture display device. In FIG. 1 the voltage generated at terminal 15 is, for example, positive relative to earth. It is to be noted that the load currents of the supply voltages obtained in this manner cause a reduction of the switching power which is economized by efficiency diode 7. The sum of all diode currents including that of diode 7 is in fact equal to the current which would flow through diode 7 if no secondary winding were wound on transformer 9 and if no simultaneous diode were used. This reduction may be considered an additional advantage of the circuit arrangement according to the invention, for a diode suitable for smaller powers may then be used. However, it will be evident that the overall secondary load must not exceed the primary load since otherwise there is the risk of efficiency diode 7 being blocked so that stabilization of the secondary supply voltages would be out of the question.

It is to be noted that a parabola voltage of line frequency as shown at 28 is produced across the charge capacitor 10 if this capacitor is given a smaller capacitance so that consequently the so-called S-correction is established.

In FIG. 1 charge capacitors are arranged between terminals 15 etc. and earth so as to ensure that the voltages on these points are stabilized direct voltages. If in addition the mean value of the voltage on one of these terminals has been made equal to the effective value of the alternating voltage which is required for heating the filament of the picture display tube present in the picture display device, this voltage is suitable for this heating. This is a further advantage of the invention since the cheap generation of a stabilized filament voltage for the picture display tube has always been a difficult problem in transistorized arrangements.

A further advantage of the picture display device according to the invention is that transformer 9 can function as a separation transformer so that the different secondary windings can be separated from the mains and their lower ends can be connected to ground of the picture display device. The latter step makes it possible to connect a different apparatus such as, for example, a magnetic recording and/or playback apparatus to the picture display device without earth connection problems occurring.

In FIG. 1 the reference numeral 14 denotes a secondary winding of transformer 9 which in accordance with the previously mentioned recognition of the invention can drive line output transistor 16 of the line deflection circuit 17. Line deflection circuit 17 which is shown in a simplified form in FIG. 1 includes inter alia line deflection coils 18 and an EHT transformer 19 a secondary winding 20 of which serves for generating the EHT required for the acceleration anode of the picture display tube. Line deflection circuit 17 is fed by the output voltage V _o of the chopper which voltage is stabilized due to the pulse duration modulation with all previously mentioned advantages. Line deflection circuit 17 corresponds, for example, to similar arrangements which have been described in U.S. Pat. No. 3,504,224 issued Mar. 31, 1970 to J.J. Reichgelt et al., U.S. patent application Ser. No. 737,009 filed June 14, 1968 by W. H. Hetterscheid and U.S. application Ser. No. 26,497 filed April 8, 1970 by W. Hetterscheid et al. It will be evident that differently formed lined deflection circuits are alternatively possible.

It will now be shown that secondary winding 14 can indeed drive a line deflection circuit so that switching transistor 2 can function as a driver for the line deflection. FIGS. 2a and b show the variation as a function of time of the current i _C which flows in the collector of transistor 16 and of the drive voltage v ₁₄ across the terminals of secondary winding 14. During the flyback period (0, t ₁ ) transistor 16 must be fully cut off because a high voltage peak is then produced at its collector; voltage v ₁₄ must then be absolutely negative. During the scan period (t ₁ , t ₄ ) a sawtooth current i _C flows through the collector electrode of transistor 16 which current is first negative and then changes its direction. As the circuit arrangement is not free from loss, the instant t ₃ when current i _C becomes zero lies, as is known, before the middle of the scan period. At the end t ₄ of the scan period transistor 16 must be switched off again. However, since transistor 16 is saturated during the scan period and since this transistor must be suitable for high voltages and great powers so that its collector layer is thick, this transistor has a very great excess of charge carriers in both its base and collector layers. The removal of these charge carriers takes a period t _s which is not negligible whereafter the transistor is indeed switched off. Thus the fraction δ T of the line period T at which v ₁₄ is positive must end at the latest at the instant (t ₄ - t _s ) located after the commencement (t = 0) of the previous flyback.

The time δ T may be initiated at any instant t ₂ which is located between the end t ₁ of the flyback period and the instant t ₃ when collector current i _C reverses its direction. It is true that emitter current flows through transistor 16 at the instant t ₂ , but collector current i _C is not influenced thereby, at least not when the supply voltage (= V _o ) for line deflection circuit 17 is high enough. All this has been described in the U.S. Pat. No. 3,504,224. The same applies to line deflection circuits wherein the collector base diode does not function as an efficiency diode as is the case in the described circuit 17, but wherein an efficiency diode is arranged between collector and emitter of the line output transistor. In such a case the negative part of the current i _C of FIG. 2a represents the current flowing through the said efficiency diode.

After the instant t ₃ voltage v ₁₄ must be positive. In other words, the minimum duration of the period T when voltage v ₁₄ must be positive is (t ₄ - t _s ) - t ₃ whilst the maximum duration thereof is (t ₄ - t _s ) - t ₁ . In a television system employing 625 lines per raster the line period t ₄ is approximately 64 μus and the flyback period is approximately 12 μus. Without losses in the circuit arrangement instant t ₃ would be located approximately 26 μus after the instant t ₁ , and with losses a reasonable value is 22 μus which is 34 μus after the commencement of the period. If for safety's sake it is assumed that t _s lasts approximately 10 μus, the extreme values of δ T are approximately 20 and 42 μus and consequently the values for δ are approximately 0.31 and 0.66 at a mean value which is equal to approximately 0.49. It was previously stated that a mean value of δ = 0.5 was suitable. Line deflection circuit 17 can therefore indeed be used in combination with the chopper in the manner described, and the relative variation of δ may be (0.66 - 0.31) : 0.49 = 71.5 percent. This is more than necessary to obviate the variations in the mains voltage or in the various loads and to establish the East-West modulation and ripple compensation to be described hereinafter. In fact, if it is assumed that the mains voltage varies between -15 and +10 percent of the nominal value of 220 V, while the 50 Hz ripple voltage which is superimposed on the input voltage V _i has a peak-to-peak value of 40 V and V _i is nominally 270 V, then the lowest occurring V _i is:

0.85 × 270 V - 20 V = 210 V and the highest occurring V _i is

1.1 × 270 V + 20 V = 320 V. For an output voltage V _o of 135 V the ratio must thus vary between

δ = 135 : 210 = 0.64 and δ = 135 : 320 = 0.42.

A considerable problem presenting itself is that of the simultaneous or non-simultaneous drive of line output transistor 16 with switching transistor 2, it being understood that in case of simultaneous drive both transistors are simultaneously bottomed, that is during the period δ T. This depends on the winding sense of secondary winding 14 relative to that of primary winding 8. In FIG. 1 it has been assumed that the drive takes place simultaneously so that the voltage present across winding 14 has the shape shown in FIG. 2b. This voltage assumes the value n(V _i - V _o ) in the period δ T and the value -nVo in the period (1 - δ )T, wherein n is the ratio of the number of turns on windings 14 and 8 and wherein V _o is maintained constant at nominal mains voltage V _o = δ V _inom . However, if as a result of an increase or a decrease of the mains voltage V _i increases or decreases proportionally therewith, i.e., V _i = V _i nom + Δ V, the positive portion of V ₁₄ becomes equal to n(V _i nom - V _o +Δ V) = n [(1 -δ)V _i nom +ΔV] = n(0.5 V _inom +ΔV) if δ = 0.5 for V _i = V _i nom. Relatively, this is a variation which is twice as great. For example, if V _i nom = 270 V and V _o = 135 V, a variation in the mains voltage of from -15 to +10 percent causes a variation of V _i of from -40.5 V to +27 V which ranges from -30 to +20 percent of 135 V which is present across winding 8 during the period δ T. The result is that transistor 16 can always be bottomed over a large range of variation. If the signal of FIG. 2b would be applied through a resistor to the base of transistor 16, the base current thereof would have to undergo the same variation while the transistor would already be saturated in case of too low a voltage. In this case it is assumed that transformer 9 is ideal (without loss) and that coil 21 has a small inductance as is explained in the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 737,009 above mentioned. It is therefore found to be desirable to limit the base current of transistor 16.

This may be effected by providing a coil 22 having a large value inductance, approximately 100 μH, between winding 14 and the small coil 21. The variation of said base current i _b is shown in FIG. 2c but not to the same scale as the collector current of FIG. 2a. During the conducting interval δ T current i _b varies as a linear function of time having a final value of wherein L represents the inductance of coil 22. This not only provides the advantage that this final value is not immediately reached, but it can be shown that variation of this final value as a function of the mains voltage has been reduced, for there applies at nominal mains voltage that: If the mains voltage V _i = V _i nom +Δ V, then ##SPC1## because V _i nom = 2 V _o . Thus this variation is equal to that of the mains voltage and is not twice as great.

During switching off, t ₂ , of transistor 16 coil 22 must exert no influence and coil 21 must exert influence which is achieved by arranging a diode 23 parallel to coil 22. Furthermore the control circuit of transistor 16 in this example comprises the two diodes 24 and 25 as described in U.S. application Ser. No. 26,497 above referred to, wherein one of these diodes, diode 25 in FIG. 1, must be shunted by a resistor.

The control circuit of transistor 16 may alternatively be formed as is shown in FIG. 4. In fact, it is known that coil 21 may be replaced by the parallel arrangement of a diode 21' and a resistor 21" by which the inverse current can be limited. To separate the path of the inverse current from that of the forward current the parallel arrangement of a the diode 29' and a resistor 29" must then be present. This leads to the circuit arrangement shown in the upper part of FIG. 4. This circuit arrangement may now be simplified if it is noted that diodes 25 and 21' on the one hand and diodes 23 and 29' on the other hand are series-arranged. The result is shown in the lower part of FIG. 4 which, as compared with the circuit arrangement of FIG. 1, employs one coil less and an additional resistor.

FIG. 3 shows possible modifications of the chopper. FIG. 3a shown in a simplified form the circuit arrangement according to FIG. 1 wherein the pulsatory voltage present across the connections of windings 8 has a peak-to-peak amplitude of V _i - V _o = 0.5 V _i for δ = 0.5, As has been stated, the provision of coil 22 gives a relative variation for the base current of transistor 16 which is equal to that of the mains voltage. In the cases according to FIG. 3b, 3c and 3d the peak-to-peak amplitude of the voltage across winding 8 is equal to V _i so that the provision of coil 22 results in a relative variation which is equal to half that of the mains voltage which is still more favorable than in the first case.

Transistors of the npn type are used in FIG. 3. If transistors of the pnp type are used, the relevant efficiency diodes must of course be reversed.

In this connection it is to be noted that it is possible to obtain an output voltage V _o with the aid of the modifications according to FIGS. 3b, c and d, which voltage is higher than input voltage V _i . These modifications may be used in countries such as, for example, the United of America or France where the nominal mains voltage is 117 or 110 V without having to modify the rest of the circuit arrangement.

The above-mentioned remark regarding the sum of the diode currents only applies, however, for the modifications shown in FIGS. 3a and d.

If line output transistor 16 is not simultaneously driven with switching transistor 2, efficiency diodes 7 conducts simultaneously with transistor 16 i.e., during the period which is denoted by δ T in FIGS. 1 and 2b. During that period the output voltage V _o of the chopper is stabilized so that the base current of transistor 16 is stabilized without further difficulty. However, a considerable drawback occurs. In FIG. 1 the reference numeral 26 denotes a safety circuit the purpose of which is to safeguard switching transistor 2 when the current supplied to load 11 and/or line deflection circuit 17 becomes to high, which happens because the chopper stops. After a given period output voltage V _o is built up again, but gradually which means that the ratio δ is initially small in the order of 0.1. All this is described in U.S. patent No. 3,629,686. The same phenomenon occurs when the display device is switched on. Since δ = 0.1 corresponds to approximately 6 μs when T = 64 μs, efficiency diode 7 conducts in that case for 64 - 6 = 58 μus so that transistor 16 is already switched on at the end of the scan or at a slightly greater ratio δ during the flyback. This would cause an inadmissibly high dissipation. For this reason the simultaneous drive is therefore to be preferred.

The line deflection circuit itself is also safeguarded: in fact, if something goes wrong in the supply, the driver voltage of the line deflection circuit drops out because the switching voltage across the terminals of primary winding 8 is no longer present so that the deflection stops. This particularly happens when switching transistor 2 starts to constitute a short-circuit between emitter and collector with the result that the supply voltage V _o for the line deflection circuit in the case of FIG. 1 becomes higher, namely equal to V _i . However, the line output transformer is now cut off and is therefore also safe as well as the picture display tube and other parts of the display device which are fed by terminal 15 or the like. However, this only applies to the circuit arrangement according to FIG. 1 or 3a.

Pulse oscillator 6 applies pulses of line frequency to modulator 5. It may be advantageous to have two line frequency generators as already described, to wit pulse oscillator 6 and line oscillator 6' which is present in the picture display device and which is directly synchronized in known manner by line synchronizing pulses 7'. In fact, in this case line oscillator 6' applies a signal of great amplitude and free from interference to pulse oscillator 6. However, it is alternatively possible to combine pulse oscillator 6 and line oscillator 6' in one single oscillator 6" (see FIG. 1) which results in an economy of components. It will be evident that line oscillator 6' and oscillator 6" may alternatively be synchronized indirectly, for example, by means of a phase discriminator. It is to be noted neither pulse oscillator 6, line oscillator 6' and oscillator 6" nor modulator 5 can be fed by the supply described since output voltage V _o is still not present when the mains voltage is switched on. Said circuit arrangements must therefore be fed directly from the input terminals. If as described above these circuit arrangements are to be separated from the mains, a small separation transformer can be used whose primary winding is connected between the mains voltage terminals and whose secondary winding is connected to ground at one end and controls a rectifier at the other end.

Capacitor 27 is arranged parallel to efficiency diode 7 so as to reduce the dissipation in switching transistor 2. In fact, if transistor 2 is switched off by the pulsatory control voltage, its collector current decreases and its collector-emitter voltage increases simultaneously so that the dissipated power is not negligible before the collector current has becomes zero. If efficiency diode 7 is shunted by capacitor 27 the increase of the collector-emitter voltage is delayed i.e., this voltage does not assume high values until the collector current has already been reduced. It is true that in that case the dissipation in transistor 2 slightly increases when it is switched on by the pulsatory control voltage but on the other hand since the current flowing through diode 7 has decreased due to the presence of the secondary windings, its inverse current is also reduced when transistor 2 is switched on and hence its dissipation has become smaller. In addition it is advantageous to delay these switching-on and switching-off periods to a slight extent because the switching pulses then contain fewer Fourier components of high frequency which may cause interferences in the picture display device and which may give rise to visible interferences on the screen of the display tube. These interferences occupy a fixed position on the displayed image because the switching frequency is the line frequency which is less disturbing to the viewer. In a practical circuit wherein the line frequency is 15,625 Hz and wherein switching transistor 2 is an experimental type suitable for a maximum of 350 V collector-emitter voltage or 1 A collector current and wherein efficiency diode 7 is of the Philips type BA 148 the capacitance of capacitor 27 is approximately 680 pF whilst the load is 70 W on the primary and 20 W on the secondary side of transformer 9. The collector dissipation upon switching off is 0.3 W (2.5 times smaller than without capacitor 27) and 0.7 W upon switching on.

As is known the so-called pincushion distortion is produced in the picture display tubes having a substantially flat screen and large deflection angles which are currently used. This distortion is especially a problem in color television wherein a raster correction cannot be brought about by magnetic means. The correction of the so-called East-West pincushion distortion i.e., in the horizontal direction on the screen of the picture display tube can be established in an elegant manner with the aid of the circuit arrangement according to the invention. In fact, if the voltage generated by comparison circuit 12 and being applied to modulator 5 for duration-modulating pulsatory voltage 3 is modulated by a parabola voltage 28 of field frequency, pulsatory voltage 3 is also modulated thereby. If the power consumption of the line deflection circuit forms part of the load on the output voltage of the chopper, the signal applied to the line deflection coils is likewise modulated in the same manner. Conditions therefore are that the parabola voltage 28 of field frequency has a polarity such that the envelope of the sawtooth current of line frequency flowing through the line deflection coils has a maximum in the middle of the scan of the field period and that charge capacitor 10 has not too small an impedance for the field frequency. On the other hand the other supply voltages which are generated by the circuit arrangement according to the invention and which might be hampered by this component of field frequency must be smoothed satisfactorily.

A practical embodiment of the described example with the reference numerals given provides an output for the supply of approximately 85 percent at a total load of 90 W, the internal resistance for direct current loads being 1.5 ohms and for pulsatory currents being approximately 10 ohms. In case of a variation of ± 10 percent of the mains voltage, output voltage V _o is stable within 0.4 V. Under the nominal circumstances the collector dissipation of switching transistor 2 is approximately 2.5 W.

Since the internal resistance of the supply is so small, it can be used advantageously, for example, at terminal 15 for supplying a class-B audio amplifier which forms part of the display device. Such an amplifier has the known advantages that its dissipation is directly proportional to the amplitude of the sound to be reproduced and that its output is higher than that of a class-A amplifier. On the other hand a class-A amplifier consumes a substantially constant power so that the internal resistance of the supply voltage source is of little importance. However, if this source is highly resistive, the supply voltage is modulated in the case of a class-B amplifier by the audio information when the sound intensity is great which may detrimentally influence other parts of the display device. This drawback is prevented by means of the supply according to the invention.

The 50 Hz ripple voltage which is superimposed on the rectified input voltage V _i is compensated by comparison circuit 12 and modulator 5 since this ripple voltage may be considered to be a variation of input voltage V _i . A further compensation is obtained by applying a portion of this ripple voltage with suitable polarity to comparison circuit 12. It is then sufficient to have a lower value for the smoothing capacitor which forms part of rectifier circuit 1 (see FIG. 3). The parabola voltage 28 of field frequency originating from the field time base is applied to the same circuit 12 so as to correct the East-West pincushion distortion.

ITT NOKIA 6381 PIP DIGIVISION  BLACKLINE  CHASSIS  DIGI BE-2 Deflection Signal Processing
Video Clamping Circuit
During line retrace, the clamping circuit (output Pin 21,
DPU 2540) maintains the analog video signal at the correct
working point of the integrated analog-digital converter, at the
input of Video Codec IC VCU 2133, Pin 35. For the second
video input at Pin 37 of the VCU, Pin 4 of the DPU delivers a
further clamping pulse.
Pulse Separation
The digitized FBAS (composite colour) signal, which is supplied
as a parallel 7-bit signal from the Video Codec IC 650
(VCU 2133, Pins 2-8) to IC 620 (DPU 2540, Pins 15-9), passes
through a digital low-pass filter internally for interference
elimination, and is then fed in parallel to the circuits for
separating the horizontal and vertical synchronous pulses. The
circuits function independently of each other, and thus ensure
optimum separation.
Horizontal Synchronization
Two operating modes are provided for horizontal
synchronization, depending on whether the station received (or
the video recorder connected) is transmitting a standard PAL
signal, in which a fixed frequency-response ratio between colour
carrier frequency and line frequency does or does not apply. In
the former case, we speak of colour-locked mode, in the second
case of non-locked mode. Switch-over between these two
modes is performed automatically by the standard-signal
detector. In colour-locked mode. after the phase position has
been adjusted in non-locked mode, the programmable
frequency divider is set to the standard divider ratio, and the
phase comparison function between synchronous pulses and
horizontal retrace is switched off, so that interference pulses
and noise no longer affect the horizontal deflection fucntion. ln
non-locked mode, which is necessary when the colour carrier
frequency and the line frequency of the station do not have a
fixed frequency ratio, the line frequency is generated by dividing
down the clock pulse frequency of 17.7 MHz in the
programmable divider so as to produce the correct line
frequency. Correct phase position of this line frequency is
ensured by the phase comparator, which detects the phase and
frequency errors by means of digital phase comparison between
the separated horizontal synchronous pulses and the horizontal
retrace pulses at Pin 23, and corrects the programmable divider
accordingly.
The line-frequency deflection signal is then available at Pin 31
of DPU 2540 for controlling the deflection circuit and generating
the high voltage. Note that this signal already contains all
necessary corrections, which have been carried out inside the
IC via the IM Bus by comparison with the alignment data stored
in the CCU memory.
Vertical Synchronization
As with horizontal synchronization, we also distinguish here
between colour-locked and non-locked modes. In colour-locked
mode, the line frequency is divided down in a fixed ratio so as to
obtain the vertical frequency. In non-locked mode, the settable
divider is operated as a trigger oscillator, and triggered by the
integrated vertical synchronous pulse, with a large trigger
window being used to trap the synchronization, while for
operation the system then switches over to a small trigger
window. All these mode switch-over functions are performed
automatically.
The vertical deflection sawtooth is generated digitally, including
all correction values such as linearity, amplitude and position,
and results from the output signals of Pins 26 and 27. It is
passed via DV 2 to Pin 1 of IC 401, the integrated vertical output
stage TDA 8172. The vertical parabola required for controlling
the east-west modulator is also supplied at Pin 28 by the
deflection processor, and fed via DV 23 to the base of T 562.



































































ITT NOKIA 6381 PIP DIGIVISION  BLACKLINE  CHASSIS  DIGI BE-2 Digital Board BE/2 FAST, Video Signal Processing
The entire video signal processing function for PAL and
SECAM, the videotext decoder and the deflection signal
generator, are located together on one board, the Digital
Board B-

This contains the VCU 2133 as an analog-digital converter for
the video signals, the PVPU 2203 and SPU 2220 for PAL and
SECAM signal processing respectively, the DTI 2222 for
improved reproduction of colour transitions, the TPU 2732 with
page buffer IC 645 for videotext decoding, the deflection
processor DPU 2543 and clock pulse generator MCU 2600 for
generating the working clock pulse for all processors.
Digital Board B has 2 separate inputs for video signals. The
internal FBAS (composite colour) signal is fed from the RF
module via plug connector DV 4 to impedance converter T 660,
and further from the emitter ofT 660 to Pin 35 of VCU 2133, IC
650. If a video signal is fed in at the SCART socket, this

passes
through DV 7 and T 680 as an impedance converter to Pin 37 of
the VCU. To clamp the porch levels each to 5.5 V, the DPU
delivers specially generated clamping pulses from its Pins 21
and 4 to input Pins 35 and 37 of the VCU. Switch-over to the
desired signal source is performed inside the VCU, and is
controlled via the IM Bus.
After conversion of the FBAS (composite colour) signal selected
into digital form (7-bit gray code), this is passed from output
Pins 2-8 ofthe VCU to SPU 2220, IC 630, to TPU 2732, IC 640
and to DPU 2540.
The further path of the video signal leads first to the SECAM
processor SPU 2220. Here the signal standard is identified and
appropriately switched. In the case of a PAL signal, the input
information is passed unaltered to the video output (Pins 14-20),
and thus on to the input of PVPU 2203, Pins 5-11.
For further processing of the PAL signal, it is first split inside the
IC into luminance and chroma components. The conditioned
luminance signal, extended by 1 bit, appears on the output side
at Pins 32-39, and passes from here to DTI 2222, Pins 6-13.
The chroma signal component is demodulated, decoded and
converted into the colour difference signals in PVPU 2203;
these signals are then also passed (in multiplex mode, together
with picture tube beam current measured data), via output Pins
27-30 to DTI 2222, Pins 17-20.
At this point, the SECAM chroma signal path from SPU 2220,
output Pins 23-26, rejoins the main path. If the input signal is
identified as a SECAM signal in the SPU, the SECAM decoder
is activated, and the decoded signal appears at the output in the
same form as with the PAL processor.
In this case, the luminance signal component is passed through
an integrated delay circuit of 3.7 us, in order to compensate for
the corresponding travel time in the SECAM colour decoder,
and is then fed on the same path as the PAL signal (Pins 14-20,
SPU 2220, PVPU 2203) to DTI 2222, Pins 6-13. All adjustment
functions required for the signals, such as contrast, brightness,
colour intensity, etc. are of course controlled inside the IC via
the IM Bus.
Integrated circuit DTI 2222 serves solely to improve
reproduction of colour transitions on the screen. Since (owing to
the smaller transmission bandwidth with chroma) the signal
leading edges are very flat compared with Y-signals, a clear
improvement in the quality of colour reproduction can be
achieved by electronically increasing the steepness of the
edges. Since the signal manipulation involved increases travel
times in the chroma channel, this must be compensated by a
corresponding delay in the luminance channel. This function is
contained in DTI 2222, so that there are no differences in travel
time at the outputs of this circuit (Pins 27-34 for Y and Pins 22-25 for chroma).





























Chassis DIGI B-E 110° FST. Modular Parts.
Digital Video Processing Modul: Digiboard B/2T MULTI
Contains DIGIT2000 Digital Video Processing ChipSet.

VCU 2133 A (ITT VCU2133 A) (Video Codec Decodec Unit)
DPU 2543 (ITT DPU2543) (Digital Deflection Processor Unit)
PVPU 2203 (ITT PVPU2203) (PAL and Video Processor Unit)
DTI 2222 (ITT DTI2222) (Digital Transient Improvement [Chroma])
TPU 2732 (ITT TPU2732) (Teletext Processor Unit)
MCU 2600 (ITT MCU2600) (Main Clock Unit)

ITT DIGIVISION CHIPSET FUNCTIONS.

Set of three integrated circuits for digital video signal processing in color-television receivers: ITT DIGIVISION.

DIGITAL CRT TUBE Cathode RAY CURRENT CONTROL / Cut OFF / Drive and processing.In this IC set, the dark currents and the white levels of the three electron guns, the leakage currents of the cathodes, and a light-detector current are measured during four successive vertical blanking intervals. The cathode leakage currents and the dark currents are measured in the first half of the vertical blanking interval, and the light-detector current and the white level currents are measured at the end of this interval. From these measured data and alignment data stored in a reprogrammable memory (ps), a microprocessor (mp) contained together with the memory (ps) in an integrated circuit (ic2) derives operating data for the picture tube (b) as well as further data. These operating data are transferred over a wire of a chroma bus (cb), over which chroma signals are transferred during the vertical sweep, into a shift register (sr) of a further integrated circuit (ic3) at the beginning of each vertical blanking interval, from where they are passed on to the picture tube (b) in groups via digital-to-analog converters and analog amplifiers. By the use of the chroma bus for a dual purpose, and the successive measurements of the above-mentioned picture-tube data, a saving of external terminals of the integrated circuits (ic1, ic2, ic3) is achieved.

1. Set of three integrated circuits(ic1, ic2, ic3) for digital video-signal processing in color-television receivers,
wherein the first integrated circuit (ic1) contains an analog-to-digital converter (ad) followed by a first bus interface circuit (if1) for a serial data bus (sb), and a first multiplexer (mx1) following the first bus interface circuit (if1), the analog-to-digital converter (ad) being fed with measured data corresponding to the cathode currents of the picture tube (b) flowing at "black" (="dark current") and "white" (="white level") in each of the three electron guns, and with the signal of an ambient-light detector (ls) via a second multiplexer (mx) in the vertical blanking interval, and the first multiplexer (mx1) being fed with the processed digital chrominance signals (cs),
wherein the second integrated circuit (ic2) contains a microprocessor (mp), an electrically reprogrammable memory (ps), and a second serial-data-bus interface circuit (if2) corresponding to the first bus interface circuit (if1), the memory (ps) holding alignment data and nominal dark-current/white-level data of the picture tube used (b) which were entered by the manufacturer of the color-television receiver and, together with the measured data, are used by the microprocessor (mp) to generate video-signal-independent operating data for the picture tube (b), and
wherein the third integrated circuit (ic3) contains a demultiplexer (dx), an analog RGB matrix (m), and three analog amplifiers (vr, vg, vb) each designed to drive one of the electron guns via an external video output stage (ve), the dark current of the picture tube (b) being adjusted via the operating point of the respective analog amplifier, and the white level of the picture tube (b) being adjusted by adjusting the gain of the respective amplifier after digital-to-analog conversion, and with the demultiplexer (dx) connected to the first multiplexer (mx1)of the first integrated circuit (ic1) via a chroma bus (cb),
Characterized by the Following Features:
The first multiplexer (mx1) consists of three electronic switches (s1, s2, s3),
the first of which (s1) has its input grounded through a first resistor (r1) and connected to the collectors of external transistors (tr, tg, tb) which are each associated with one of the electron guns and the base of each of which is driven by the associated video output stage, while the emitter is connected to the associated electron gun system, and the output of the first switch (s1) is connected to the input of the analog-to-digital converter (ad);
the second of which (s2) has its input connected to the light detector (ls), while its output is coupled with the input of the analog-to-digital converter (ad), and
the third of which (s3) has its input connected to the input of the first electronic switch (s1) via a second resistor (r2), and its output is grounded, the value of the second resistor (r2) being about one order of magnitude smaller than that of the first resistor (r1);
the three electronic switches (s1, s2, s3) have the following positions:

______________________________________

s1 s2 s3

______________________________________

during vertical closed open closed sweep during vertical closed/open open/closed open/closed retrace: for leakage/light- det. current meas. for white level closed open closed measurement for dark current closed open open measurement

______________________________________

the measurements of the dark current together with the white level of each electron gun and the measurements of the light-detector current together with the cathode leakage currents are performed in four successive vertical blanking intervals;
to this end, the cathodes are connected at one end to a voltage for blacker than black (us), and at the other end to a voltage for black (ud) and then to a voltage for white (uw) in accordance with the following table:

______________________________________

Measurement in the first at about the Vertical half of the end of the blanking vertical vertical interval blanking blanking Cathode No. interval interval red green blue

______________________________________

1 Leakage cur- Light-detect- us us us rents of the or current cathodes 2 Dark current White level ud/uw us us red red 3 Dark current White level us ud/uw us green green 4 Dark current White level us us ud/uw blue blue

______________________________________

the measured data are transferred from the analog-to-digital converter (ad) to the microprocessor (mp) of the second integrated circuit (ic2) via the two interface circuits (if1, if2) and the data bus (sb) at an appropriate instant, and
the video-signal-independent operating data for the picture tube (b), which are generated by the microprocessor (mp), are transferred from the second integrated circuit (ic2) via the two interface circuits (if1, if2) and a line (db) to the first multiplexer (mx1) of the first integrated circuit (ic1) at an appropriate instant, and from there over a wire of the chroma bus (cb) into a shift register (sr) of the third integrated circuit (ic3) shortly after the beginning of the next vertical blanking interval, the parallel outputs of which shift register (sr) are combined in groups each assigned to one type of operating value, and each of the groups is connected to one digital-to-analog converter (dh, ddr, ddg, ddd, dwr, dwg, dwb) which drives the RGB matrix (m) or the respective analog amplifier (vr, vg, vb).
. 2. An integrated-circuit set as claimed in claim 1, characterized in that the voltage for blacker than black (us) is applied to the cathodes of the picture tube (b) during the data transfer to the shift register (sr). 3. An integrated-circuit set as claimed in claim 2, characterized in that the microprocessor (mp) determines the appropriate instant for the measured-data transfer, and that, if a measurement has not yet been finished at that instant, the measured data of the corresponding earlier measurement are transferred. 4. An integrated-circuit set as claimed in claim 3, characterized in that the measurement performed in a vertical blanking interval is not enabled until the data of the preceding measurement have been transferred to the microprocessor (mp). 5. An integrated-circuit set as claimed in claim 2, characterized in that the measurement performed in a vertical blanking interval is not enabled until the data of the preceding measurement have been transferred to the microprocessor (mp). 6. An integrated-circuit set as claimed in claim 1, characterized in that the microprocessor (mp) determines the appropriate instant for the measured-data transfer, and that, if a measurement has not yet been finished at that instant, the measured data of the corresponding earlier measurement are transferred. 7. An integrated-circuit set as claimed in claim 6, characterized in that the measurement performed in a vertical blanking interval is not enabled until the data of the preceding measurement have been transferred to the microprocessor (mp). 8. An integrated-circuit set as claimed in claim 1, characterized in that the measurement performed in a vertical blanking interval is not enabled until the data of the preceding measurement have been transferred to the microprocessor (mp).

Description:

The present invention relates to a set of three integrated circuits for digital video signal processing in color-television receivers as is set forth in the preamble of claim 1. An IC set of this kind is described in a publication by INTERMETALL entitled "Eine neue Dimension-VLSI-Digital-TV-System", Freiburg im Breisgau, September 1981, on pages 6 to 11 (see also the corresponding English edition entitled "A new dimension-VLSI Digital TV System", also dated September 1981).
The first integrated circuit, designated in the above-mentioned publications by "MAA 2200" and called "Video Processor Unit" (VPU), includes an analog-to-digital converter followed by a first serial-data-bus interface circuit which, in turn, is followed by a first multiplexer. During the vertical blanking interval, the analog-to-digital converter is fed, via a second multiplexer, with measured data corresponding to the cathode currents of the picture tube flowing at "black" (="dark current") and "white" ("white level") in each of the three electron guns, and with the signal of an ambient-light detector. The processed digital chrominance signals are applied to the first multiplexer.
The second integrated circuit, designated by "MAA 2000" and called "central control unit" (CCU) in the above publications, contains a microprocessor, an electrically reprogrammable memory, and a second serial-data-bus interface circuit. The memory holds alignment data and nominal dark-current/white-level data entered by the manufacturer of the color-television receiver. From these data and the measured data, the microprocessor derives video-signal-independent operating data for the picture tube.
The third integrated circuit, designated by "MAA 2100" and called "video-codec unit" (VCU) in the above publications, includes a demultiplexer, an analog RGB matrix, and three analog amplifiers each designed to drive one of the electron guns via an external video output stage. After digital-to-analog conversion, the dark current of the picture tube is adjusted via the operating point of the respective analog amplifier, and the white level of the picture tube is adjusted by adjusting the gain of the respective analog amplifier. The demultiplexer is connected to the first multiplexer of the first integrated circuit via a chroma bus.
As to the prior art concerning such digital color-television receiver systems, reference is also made to the journal "Elektronik", Aug. 14, 1981 (No. 16), pages 27 to 35, and the journal "Electronics", Aug. 11, 1981, pages 97 to 103.
During the further development of the prior art system following the above-mentioned publication dates, the developers were faced with the problem of how to accomplish the dark-current/white-level control of the picture tube within the existing system, particularly with respect to measured-data acquisition and transfer and to the transfer of the operating data to the picture tube.
Another requirement imposed during the further development of the prior art system was that the leakage currents of the electron guns of the picture tube be measured and processed within the existing system. The solution of these problems is to take into account the requirement that the number of external terminals of the individual integrated circuits be kept to a minimum.
The object of the invention as claimed is to solve the problems pointed out. The essential principles of the solution, which directly give the advantages of the invention, are, on the one hand, the division of the measurement to four successive vertical blanking intervals and, on the other hand, the utilization of one wire of the chroma bus at the beginning of the next vertical blanking interval as well as the measurement of the ambient light by means of the light detector and the measurement of the leakage currents during a single vertical blanking interval.
The invention will now be explained in more detail with reference to the accompanying drawing, which is a block diagram of one embodiment of the IC set in accordance with the invention. It shows the first, second, and third integrated circuits ic1, ic2, and ic3, which are drawn as rectangles bordered by heavy lines. The first integrated circuit ic1 includes the analog-to-digital converter ad, which converts the measured dark-current, white-level, ambient-light, and leakage-current data into digital signals, which are fed to the first bus interface circuit if1. The latter is connected via the line db to the first multiplexer mx1, which interleaves data from the first bus interface circuit if1 with digital chrominance signals cs produced in the first integrated circuit ic1, and places the interleaved signals on the chroma bus cb. The generation of the digital chrominance signals cs is outside the scope of the present invention and is disclosed in the references cited above.
The first integrated circuit ic1 further includes the second multiplexer mx2, which consists of the three electronic switches s1, s2, s3, and represents a subcircuit which is essential for the invention. The input of the first switch s1 is grounded through the first resistor r1, and connected to the collectors of the external transistors tr, tg, tb, each of which is associated with one of the electron guns. Via the base-emitter paths of these transistors, the cathodes of the three electron guns are driven by the video output stages ve. The final letters r, g, and b in the reference characters tr, tg, and tb and in the reference characters explained later indicate the assignment to the electron gun for RED (r), GREEN (g), and BLUE (b), respectively. The output of the first switch s1 is connected to the input of the analog-to-digital converter ad.
The input of the second switch s2 is connected to the light detector ls, which has its other terminal connected to a fixed voltage u and combines with the grounded resistor r3 to form a voltage divider. The input of the second switch s2 is thus connected to the tap of this voltage divider, while the output of this switch, too, is coupled to the input of the analog-to-digital converter ad.
The input of the third switch s3 is connected to the input of the first switch s1 via the second resistor r2, while the output of the third switch s3 is grounded. The value of the resistor r1 is about one order of magnitude greater than that of the resistor r2.
For the whole duration of the picture shown on the screen of the picture tube b, and throughout the vertical sweep, the first switch s1 and the third switch s3 are closed, and the second switch s2 is open. During the vertical retrace interval, for the white-level measurement, the switches s1, s3 are closed, and the switch s2 is open; for the dark-current measurement and the leakage-current measurement, the switch s1 is closed, and the switches s2, s3 are open, and for the light-detector-current measurement, the switches s2, s3 are closed, and the switch s1 is open.
The measurements of the dark current and the white level of each electron gun and the measurements of the light-detector current and the leakage currents are made in four successive vertical blanking intervals. One end of the respective cathode is connected to a voltage us for blacker-than-black, and the other end is connected to a voltage ud for black and then to a voltage uw for white, in accordance with the following table:

______________________________________

Measurement in the first at about the Vertical half of the end of the blanking vertical vertical interval blanking blanking Cathode No. interval interval red green blue

______________________________________

1 Leakage cur- Light-detect- us us us rents of the or current cathodes 2 Dark current White level ud/uw us us red red 3 Dark current White level us ud/uw us green green 4 Dark current White level us us ud/uw blue blue

______________________________________

The voltage ud for black is, as usual, a voltage which just causes no brightness on the screen of the picture tube b, i.e., a voltage just below the dark threshold of the picture tube. The voltage us for blacker-than-block is then a cathode voltage lying further in the black direction than the voltage for black. The voltage for white is the voltage for the screen brightness to be measured; the brightness of the screen is generally below the maximum permissible value.
Thus, two measurements are made during each vertical blanking interval, namely one in the first half, preferably at one-third of the pulse duration of the vertical blanking interval, and the other at about the end of the first half. During the four successive vertical blanking intervals, the first measurement determines the leakage currents of the cathodes and the dark currents for red, green, and blue. The second measurements determine the light-detector current and the white levels for red, green, and blue. During the measurement of the cathode leakage currents and the light-detector current, all three cathodes are at the voltage us. During the measurements of the dark current and the white level of the respective cathode, the latter is connected to the respective dark-current cathode voltage ud and white-level cathode voltage uw, respectively, while the cathodes of the two other electron guns, which are not being measured, are at the voltage us.
The second integrated circuit circuit ic2 contains the microprocessor mp, the electrically reprogrammable memory ps, and the second bus interface circuit if2, which is associated with the serial data bus sb in this integrated circuit and also connects the microprocessor mp and the memory ps with one another and with itself. The memory ps holds alignment data and nominal dark-current/white-value data of the picture tube used, which were entered by the manufacturer. From this alignment and nominal data and from the measured data obtained via the second multiplexer mx2 and the analog-to-digital converter ad of the first integrated circuit ic1, the microprocessor mp derives video-signal-independent operating data for the picture tube.
The derivation of these operating data is also outside the scope of the invention; it should only be mentioned that with respect to the operating data of the picture tube, the microprocessor performs a control function in accordance with a predetermined control characteristic.
The third integrated circuit ic3 includes the demultiplexer dx, which is connected to the first multiplexer mx1 of the first integrated circuit ic1 via the chroma bus cb and separates the chrominance signals cs and the operating data of the picture tube from the interleaved signals transferred over the chroma bus. While the transfer of measured data from the analog-to-digital converter ad to the microprocessor mp of the second integrated circuit ic2 takes place via the two interface circuits if1, if2 and the data bus sb at an appropriate instant, the video-signal-independent operating data for the picture tube b, which are derived by the microprocessor mp, are transferred from the second integrated circuit ic2 via the two interface circuits if1, if2 and the line db to the first multiplexer mx1 at an appropriate instant, and from the first multiplexer mx1 over a wire of the chroma bus cb into the shift register sr of the third integrated circuit ic3 shortly after the beginning of the next vertical blanking interval. To accomplish this, the first interface circuit if1 also includes a shift register from which the operating data are read serially.
During this data transfer into the shift register sr, the cathodes of the picture tube b are preferably at the voltage us in order that this data transfer does not become visible on the screen.
The appropriate instant for the transfer of measured data to the microprocessor mp is determined by the latter itself, i.e., depending on the program being executed in the microprocessor, and on the time needed therefor, the measured data are called for from the interface circuits not at the time of measurement but at a selectable instant within the working program of the microprocessor mp. If the measurement currently being performed should not yet be finished at the instant at which the measured data are called for, in a preferred embodiment of the invention, the stored data of the previous measurement will be transferred to the microprocessor mp.
As mentioned previously, the operating data for the picture tube b are transferred into the shift register sr at the beginning of a vertical blanking interval. The parallel outputs of this shift register are combined in groups each assigned to one operating value, and each group has one of the digital-to-analog converters dh, ddr, ddg, ddb, dwr, dwg, dwb associated with it. In the figure, the division of the shift register into groups is indicated by broken lines. The shift register sr performs a serial-to-parallel conversion in the usual manner, and the operating data are entered by the demultiplexer dx into the shift register in serial form and are then available at the parallel outputs of the shift register.
The digital-to-analog converter dh provides the analog brightness control signal, which is applied to the RGB matrix m in the integrated circuit ic3. Also applied to the RGB matrix m are the analog color-difference signals r-y, b-y and the luminance signal y. The formation of these signals is outside the scope of the invention and is known per se from the publications cited at the beginning.
The three analog-to-digital converters ddr, ddg, ddb provide the dark-current-adjusting signals for the three cathodes, which are currents and are applied to the inverting inputs--of the analog amplifiers vr, vg, vb. Also connected to these inputs is a resistor network which is adjustable in steps in response to the digital white-level-adjusting signals at the respective group outputs of the shift register sr. The resistors serve as digital-to-analog converters dwr, dwg, dwb and establish the connection between the inverting inputs--and the outputs of the analog amplifiers vr, vg, vb.
In an arrangement according to the invention which has proved good in practice, each of the three dark-current-adjusting signals is a seven-digit signal, and each of the three white-level-adjusting signals and the brightness control signal are five-digit signals. The voltages us and ud/uw of the three cathodes are assigned a three-digit identification signal in accordance with the above table, which signal is also fed into the shift register sr in the implemented circuit. Finally, a three-digit contrast control signal is provided in the implemented circuit for the Teletext mode of the color-television receiver. These nine data blocks are transferred in the implemented circuit from the demultiplexer dx to the shift register sr in the following order, with the least significant bit transmitted first, and with the specified number of blanks: identification signal, white-level signal blue, three blanks, white-level signal green, three blanks, white-level signal red, one blank, dark-current signal blue, one blank, dark-current signal green, one blank, dark-current signal red, contrast signal Teletext, and brightness control signal. These are seven eight-digit data blocks which are assigned to 56 pulses of a 4.4-MHz clock frequency, which is the frequency of the shift clock signal of the shift register sr.
It should be noted that the data sequence just described does not correspond to the order of the groups of the shift register sr in the figure. The order in the figure was chosen only for the sake of clarity.
The outputs of the three analog amplifiers vr, vg, vb are coupled to the inputs of the video output stage ve, whose outputs, as explained previously, are connected to the bases of the transistors pr, tg, td, so that the cathodes of the picture tube b are driven via the base-emitter paths of these transistors.
In another preferred embodiment of the invention, the measurement performed during a vertical blanking interval is not enabled until the data of the previous measurement has been transferred into the microprocessor mp. In this manner, no measurement will be left out.
It is also possible to omit the digital-to-analog converter dh if the analog RGB matrix m is replaced with a digital one.
One advantage of the invention is that the use of the chroma bus for the transfer of operating data facilitates the implementation of the third integrated circuit ic3 using bipolar technology, because an additional bus interface circuit, which could be used there, would occupy too much chip area.

Color-television receiver having integrated circuit for the luminance signal and the chrominance signals:

VIDEO CODEC UNIT (VCU).


The invention permits an n bit resolution to be achieved with an n-1 bit converter. In a color television receiver the analog-to-digital converter is a parallel analog-to-digital converter with p=2^r -1 differential amplifiers as comparators, where r is the number of binary digits of the output signal of the analog-to-digital converter minus one. The composite color signal is then applied as the input signal to the noninverting (or inverting) inputs of all p differential amplifiers and the inverting (noninverting) inputs of the differential amplifiers being connected successively to the taps of a resistive voltage divider which contains equal-value resistors and is fed with a reference voltage (Ur).
For the duration of every second line, either the reference voltage or the input signal is shifted by ΔU=0.5 Ur/2^r.
1. A color-television receiver comprising at least one integrated circuit for separating and conditioning the luminance signal and the chrominance signals from the composite color signal, said integrated circuit containing:
a chrominance-subcarrier oscillator,
a chrominance-subcarrier band-pass filter,
a synchronous demodulator,
a PAL switch,
a color matrix, and, if necessary,
an R--G--B matrix, and being characterized by the following subcircuits for conditioning digital signals:
the chrominance-subcarrier oscillator is a squarewave clock generator providing four clock signals the first of which has four times the chrominance-subcarrier frequency and the second to fourth of which have the chrominance-subcarrier frequency, with the first and second clock signals having a pulse duty factor of 0.5, and the third and fourth clock signals each consisting of two consecutive, T/2-long pulses separated by T/2 within each 4T-long period (T=period of the first clock signal);
an analog-to-digital converter clocked by the first clock signal, whose analog input is presented with the composite color signal, and which forms as its output signal a parallel binary word from the amplitude of the composite color signal (F) at the instants the respective amplitudes of the undemodulated chrominance signal are equal to the amplitudes of the respective color-difference signal;
a first binary arithmetic stage which multiplies the output signal of the analog-to-digital converter by a binary overall-contrast control signal;
a two-stage delay line which delays the output signal of the first binary arithmetic stage by T/2;
a second binary arithmetic stage which forms the arithmetic mean of the delayed and undelayed output signals of the first binary arithmetic stage;
a third binary arithmetic stage which subtracts the output signal of the second binary arithmetic stage from the output signal of the first delay stage;
a buffer-memory arrangement which temporarily stores the output signal of the third binary arithmetic stage, and whose enable input is fed with the third clock signal;
a shift-register arrangement consisting of n parallel shift registers (n=number of bits at the output of the third binary arithmetic stage) each of which provides a delay of one line period and whose serial inputs are connected to the parallel outputs of the buffer-memory arrangement, while their clock inputs are fed with the fourth clock signal;
a fourth binary arithmetic stage which forms the arithmetic mean of the input and output signals of the shift-register arrangement;
a fifth binary arithmetic stage which subtracts the input signal of the shift-register arrangement from the output signal of this arrangement and then divides the difference by two;
a sixth binary arithmetic stage which, controlled by the PAL switch, either leaves the output signal of the fifth binary arithmetic stage unchanged or forms its absolute value;
a seventh binary arithmetic stage which forms the green color-difference signal from the output signals of the fourth and sixth binary arithmetic stages;
the outputs of the second, fourth, sixth and seventh binary arithmetic stages are connected to the binary R-G-B matrix each of whose outputs is coupled to one of three digital-to-analog converters for deriving the analog signals for controlling the R-G-B values of the picture tube, or
the outputs of the second, fourth, sixth and seventh binary arithmetic stages are each connected to one of four digital-to-analog converters for deriving the analog signals for controlling the color-difference value of the picture tube;
the improvement wherein
the analog-to-digital converter is a parallel analog-to-digital converter with p=2^r -1 differential amplifiers as comparators, where r is the number of binary digits of the output signal of the analog-to-digital converter minus one, the composite color signal being applied as the input signal to one of the noninverting or inverting inputs of all p differential amplifiers and the other of the inverting or noninverting inputs of the differential amplifiers being connected successively to the taps of a resistive voltage divider which contains equal-value resistors and is fed with a reference voltage (Ur), and
for the duration of every second line, either the reference voltage (Ur) or the input signal (F) is shifted by ΔU=0.5 Ur/2^r.

Description:

FIELD OF THE INVENTION
Color-television receivers comprising at least one integrated circuit for separating and conditioning the luminance signal and the chrominance signals from the composite color signal are known in the art. The particular color-television receiver of such a known type comprises at least one integrated circuit for separating and conditioning the luminance signal and the chrominance signals from the composite color signal. This integrated circuit contains a chrominance-subcarrier oscillator, a chrominance-subcarrier band-pass filter, a synchronous demodulator, a PAL switch, a color matrix, and, if necessary, an R-G-B matrix. Additionally, such a color-television receiver contains the following subcircuits for conditioning digital signals; (1) the chrominance-subcarrier oscillator is a square-wave clock generator providing four clock signals the first of which has four times the chrominance-subcarrier frequency and the second to fourth of which have the chrominance-subcarrier frequency, with the first and second clock signals having a pulse duty factor of 0.5, and the third and fourth clock signals each consisting of two consecutive, T/2-long pulses separated by T/2 within each 4T-long period (T=period of the first clock signal); (2) an analog-to-digital converter clocked by the first clock signal, whose analog input is presented with the composite color signal, and which forms as its output signal a parallel binary word from the amplitude of the composite color signal (F) at the instants the respective amplitudes of the undemodulated chrominance signal are equal to the amplitudes of the respective color-difference signal; (3) a first binary arithmetic stage which multiplies the output signal of the analog-to-digital converter by a binary overall-contrast control signal; (4) a two stage delay line which delays the output signal of the first binary arithmetic stage by T/2; (5) a second binary arithmetic stage which forms the arithmetic means of the delayed and undelayed output signals of the first binary arithmetic stage; (6) a third binary arithmetic stage, which subtracts the output signal of the second binary arithmetic stage from the output signal of the first delay stage; (7) a buffer-memory arrangement which temporarily stores the output signal of the third binary arithmetic stage, and whose enable input is fed with the third clock signal; (8) a shift-register arrangement consisting of n parallel shift registers (n=number of bits at the output of the third binary arithmetic stage) each of which provides a delay of one line period and whose serial inputs are connected to the parallel outputs of the buffer-memory arrangement, while their clock inputs are fed with the fourth clock signal; (9) a fourth binary arithmetic stage which forms the arithmetic mean of the input and output signals of the shift-register arrangement; (10) a fifth binary arithmetic stage which subtracts the input signal of the shift-register arrangement from the output signal of this arrangement and then divides the difference by two; (11) a sixth binary arithmetic stage which, controlled by the PAL switch, either leaves the output signal of the fifth binary arithmetic stage unchanged or forms its absolute value; (12) a seventh binary arithmetic stage which forms the green color-difference signal from the output signals of the fourth and sixth binary arithmetic stages; (13) the outputs of the second, fourth, sixth and seventh binary arithmetic stages are connected to the binary R-G-B matrix each of whose outputs is coupled to one of three digital-to-analog converters for deriving the analog signals for controlling the R-G-B values of the picture tube, or (14) the outputs of the second, fourth, sixth and seventh binary arithmetic stages are each connected to one of four digital-to-analog converters for deriving the analog signals for controlling the color-difference values of the picture tube. An essential feature of such a receiver is the use of an analog-to-digital converter whose analog input is presented with the composite color signal and which is clocked by a clock signal at four times the chrominance-subcarrier frequency, so that a parallel binary word is obtained from the amplitudes of the composite color signal at the instants the respective amplitudes of the undemodulated chrominance signal are equal to the amplitudes of the respective color-difference signal.
Thus, because of the high frequencies to be be processed, a parallel analog-to-digital converter is needed. Such fast parallel analog-to-digital converters are well known (cf. D. F. Hoeschele, "Analog-to-Digital/Digital-to-Analog Conversion Techniques", New York, 1968, p. 10) and contain 2 ^s -1 differential amplifiers as comparators, where s is the number of binary digits of the digital converter output signal. The noninverting (or inverting) inputs of all differential amplifiers are presented with the composite color signal, while the inverting (or noninverting) inputs are connected successively to the taps of a resistive voltage divider inserted between a constant reference voltage and ground and consisting of 2 ^s or 2 ^s -1 equal-value resistors.
A 6-bit parallel analog-to-digital converter thus has 63 comparators and 63 resistors. A 7-bit converter has 127 comparators and resistors, and an 8-bit converter even has 255 comparators and resistors. It is readily apparent that as the number of digits increases, the implementation of such converters using integrated circuit techniques quickly becomes uneconomical. In particular, a reduction by one digit would result in the component count being halved.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
Accordingly, the object of the invention is to reduce the number of comparators and resistors in an arrangement as set forth hereinbefore to one half without adversely affecting the digital resolution. In other words, the invention is to permit a 6-bit resolution, for example, to be achieved with a 5-bit converter. This is done by using the means set forth above recourse being had to the principle described in the above-cited book on pp. 413 to 415 as follows: In color-television receiver described above, the analog-to-digital converter is a parallel analog-to-digital converter with p=2 ^r -1 differential amplifiers as comparators, where r is the number of binary digits of the output signal of the analog-to-digital converter minus one. The composite color signal is then applied as the input signal to the noninverting (or inverting) inputs of all p differential amplifiers and the inverting (noninverting) inputs of the differential amplifiers being connected successively to the taps of a resistive voltage divider which contains equal-value resistors and is fed with a reference voltage (Ur). For the duration of every second line, either the reference voltage or the input signal is shifted by ΔU=0.5 Ur/2 ^r .
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
The invention will now be explained in more detail with reference to the accompanying drawings, in which:
FIG. 1 shows the block diagram of a color-television receiver of a known type.
FIGS. 2a-h, k, l, and p-t show various waveforms occurring in the arrangement of FIG. 1, and, in tabular form, signals occurring at given points of the circuit at given times, and
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a preferred embodiment of the invention.
DESCRIPTION OF THE BEST MODE
At the outset, FIG. 1, will be explained to permit a better understanding of the invention.
In the block diagrams shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, like parts are designated by like reference characters. In addition to interconnections indicated by solid lines as is usual in circuit diagrams, these figures contain interconnections indicated by stripes. These stripes mark connections between digital parallel outputs of the delivering portion of the circuit and digital parallel inputs of the receiving portion. The interconnections indicated by stripes, therefore, consist of at least as many wires as there are bits in the binary word to be transferred. Thus, the signals transferred over the lines indicated by stripes in FIGS. 1 to 3 are all binary signals whose instantaneous binary value corresponds to the instantaneous analog value of the composite color signal and of other signals.
Like in conventional color-television receivers, the composite color signal F, derived in the usual manner controls the chrominance-subcarrier oscillator, which, according to the invention, is designed as a squarewave clock generator 1. By means of the so-called burst contained in the composite color signal F, the clock generator 1 is synchronized to the transmitted chrominance-subcarrier frequency. The clock generator 1 generates the clock signal F1, whose frequency is four times the chrominance-subcarrier frequency, i.e. about 17.73 MHz (precisely 17.734475 MHz) in the case of the CCIR standard.
The clock generator 1 also generates the square-wave clock signal F2 having the frequency of the chrominance subcarrier. The first and second clock signals F1, F2 have a pulse duty factor of 0.5 (cf. FIGS. 2a and 2b). In addition, the clock generator 1 generates the third clock signal F3 and the fourth clock signal F4, each of which consists of two consecutive, T/2-long pulses separated by T/2 within each 4T-long period, where T is the period of the first clock signal F1. The third and fourth clock signals F3, F4 are shown in FIGS. 2b and 2g.
The individual clock signals are generated within the clock generator 1 in the usual manner using conventional digital techniques. The clock signal F1, for instance, may be generated by means of a suitable 17.73--MHz crystal, and the clock signals F2, F3, F4 may be derived therefrom by frequency division and suitable elimination of pulses. Like in conventional color-television receivers, the clock generator 1 is also fed with a pulse Z from the horizontal output stage during which the clock generator 1 is sychronized by the burst.
The composite color signal F is also applied to the analog input of the analog-to-digital converter 2, which is clocked by the first clock signal F1 and, (at the beginning of each pulse of the first clock signal F1) forms from the amplitude of this pulse a parallel binary word and delivers it as an output signal. These leading edges of the pulses of the first clock signal F1 thus occur at the instants the respective amplitudes of the undemodulated chrominance signal contained in the composite color signal are equal to the amplitudes of the respective color-difference signal.
These parallel binary words then remain unchanged for the respective period T of the first clock signal F1, i.e., they are held like in a sample-and-hold circuit. The signals appearing at the output of the analog-to-digital converter 2 are given in tabular form in FIG. 2c, where the vertical lines symbolize the respective clock periods of the first clock signal F1. The letter c of FIG. 2 is also shown in FIG. 1 (encircled).
According to FIG. 2c, successive signals Y+V, Y-U, Y-V, and Y+U are obtained in a line m during one period of the second clock signal F2, where U, V and Y have the formal meanings given in the above-mentioned book, namely U=B-Y, V=R-Y, B=blue chrominance signal, R=red chrominance signal, and Y=luminance signal, but designate here the corresponding digitized signals, i.e., the corresponding binary words. The second line in the Table of FIG. 2c gives the corresponding binary signals in the line m+1, namely the signals Y-V, Y-U and Y+U, occurring during that period of the clock signal F2 which is under consideration.
This output signal of the analog-to-digital converter 2 is applied to one of the two inputs of the first binary arithmetic stage 10, which multiplies this output signal by a binary overall-contrast control signal GK. This overall contrast control signal thus corresponds to the analog overall-contrast control signal present in conventional color-television receivers. In present day color-television receivers, the binary overall contrast control signal GK, just as the binary color-saturation control signal FK and the binary brightness control signal H to be explained below, is available in digital form, because remote-control units and digital controls are usually present which provide these signals.
An advantage of the present application is, therefore, seen in the fact that these signals need no longer be conditioned in analog form in their place of action.
The output signal of the first binary arithmetic stage 10 is fed to the second binary arithmetic stage 20 and to the two-stage delay line 3, which delays this output signal by T/2. The second binary arithmetic stage 20 forms the arithmetic mean of the delayed and undelayed signals. The underlying idea is that if a sinusoidal signal, namely the chrominance subcarrier, is sampled at double frequency, the mean of two successive sample values will always be zero. Thus, by forming the arithmetic means in the second binary arithmetic stage 20, the chrominance subcarrier is suppressed and the luminance signal Y is obtained in digital form.
The output signal of the first binary arithmetic stage 10, delayed in the first stage 31 of the delay line 3 by half the delay provided by this stage, i.e., by T/4, and the output signal of the second binary arithmetic stage 20 are then fed to the third binary arithmetic stage 30, which subtracts the latter signal, i.e., the Y signal, from the former signal. As a result, the output of the third binary arithmetic stage 30 provides the color-difference signal, made up of the successive components B-Y, R-Y, -(B-Y) and -(R-Y), as shown in FIG. 2d in tabular form for the lines m and m+1.
These signals are fed to the buffer-memory arrangement 4, whose enable input is fed with the third clock signal F3, which is shown in FIG. 2e. This buffer memory operates in such a manner that the binary word fed to the input at the beginning of each pulse of the third clock signal F3 appears at the output when the next clock pulse occurs. Thus, the instantaneous output signals given in FIG. 2f in tabular form for the lines m and m+1 are obtained. The individual stages of the buffer-memory arrangement may be so-called D flip-flops, for example.
The output signal of the buffer-memory arrangement 4 is applied to the shift-register arrangement 5, which consists of n parallel shift registers, where n is the number of bits at the ouput of the third binary arithmetic stage 30. The delay provided by the n parallel shift registers is equal to the duration of one line, i.e., 64 μs in the case of PAL television sets. The clock inputs of the n parallel shift registers are fed with the fourth clock signal F4, which is shown in FIG. 2g. The output signal of the shift-register arrangement is given in tabular form in FIG. 2h for the lines m and m+1.
This output signal, together with the input signal of the shift-register arrangement 5 is fed to the fourth binary arithmetic stage 40, which forms the arithmetic means of the two signals, so that its output provides the signal B-Y in digital form, which is given in tabular form in FIG. 2k. The input and output signals of the shift-register arrangement 5 are also fed to the fifth binary arithmetic stage 50, which subtracts the input signal from the output signal and divides the difference by two. By the division, a sort of averaging is performed as well.
The output signal of the fifth binary arithmetic stage 50 is given in tabular form in FIG. 21, again for the lines m and m+1. This output signal is fed to the sixth binary arithmetic stage 60, which, in response to the output signal of the PAL switch 12, leaves it unchanged in one line and forms its absolute value in the other. "To form the absolute value" is used here first of all in the mathematical sense i.e., the negative sign of a negative number is suppressed and only the positive value of this negative number is taken into account. Within the scope of the present invention, however, "absolute value" also means "value with respect to a constant number". By this it is meant that for a number A below the constant X, the "absolute value with respect to X" is 2X-A. Thus, for the number 30, the "absolute value with respect to 50" is 70. The output of the sixth binary arithmetic stage 60 thus provides the PAL compensated signal R-Y in digital form, i.e., the red color-difference signal, which is given in tabular form in FIG. 2p for the lines m and m+1.
The output signals of the fourth binary arithmetic stage 40 and of the sixth binary arithmetic stage 60 are fed to the seventh binary arithmetic stage 70, which forms the green color-difference signal G-Y by the well-known formula Y=0.3R+0.59G+0.11B.
The subcircuits 5, 40, 50, 60 and 70, together with the PAL switch 12, represent the portion for correcting the phase of the received signal by the PAL method.
The output signals of the second, fourth, sixth and seventh binary arithmetic stages 20, 40, 60, 70, i.e., the luminance signal Y and the color-difference signals B-Y, R-Y, and G-Y, are then fed to the binary R-G-B matrix 6, which forms therefrom the binary chrominance signals R, G, B by the above formula. Each of these binary chrominance signals is then fed to one of the three digital-to-analog converters 7, 8, 9, which convert the binary chrominance signals to the analog chrominance signals R', G', B' necessary for R-G-B control of the picture tube.
In the embodiment of FIG. 1, each of thes digital-to-analog converters is also fed with the color-saturation control signal FK and the brightness control signal H, both in binary form. The PAL switch 12 is fed with the second clock signal F2, i.e., a signal having the chrominance-subcarrier frequency locked to the burst, with the composite color signal F, and with the reference pulse Z from the horizontal output stage.
FIG. 3 shows the block diagram of an embodiment of the invention. The analog-to-digital converter 2 is designed as a parallel analog-to-digital converter 2' and contains the differential amplifiers D1, D2, D3, Dp-1, Dp which are used as comparators, the resistors R1, R2, R3, Rp-1, Rp, RO, connected in series to form a voltage divider, and the decoder 21, which changes the output signals of the comparators into corresponding binary words. That portion of FIG. 3 located on the right-hand side of the decoder 21 is a greatly simplified representation of the units designated by like reference characters in FIG. 1.
The parallel analog-to-digital converter 2' contains p=2 ^r -1 differential amplifiers and a corresponding number of resistors, where r is the number of binary digits of the output signal of the analog-to-digital converter 2 of FIG. 1 minus one. If the analog-to-digital converter is to provide 8 bits, for example, then r is 7. The resistors R2 to Rp are alike and have a value of R, while the resistors RO, R1 have a value of 0.5 R.
According to the invention, the reference voltage applied to the comparators, in the embodiment of FIG. 3 to all inverting inputs, is shifted by ΔU=0.5 Ur/2 ^r during every second line as electronic switches S1 and S2 in parallel with resistors R1 and RO, respectively, are opened and closed alternately. Their control signal comes from one of the outputs Q, Q of the binary divider BT, which is fed with the horizontal synchronizing or horizontal flyback pulses Z.
Instead of shifting the reference voltage Ur as described, the amount of change ΔU may be added to the composite color signal in an analog adding stage during every second line. The reference voltage UR then remains constant.
By influencing the reference voltage Ur during every second line, and with the fourth or fifth binary arithmetic stage 40, 50 and the shift-register arrangement 5, which acts as a delay stage providing a delay of exactly one line period, the intended effect is produced, i.e., the number of comparators required is reduced to one half, while the resolution corresponds to that achieved with an additional binary digit since the average of the signals of two successive lines is taken at the output of the fourth or fifth binary arithmetic stage 40,50.
The principle explained with the aid of FIG. 3 can also be applied to the luminance channel if a comb filter and a delay arrangement providing a delay of one line period are provided in this channel.

Digital integrated chrominance-channel circuit with gain control:

(Pal) Video Processing Unit (VPU - PVPU)An improved digital integrated chrominance-channel circuit having gain control for color-television receivers includes at least one integrated circuit for digitally processing the composite color signal. The circuit includes a first limiter inserted between a parallel multiplier and a burst-amplitude-measuring stage, and a control stage including a parallel subtracter whose minuend input is fed with a reference signal, and whose subtrahend input is connected to the output of the burst-amplitude-measuring stage. A digital accumulator whose enable input is presented with a signal derived from the trailing edge of a burst gating signal is used as an integrator.

1. A digital integrated chrominance-channel circuit with gain control for color-television receivers, comprising:
at least one integrated circuit for digitally processing the composite color signal, wherein a digital chrominance signal appearing at an output of a digital chroma filter is applied to a first input of a parallel multiplier, and a digital gain control signal is applied to a second input of the parallel multiplier, the output of the parallel multiplier is connected to an input of a digital chroma demodulator with a color killer stage and to an input of a burst-amplitude-measuring stage whose output signal is compared with a reference signal in a control stage, the output signal of the control stage passes through an integrator whose output signal is the gain control signal;
a square-wave clock generator used as a chrominance subcarrier oscillator generates at least a first clock signal, whose frequency is four times that of the chrominance subcarrier, and a second clock signal, whose frequency is equal to that of the chrominance subcarrier; and
a first limiter is inserted between the parallel multiplier and the burst-amplitude-measuring stage, the control stage is a parallel subtracter whose minuend input is presented with the reference signal, and whose subtrahend input is connected to the output of the burst-amplitude-measuring stage and the integrator is a digital accumulator whose enable input is fed with a signal derived from the trailing edge of a burst gating signal.
2. A chrominance-channel circuit as claimed in claim 1, wherein the output signal from the first limiter is applied to the input of a first buffer memory and, through a delay element which provides a delay equal to the period of the first clock signal, to the input of a second buffer memory, the second clock signal being applied to the enable inputs of the first and second buffer memories during the burst gating signal, the output signals from the first buffer memory and the second buffer memory are fed, respectively, to a first absolute-value former and a second absolute-value former which have their outputs connected to the first and the second input, respectively, of a first parallel adder, the output of the first parallel adder is connected via a second limiter to the input of a third buffer memory and to the minuend input of a parallel comparator whose minuend-greater-than-subtrahend output is coupled to the enable input of the third buffer memory through the first input-output path of an AND gate whose second input is fed with the second clock signal, and the output of the third buffer memory is coupled to the subtrahend input of the parallel comparator, the output of the third buffer memory is connected to the input of a fourth buffer memory whose output is coupled to the subtrahend input of the parallel subtracter, and whose enable input is fed with a signal derived from the leading edges of horizontal-frequency pulses not coinciding with the burst gating signal, and the clear input of the third buffer memory is fed with a signal derived from the trailing edges of the pulses not coinciding with the burst gating signal. 3. A chrominance-channel circuit as claimed in claim 1, wherein the output signal from the parallel subtracter is applied to the first input of a second parallel adder having its output connected via a third limiter to the input of a fifth buffer memory whose output is coupled to the second input of the second parallel adder, and which has normalizing-data inputs and the enable input of the accumulator. 4. A chrominance-channel circuit as claimed in claim 2, wherein the output signal from the parallel subtracter is applied to the first input of a second parallel adder having its output connected via a third limiter to the input of a fifth buffer memory whose output is coupled to the second input of the second parallel adder, and which has normalizing-data inputs and the enable input of the accumulator. 5. A chrominance-channel circuit as claimed in claim 1, additionally comprising:
a first bus switch having its path from the break-contact input to the output inserted between the output of the chroma filter and the associated input of the parallel multiplier and its make-contact input connected to the input of the chroma filter;
a second bus switch having its path from the break-contact input to the output inserted between the output of the first limiter and the input of the chroma demodulator and its make-contact input connected to the input of the chroma filter;
a first test enable signal and a second test enable signal, which does not overlap the first test enable signal, being applied to the control input of the first bus switch and to the control input of the second bus switch, respectively;
an actuating signal being applied to the input of the color killer stage during the second test enable signal;
a normalizing signal being applied to the enable input of the fifth buffer memory during a third test enable signal; and
in addition to the usual contact pads, there is a contact pad via which the test-result signals of the individual subcircuits are accessible.
6. A chrominance-channel circuit as claimed in claim 2, additionally comprising:
a first bus switch having its path from the break-contact input to the output inserted between the output of the chroma filter and the associated input of the parallel multiplier and its make-contact input connected to the input of the chroma filter;
a second bus switch having its path from the break-contact input to the output inserted between the output of the first limiter and the input of the chroma demodulator and its make-contact input connected to the input of the chroma filter;
a first test enable signal and a second test enable signal, which does not overlap the first test enable signal, being applied to the control input of the first bus switch and to the control input of the second bus switch, respectively;
an actuating signal being applied to the input of the color killer stage during the second test enable signal;
a normalizing signal being applied to the enable input of the fifth buffer memory during a third test enable signal; and
in addition to the usual contact pads, there is a contact pad via which the test-result signals of the individual subcircuits are accessible.
7. A chrominance-channel circuit as claimed in claim 3, additionally comprising:
a first bus switch having its path from the break-contact input to the output inserted between the output of the chroma filter and the associated input of the parallel multiplier and its make-contact input connected to the input of the chroma filter;
a second bus switch having its path from the break-contact input to the output inserted between the output of the first limiter and the input of the chroma demodulator and its make-contact input connected to the input of the chroma filter;
a first test enable signal and a second test enable signal, which does not overlap the first test enable signal, being applied to the control input of the first bus switch and to the control input of the second bus switch, respectively;
an actuating signal being applied to the input of the color killer stage during the second test enable signal;
a normalizing signal being applied to the enable input of the fifth buffer memory during a third test enable signal; and
in addition to the usual contact pads, there is a contact pad via which the test-result signals of the individual subcircuits are accessible.
8. A chrominance-channel circuit as claimed in claim 4, additionally comprising:
a first bus switch having its path from the break-contact input to the output inserted between the output of the chroma filter and the associated input of the parallel multiplier and its make-contact input connected to the input of the chroma filter;
a second bus switch having its path from the break-contact input to the output inserted between the output of the first limiter and the input of the chroma demodulator and its make-contact input connected to the input of the chroma filter;
a first test enable signal and a second test enable signal, which does not overlap the first test enable signal, being applied to the control input of the first bus switch, respectively;
an actuating signal being applied to the input of the color killer stage during the second test enable signal;
a normalizing signal being applied to the enable input of the fifth buffer memory during a third test enable signal; and
in addition to the usual contact pads, there is a contact pad via which the test-result signals of the individual subcircuits are accessible.
9. A method of testing a chrominance-channel circuit as claimed in claim 5, characterized by the following features:
in a first step, the chroma demodulator is tested by applying the second test enable signal to the control input of the second bus switch, the actuating signal to the input of the color killer stage, and a known data sequence to the input of the chroma filter;
in a second step, the parallel multiplier is tested by applying the first test enable signal to the control input of the first bus switch, the third test enable signal and the normalizing signal to the enable input of the accumulator, the normalizing data to the normalizing-data input of the accumulator, and a known data sequence to the input of the chroma filter;
in further steps, the absolute-value formers the first adder, and the parallel comparator are tested by applying the first test enable signal to the control input of the first bus switch, and known data sequences to the input of the chroma filter, and
in the last step, the accumulator is tested by applying the first test enable signal to the control input of the first bus switch, the third test enable signal and the normalizing signal to the enable input of the accumulator, the normalizing data to the normalizing data to the normalizing-data input of the accumulator, a trigger signal to the second limiter, and known data sequences to the minuend input of the parallel sub- tracter.
10. A method of testing a chrominance-channel circuit as claimed in claim 6, characterized by the following features:
in a first step, the chroma demodulator is tested by applying the second test enable signal to the control input of the second bus switch, the actuating signal to the input of the color killer stage, and a known data sequence to the input of the chroma filter;
in a second step, the parallel multiplier is tested by applying the first test enable signal to the control input of the first bus switch, the third test enable signal and the normalizing signal to the enable input of the accumulator, the normalizing data to the normalizing-data input of the accumulator, and a known data sequence to the input of the chroma filter;
in further steps, the absolute-value formers the first adder, and the parallel comparator are tested by applying the first test enable signal to the control input of the first bus switch, and known data sequences to the input of the chroma filter, and
in the last step, the accumulator is tested by applying the first test enable signal to the control input of the first bus switch, the third test enable signal and the normalizing signal to the enable input of the accumulator, the normalizing data to the normalizing-data input of the accumulator, a trigger signal to the second limiter, and known data sequences to the minuend input of the parallel subtracter.
11. A method of testing a chrominance-channel circuit as claimed in claim 7, characterized by the following features:
in a first step, the chroma demodulator is tested by applying the second test enable signal to the control input of the second bus switch, the actuating signal to the input of the color killer stage, and a known data sequence to the input of the chroma filter;
in a second step, the parallel multiplier is tested by applying the first test enable signal to the control input of the first bus switch, the third test enable signal and the normalizing signal to the enable input of the accumulator, the normalizing data to the normalizing-data input of the accumulator, and a known data sequence to the input of the chroma filter;
in further steps, the absolute-value formers the first adder, and the parallel comparator are tested by applying the first test enable signal to the control input of the first bus switch, and known data sequences to the input of the chroma filter, and
in the last step, the accumulator is tested by applying the first test enable signal to the control input of the first bus switch, the third test enable signal and the normalizing signal to the enable input of the accumulator, the normalizing data to the normalizing-data input of the accumulator, a trigger signal to the second limiter, and known data sequences to the minuend input of the parallel subtracter.
12. A method of testing a chrominance-channel circuit as claimed in claim 8, characterized by the following features:
in a first step, the chroma demodulator is tested by applying the second test enable signal to the control input of the second bus switch, the actuating signal to the input of the color killer stage, and a known data sequence to the input of the chroma filter;
in a second step, the parallel multiplier is tested by applying the first test enable signal to the control input of the first bus switch, the third test enable signal and the normalizing signal to the enable input of the accumulator, the normalizing data to the normalizing-data input of the accumulator, and a known data sequence to the input of the chroma filter;
in further steps, the absolute-value formers the first adder, and the parallel comparator are tested by applying the first test enable signal to the control input of the first bus switch, and known data sequences to the input of the chroma filter, and
in the last step, the accumulator is tested by applying the first test enable signal to the control input of the first bus switch, the third test enable signal and the normalizing signal to the enable input of the accumulator, the normalizing data to the normalizing-data input of the accumulator, a trigger signal to the second limiter, and known data sequences to the minuend input of the parallel subtracter.

Description:

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
1. Field of the Invention
The present invention relates to a digital integrated chrominance-channel circuit with gain control for color-television receivers containing at least one integrated circuit for digitally processing the composite color signal.
2. Description of the Prior Art
A chrominance-channel circuit is disclosed in the published patent application EP 51075 Al. (U.S. application Ser. No. 311,218, Oct. 11, 1981).
Practical tests of color-television receivers with digital signal processing circuitry have shown that the prior art chrominance-channel circuit still has a few disadvantages. For example, the burst-amplitude-measuring circuit is not yet optimal because it is possible in the prior art arrangement that the burst signals are sampled, i.e., measured, near or at the zero crossing. As these measured values are small, so that the digitized values formed therefrom are small numbers, the measurement error is large.
Another disadvantage of the prior art arrangement is that it has two set points for the gain control, namely a lower and an upper threshold level in the form of corresponding numbers entered into two read-only memories. Finally, the integration of the control signal is implemented with two counters, so that the time constant of this "integrator" is determined only by the clock signals for the counters and by the count lengths of these counters. As to the prior art, reference is also made to the journal "Fernseh- und Kino-Technik", 1981, pages 317 to 323, particularly FIG. 9 on page 321. However, the digital chrominance-channel circuit shown there works on the principle of feed-forward control, while both the invention and the above-mentioned prior art use a feedback control system, so that the arrangement disclosed in that journal lies further away from the present invention, the more so since in that prior art arrangement, the set point is implemented only with the concrete circuit (hardware).
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
The invention as claimed eliminates the above disadvantages and, thus, has for its object to improve the prior art digital integrated chrominance-channel circuit with gain control in such a way that error-free burst amplitude measurement is ensured, that a single set point can be generated, and that the integration of the control signal is implemented in optimum fashion. Another object of the invention is to modify the chrominance-channel circuit so that the automatic control system can be opened for measuring purposes.
DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
FIG. 1 is a block diagram of the chrominance channel in accordance with the invention.
FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a preferred embodiment of the burst-amplitude-measuring stage and the digital accumulator.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of another embodiment of the invention with the aforementioned measuring facility.
DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
The block diagram of FIG. 1 includes a digital chroma filter cf, which derives a digital chrominance signal cs from a digitized composite color signal. The digital chrominance signal cs is applied to a first input of a parallel multiplier m, whose second input is fed with a digital gain control signal st. The output of the parallel multiplier m is connected to an input of a first limiter b1, which limits the output signals from the parallel multiplier m to a predetermined value. This can be done by arranging, for example, that at least one of the high-order digits of the output signal from the parallel multiplier is indicated by the interconnecting lead between these two subcircuits in FIG. 1.
In the figures of the accompanying drawing, the lines interconnecting the signal inputs and outputs of the individual subcircuits are shown as stripelike connections (buses), while the solid lines commonly used to indicate interconnections in discrete-component circuits are used for interconnections over which only individual bits or clock and/or noise signals are transferred. The stripelike lines thus interconnect parallel inputs and parallel outputs, i.e., inputs to which complete binary words are applied, which are transferred in parallel into the subcircuit at a given time, and outputs which provide complete binary words.
An output signal bs of the first limiter b1 is applied to the input of a burst-amplitude-measuring stage bm, which has its output coupled to a subtrahend input (-) of a parallel subtracter sb, while its minuend input (+) is fed with the reference signal rs, i.e., the set point. The output of the parallel subtracter sb is connected to the input of a digital accumulator ak, which provides the digital gain control signal st, which is applied to the second input of the parallel multiplier m, as mentioned above. A signal rb derived from the trailing edge of the burst gating signal (keying pulse) is applied to an enable input eu of the accumulator ak.
It is also indicated in FIG. 1 that a square-wave clock generator os, used as a chrominance-subcarrier oscillator, forms part of the invention. It provides at least the first clock signal f1, whose frequency is four times that of the chrominance subcarrier, and a second clock signal f2, having the same frequency as the chrominance subcarrier.
FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a preferred embodiment of the burst-amplitude-measuring stage bm and the digital accumulator ak of FIG. 1. The burst-amplitude-measuring stage in FIG. 2 comprises all subcircuits ahead of the subtrahend input (-) of the parallel subtracter sb, while the accumulator consists of the subcircuits following the output of the parallel subtracter sb.
The output signal bs from the first limiter b1 of FIG. 1 is applied in FIG. 2 to the input of a first buffer memory p1 and, through a delay element v, which provides a delay equal to the period of the first clock signal f1, i.e., to one quarter or 90° of the chrominance-subcarrier frequency, to an input of a second buffer memory p2.
The second clock signal f2 is applied to the enable inputs eu of these two buffer memories p1, p2 during the burst gating signal ki, which is indicated in FIG. 2 by the logical term f2.ki. During the keying pulse ki, whose duration usually equals about 10 periods of the chrominance-subcarrier frequency, a corresponding number of digital values are thus transferred successively from the first limiter b1 into the two buffer memories p1, p2, the values transferred into the second buffer memory p2 differing in phase from those transferred into the first buffer memory p1 by the aforementioned 90°; thus, two zero-crossing values are never evaluated at the same time.
The outputs of the two buffer memories p1, p2 are connected to the inputs of a first absolute-value former bb1 and a second absolute-value former bb2, respectively, whose outputs are coupled to a first and a second input, respectively, of a first adder a1. The absolute-value formers bb1, bb2 provide digital values without the sign of the input value, i.e., without the sign bit, for example. They thus contain a subcircuit which converts negative numbers in one's or two's complement notation into the corresponding positive number, i.e., they include complement reconverters.
The first adder a1 is followed by the second limiter b2, whose limiting action is controlled by at least one of the high-order digits of the first adder a1.
The output signal from the second limiter b2 is applied to the input of a third buffer memory p3 and to a minuend input a of a parallel comparator k, which has its subtrahend input b connected to the output of the third buffer memory p3.
In the present description, the two inputs of the parallel comparator k, too, are referred to as "minuend input" and "subtrahend input", respectively, which is considered justifiable in view of the fact that, purely formally, the arithmetic operation performed by comparators is more closely related to subtraction than to addition by means of an adder, even though the internal circuit of a comparator resembles that of an adder more than that of a subtracter, cf. the corresponding mathematical operations a-b and a b as opposed to a+b.
The minuend-greater-than-subtrahend output a>b of the parallel comparator k is connected to the enable input eu of the third buffer memory p3 via the first input-output path of the AND gate u, while the second clock signal f2 is applied to the second input of the AND gate u. The output of the third buffer memory p3 is also connected to an input of a fourth buffer memory p4, which has its output coupled to the subtrahend input (-) of the parallel subtracter sb. The enable input eu of the fourth buffer memory p4 is presented with a signal vz derived from the trailing edges of horizontal-frequency pulses zf, which, however, do not coincide with the burst gating signal ki, while a signal rz derived from the trailing edges of the horizontal-frequency pulses zf not coinciding with the burst gating signal ki is applied to the clear input el of the third buffer memory p3.
The derivation of the two signals rz, vz from the horizontal-frequency pulses zf is indicated in FIG. 2 by a pulse-shaper stage if. The section consisting of the two buffer memories p3, p4, the parallel comparator k, the AND gate u, and the pulse shaper if determines, for each line of the television picture, the maximum value of the burst amplitude from the--possibly limited--output signal of the first adder a1, and feeds this maximum value to the subtrahend input (-) of the parallel subtracter sb. This is achieved essentially by transferring only those words of the output signal of the second limiter b2 into the third buffer memory p3 which are greater than any word already stored in the third buffer memory p3. This is done line by line during the keying pulse ki.
As mentioned, a preferred embodiment of the accumulator ak of FIG. 1 is shown in the lower portion of FIG. 2. The output signal from the parallel subtracter sb is applied to a first input of a second parallel adder a2, which has its output connected to an input of a fifth buffer memory p5 through the third limiter b3. To realize the adding function, the output of the fifth buffer memory p5 is connected to the second input of the second adder a2. The buffer memory p5 has, in addition to the enable input eu, which is the enable input of the accumulator ak of FIG. 1, the normalizing-data inputs ne, through which normalizing data nd, i.e., known data, can be entered if necessary. The enable input eu is presented with the signal rb derived from the trailing edge of the burst gating signal ki. With the trailing edge of the keying pulse, the output signal from the third limiter b3 is thus transferred into the fifth buffer memory p5 and simultaneously transferred to the output. With the trailing edge of each keying pulse, the sum of the value from the preceding line and the set-point deviation calculated in the measured line by the parallel subtracter sb is thus produced line by line as the control signal st.
Thus, the essential advantages of the invention follow directly from the solution of the problem, namely particularly the line-by-line subtraction of the maximum burst amplitude, which is integrated in the accumulator ak to form the control signal st for the automatic control system, from the reference signal rs.
FIG. 3, a block diagram like FIGS. 1 and 2, shows a preferred embodiment of the invention which makes it possible to test the digital automatic control system after the fabrication of the integrated circuit, and to make the test-result signals accessible. The testing is necessary because the automatic control system contains several subcircuits each of which may be faulty. The test procedure and the design of the overall circuit must therefore be adapted to one another in such a way that all subcircuits of the automatic control system can be tested with little additional circuitry.
To this end, the path from a break-contact input to an output of a first bus switch bu1, whose make-contact input is connected to the input of the chroma filter cf, is interposed between the output of this chroma filter and the associated input of the parallel multiplier m, as shown in the block diagram of FIG. 3. For the graphic representation of the bus switch bu1, the symbol of a mechanical transfer switch has been chosen, with the above mentioned stripelike interconnecting lines, i.e., buses, connected to the signal inputs and the output of the switch. It is thus clear that the bus switch consists of as many individual electronic switches as there are wires in the buses.
Inserted between the output of the first limiter b1 and the input of the chroma demodulator cd, which is also present in FIG. 1, where it "demodulates" the output signal bs of the first limiter b1 into the chroma signal cs, is a path from a break-contact input to an output of a second bus switch bu2, which has its make-contact input am connected to the input of the chroma filter cf. Viewed in the direction of signal flow, the second bus switch bu2 lies behind the junction point where the signal bs for the burst-amplitude-measuring circuit is taken off. What was said on the circuit design and the graphic representation of the first bus switch bu1 applies analogously to the second bus switch bu2.
The first test enable signal t1 and the second test enable signal t2, which does not overlap the first test enable signal t1, are applied to the control input of the first bus switch bu1 and to the control input of the second bus switch bu2, respectively. Thus, when the second bus switch bu2 is in its "make" position, the first bus switch bu2 is in its "break" position, and vice versa.
During the first test enable signal t1, an actuating signal db is applied to the input ec of the color killer stage ck of the chroma demodulator cd, so that the latter is active during the testing of the automatic control system although the circuit is not in its normal mode of operation but only in a test mode.
The enable input eu of the accumulator ak, i.e., the enable input eu of the fifth buffer memory p5 in FIG. 3, may be fed with a normalizing signal ns during the third test enable signal t3. During testing and measurement, instead of the signal rb, derived from the trailing edge of the keying pulse and applied in the normal mode of operation, the normalizing signal ns is applied to the enable input eu of the fifth buffer memory p5 and causes the normalizing data nd to be transferred into this buffer.
In addition to the usual contact pads of the integrated circuit, through part of which the output signal cs of the chroma demodulator cd is coupled out, a contact pad is provided via which test-result signals of individual subcircuits are accessible, i.e., transferred out of the integrated circuit. These test-result signals are advantageously coupled to this additional contact pad through transfer transistors which, in turn, are driven by the above-mentioned test enable signals or corresponding additional signals of this kind or by signals derived by performing simple logic operations on the signals just mentioned. In this manner, only the respective subcircuit to be tested is connected to the additional contact pad.
An advantageous method of testing the chrominance-channel circuit according to the invention consists in the following time sequence of test steps. In the first step, the chroma demodulator cd is tested. This is necessary because, throughout the testing of the chrominance-channel circuit, signals are transferred out through the chroma demodulator cd and must not be falsified by the latter.
This first test step is performed by applying the second test enable signal t2 to the control input of the second bus switch bu2, the actuating signal db to the input ec of the color killer stage ck, and a known data sequence, i.e., a test-data sequence, to the input of the chroma filter cf. The application of the actuating signal db to the input ec of the color killer stage ck is necessary because an actual actuating signal coming from other stages of the chrominance-channel circuit is applied to the color killer only during normal operation of the chrominance-channel circuit, cf. the above-mentioned printed publication EP 0 051 075 Al.
In response to the application of the second test enable signal t2 to the second bus switch bu2, the input signals of the chroma filter cf are transferred directly to the input of the chroma demodulator cd, so that, if a known test-data sequence is used, the performance of the chroma demodulator cd can be checked by means of the output signals.
In the second step, the parallel multiplier m is tested. This is done by applying the first test enable signal t1 to the control input of the first bus switch bu1, the third test enable signal t3 and the normalizing signal ns to the enable input of the accumulator ak, i.e., to the enable input of the fifth buffer memory p5, for example; the normalizing data nd are applied to the normalizing-data input ne of the fifth buffer memory p5, and a known data sequence, i.e., a test-data sequence, is applied to the input of the chroma filter cf.
As in the first test, the first test enable signal t1 causes the test-data sequence to bypass the chroma filter cf, so that the test data are applied directly to one input of the parallel multiplier m. This bypassing of the chroma filter cf is necessary because the chroma filter is generally a dynamic subcircuit, which is not suitable for being included in the individual tests for this reason alone.
As a result of the entry of normalizing data into the accumulator ak or into the fifth buffer memory p5 as a subcircuit of the accumulator, known data are also applied to the second input of the parallel multiplier m, so that the output signal of the latter is predeterminable, which makes it possible to check the correct functioning of the multiplier. Since the chroma demodulator cd was tested already in the first test step, the data appearing at its output during the second test step are the unchanged output data of the parallel multiplier m if the chroma demodulator cd was found to operate correctly.
Further tests may now be performed on the absolute-value formers bb1, bb2, the first adder a1, and the parallel comparator k. To do this, the first test enable signal t1 is applied to the control input of the first bus switch bu1, and known data sequences are applied to the input of the chroma filter cf, the individual test results being accessible via the above-mentioned additional contact pad and being generally present in the form of a go/no-go decision.
The last test to be performed is that of the accumulator ak. To this end, the first test enable signal t1 is applied to the control input of the first bus switch bu1; the third test enable signal t3 and the normalizing signal ns are applied to the enable input of the accumulator ak, i.e., to the corresponding input of the fifth buffer memory p5, for example; a trigger signal is applied to the second limiter b2, and known data sequences are fed to the minuend input (+) of the parallel subtracter sb. With the second limiter sb2 triggered, one of the input signals of the accumulator is predetermined and, thus, known because the output data of the subtracter sb are known as well. The accumulator ak can thus be tested by varying the reference data rs.
The reference data rs, the above-mentioned various test-data sequences, and the normalizing data nd may come from a microprocessor.

Digital horizontal-deflection circuit:

Digital deflection Processor (DPU)Instead of fine-controlling the horizontal deflection signal in a digital television receiver by means of two phase-locked loops and gate-delay stages as is done in prior art arrangements, in the horizontal-deflection circuit according to the invention, a first digital word delivered by a first phase-locked loop and representative of the horizontal frequency is added in an adder to a suitably amplified third digital word delivered by a phase comparator of a second phase-locked loop. The output of the adder is fed to the control input of a digital sine-wave generator which drives a frequency divider. The latter delivers the horizontal deflection signal, which drives the horizontal output stage. The phase comparator is fed with the horizontal flyback signal, which is derived from the horizontal deflection signal, and a second digital word generated by the first phase-locked loop and representative of the desired phase position of the flyback signal.

What is claimed is: 1. A digital horizontal-deflection circuit for generating an analog horizontal deflection signal driving the horizontal output stage of a digital television receiver clocked with a system clock, comprising:
a first digital phase-locked loop which synchronizes the horizontal deflection signal with the horizontal synchronizing signal separated from the composite color signal and delivers for each line of video signal a first digital word representative of the horizontal frequency and a second digital word representative of the desired phase position of the horizontal flyback signal;
a second phase-locked loop which uses a digital phase comparator to generate a third digital word representative of the phase deviation of the horizontal flyback signal from the desired position and shifts the horizontal deflection signal in time so that the horizontal flyback signal takes up the desired phase position;
an adder having a first input to which said first digital word is fed and a second input to which said third digital word is fed via a multiplier serving as an amplifier;
a digital sine-wave generator having a control input to which the output of said adder is fed; and
a frequency divider to which the output of said digital sine-wave generator is supplied, the output of said frequency divider providing the horizontal deflection signal.
2. A horizontal-deflection circuit as defined in claim wherein said first digital word is representative of the period of the horizontal deflection signal, and additionally comprising a digital period-to-frequency converter connected between said first phase-locked loop and said first input of said adder. 3. A horizontal-deflection circuit as defined in claims 1 or 2, additionally comprising a protection circuit coupled between the output of said digital sine-wave generator and the input of said frequency divider, said protection circuit providing a sine-wave signal of a desired frequency if the frequency of said sine-wave generator departs from a desired-value range. 4. A horizontal-deflection circuit as defined in claim 3, wherein said protection circuit is an analog phase-locked loop.

Description:

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
The present invention relates to a digital horizontal-deflection circuit for generating an analog horizontal deflection signal driving the horizontal output stage of a digital television receiver clocked with a system clock. A digital horizontal-deflection circuit of this kind is described in a data book of Intermetall, "DIGIT 2000 VLSI Digital TV System," 1984/5, pages 112 to 114, which deal with the integrated circuit DPU 2500.
In the prior art arrangement, the phase variation which is necessary for the digital generation of the horizontal deflection signal and must be stepped in fractions of the period of the system clock is achieved essentially by the use of gate-delay stages or chains as are described, for example, in the European Patent Applications EP-A Nos. 0,059,802; 0,080,970; and 0,116,669, which essentially utilize the inherent delay of inverters. It turned out, however, that with these arrangements, it is not possible to completely control all operating conditions which may occur.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
It is, therefore, the object of the invention to modify and improve the digital horizontal-deflection circuit described in the above prior art in such a way that the gate-delay stages can be dispensed with.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF A PREFERRED EMBODIMENT
The invention will now be explained in more detail with reference to the single FIGURE of the accompanying drawing, which is a block diagram of an embodiment of the invention. The block diagram shows that portion of a digital television receiver, i.e., of a television receiver in which the analog signal received via the antenna is processed digitally, which is of interest in connection with the invention. Thus, all subcircuits for digital-to-analog conversion, sync separation, chrominance-signal and luminance-signal processing or sound-signal processing have been omitted; the overall circuit concept of digital television receivers has been well known for some time.
The first digital phase-locked loop (PLL) p1 is supplied with the (digital) horizontal synchronizing signal hs, which was separated from the composite color signal, and the system clock st, and derives therefrom, in the manner described in the prior art, the first digital word d1, which is representative of the horizontal frequency, and the second digital word d2, which is representative of the desired phase position of the horizontal flyback signal fy. The signal fy comes from the receiver's horizontal output stage ps, which supplies the necessary sawtooth current to the deflection coil 1. The phase position of the flyback signal fy relative to the horizontal deflection signal ps is dependent on the switching properties of the horizontal output stage ps and is also influenced by the video signal applied to the picture tube.
By means of the second PLL p2, indicated in the FIGURE by the large rectangle bounded by a broken line, these dependences are compensated in the manner described in the prior art. The phase comparator pv generates the third digital word d3, which is representative of the phase deviation of the flyback signal fy from its desired position, and the second PLL p2 shifts the horizontal deflection signal ds in time so that the flyback signal fy takes up the desired phase position.
The first digital word d1 is fed to the first input of the adder ad, and the third digital word d3 is fed to the second input of this adder via the multiplier m, which serves as an amplifier. The second input of the multiplier m is fed with the signal k determining the gain of the second PLL p2, so that the transient response of the latter can be optimally adjusted by the manufacturer of the television receiver.
The output of the adder ad is fed to the control input of the digital sine-wave generator s, which may be designed as an accumulator followed by a sine looker table (ROM). If an n-bit word d4 is applied to its control input, this arrangement, which is known in principle, delivers a sine-wave of frequency (d4)fs/2 ⁿ , where fs is the frequency of the system clock st.
The output of the digital sine-wave generator sg is fed to the frequency divider ft, which provides the horizontal deflection signal ds, a square-wave signal as usual. The frequency divider ft thus not only divides the frequency of the signal delivered by the sine-wave generator sg, but also converts the sine-wave signal into the above-mentioned square-wave signal; this can be done in a suitable sine-to-square wave converter stage at the input of the frequency divider ft.
Two stages which can be added to the arrangement singly or in combination are indicated in the FIGURE by rectangles bounded by broken lines. The period-to-frequency converter fw between the output of the first PLL pl for the first digital word d1 and the corresponding input of the adder ad is necessary if the first digital word d1, generated by the first PLL p1, represents the period of the horizontal deflection signal ds (if this word represents the frequency of the horizontal deflection signal, the stage fw is not necessary).
Between the output of the digital sine-wave generator sg and the input of the frequency divider ft, the protection circuit sc may be inserted. It is preferably an analog phase-locked loop which provides a sine-wave signal of the desired frequency if the frequency of the sine-wave generator sg departs from a predetermined desired-value range. This may be to advantage during the start-up phase after the turning on of the television receiver or may serve to afford protection in the event of a failure of one or both of the PLL's p1, p2.
In the FIGURE, the stripe-like connecting leads represent signal paths over which digital signals are transferred in parallel, i.e., on these buses, the individual (parallel) digital words follow one after the other at the pulse repetition rate of the system clock st. The fact that the individual stages of the second PLL p2--where necessary and appropriate--and the period-to-frequency converter fw are clocked with the system clock st, too, is indicated by the respective clock input lines.
The digital horizontal-deflection circuit in accordance with the invention is preferably realized using monolithic integrated circuit techniques, particularly MOS technology. It may form part of a larger integrated circuit but can also be implemented as a separate integrated circuit.

Digital circuit for steepening color-signal transitions:

Digital Transient Improvement Processor (DTI)

This circuit arrangement is designed for use in digital color-television receivers or the like and contains for each of the two digital color-difference signals a slope detector to which both a digital signal defining an amplitude threshold value and a digital signal defining a time threshold value are applied. At least one intermediate value occurring during an edge to be steepened is stored, and at the same time value of the steepened edge, it is "inserted" into the latter. This is done by means of memories switches, output registers, and a sequence controller.

What is claimed is: 1. A circuit arrangement for steepening color-signal transitions, comprising:
first and second circuit branches, said first branch receiving a first color difference digital signal from a first color difference channel and said second branch receiving a second color difference digital signal from a second color difference channel, each of said branches comprising:
a digital slope detector for generating a control signal at an output when the respective one of said first or second color difference digital signals has a predetermined relationship to predetermined amplitude and time thresholds;
a first delay element receiving and delaying said respective one color difference digital signal by a time equal to the delay of said digital slope detector;
at least one memory having its input connected to the output of said first delay element;
a switch having first and second inputs connected to the outputs of said delay element and said at least one memory, respectively; and
an output register having its input connected to the output of said switch;
and
a sequence controller coupled to the outputs of said digital slope detectors in said first and second circuit branches, and receiving a clock signal having a predetermined frequency relationship to a chrominance subcarrier frequency, and receiving a digital signal determining the hold time equal to the known system rise time of said first and second color difference channels, said sequence controller providing sequence control signals for controlling said at least one memory, said switch and said output register in both of said first and second circuit branches such that:
a color difference signal value occurring at an intermediate value of said hold time is read into said memory, said color difference signal value stored in said memory is read via said switch into said output rergister at the corresponding intermediate value of the steepened leading edge of said color-signal, the input of said output register being connected to the output of said delay element at all times except at said intermediate value of said steepened leading edge.
2. A circuit arrangement in accordance with claim 1, wherein each said slope detector comprises:
a first digital differentiator receiving the respective color difference digital signal;
a digital absolute value stage coupled to said first digital differentiator output;
a first digital comparator having a minuend input coupled to said digital absolute value stage output, a subtrahend input supplied with a digital signal corresponding to said amplitude threshold value, and an output;
a second digital differentiator having an input coupled to said comparator output;
a counter for counting pulses of said clock signal, said counter having an enable input coupled to said comparator output, and having a reset input coupled to the output of said second digital differentiator;
a fifth memory having its inputs coupled to the count outputs of said counter and an enable input coupled to said second digital differentiator output;
a second digital comparator having a minuend input coupled to the output of said fifth memory, a subtrahend input supplied with a digital signal corresponding to said time threshold value; and
gate means for combining the output of said comparator and the output of said second digital differentiator to provide said control signal when the output of said comparator and the output of said second digital differentiator are both active.
3. A circuit arrangement in accordance with claim 2,
wherein each of said first and second circuit branches further comprises a second memory having its input connected to said first delay element output, said switch having a third input coupled to said second memory output; and
wherein said sequence controller comprises:
a counter for counting pulses of said clock signal; and
a decoder for decoding the count output of said counter to provide said sequence control signals, said sequence control signals also controlling each said second memory,
said sequence controller operating such that color difference signal values occurring at the end of the first third of said hold time are written into said at least one memory, and color difference signal values occurring at the end of the second third of said hold time are written into said second memory; and
wherein:
in said first circuit branch the contents of said at least one memory and said second memory are written via said switch into said output register at the end of the first third and at the end of the second third, respectively, of said steepened leading edge;
in said second circuit branch the contents of said at least one memory and said second memory are written via said switch into said output register at the end of the first third and the second third, respectively, of said steepened leading edge; and
the input of the respective output register of each of said first and second circuit branches is connected to the output of the respective first delay element at all times except at the end of said first third and said second third or said steepened leading edge.
4. A circuit arrangement in accordance with claim 1,
wherein each of said first and second circuit branches further comprises a second memory having its input connected to said first delay element output, said switch having a third input coupled to said second memory output;
wherein said sequence controller comprises:
a counter for counting pulses of said clock signal; and
a decoder for decoding the count output of said counter to provide said sequence control signals, said sequence control signals also controlling each said second memory,
said sequence controller operating such that color difference signal values occurring at the end of the first third of said hold time are written into said at least one memory, and color difference signal values occurring at the end of the second third of said hold time are written into said second memory; and
wherein:
in said first circuit branch the contents of said at least one memory and said second memory are written via said switch into said output register at the end of the first third and at the end of said second third, respectively, of said steepened leading edge;
in said second circuit branch the contents of said at least one memory and said second memory are written via said switch into said output register at the end of the first third and the second third, respectively, of said steepened leading edge; and
the input of the respective output register of each of said first and second circuit branches is connected to the output of the respective first delay element at all times except at the end of said first third and said second third of said steepened leading edge.

Description:

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
The invention pertains to a circuit for steepening color-signal transitions in color television receivers or the like.
A circuit arrangement of this kind includes a slope detector which, when a predetermined amplitude threshold value is exceeded, delivers a switching signal which causes a substitute signal to appear at the respective output of the two color-difference channels for the duration of the system rise time of said channels. One circuit arrangement of this kind, which provides a chroma transient improvement, is described in a publication by VALVO entitled "Technische Information 840228 (Feb. 28, 1984): Versteilerung von Farbsignalsprungen and Leuchtdichtesignal-Verzogerung mit der Schaltung TDA 4560".
The bandwidth of the color-difference channel is very small compared with the bandwidth of the luminance channel, namely only about 1/5 that of the luminance channel in the television standards now in use. This narrow bandwidth leads to blurred color transitions ("color edging") in case of sudden color-signal changes, e.g., at the edges of the usual color-bar test signal, because, compared with the associated luminance-signal transition, an approximately fivefold duration of the color-signal transition results from the narrow transmission bandwidth.
In the prior circuit arrangement, the relatively slowly rising color-signal edges are steepened by suitably delaying the color-difference signals and the luminance signal and steepening the edges of the color-difference signals at the end of the delay by suitable analog circuits. The color-difference signals and the luminance signal are present and processed in analog form as usual.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to modify the principle of the prior art analog circuits in such a way that it can be used in known color-television receivers with digital signal-processing circuitry (cf. "Electronics", Aug. 11, 1981, pages 97 to 103), with the slope detector responding not only to one criterion, namely a predeterminable amplitude threshold value as in the prior art arrangement, but to an additional criterion.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
In accordance with the invention a circuit arrangement provides a fully digital solution for chroma transient improvement. The circuit arrangement contains a slope detector, a memory, a switch-over switch and a timing control stage for the processing of each color difference signal. A time period threshold signal and an amplitude threshold signal are fed to the slope detector. If the amplitude threshold is exceeded and the time threshold is not being reached, the slope is improved.
This circuit arrangement is designed for use in digital color-television receivers or the like and contains for each of the two digital color-difference signals a slope detector to which both a digital signal defining an amplitude threshold value and a digital signal defining a time threshold value are applied. At least one intermediate value occurring during an edge to be steepened is stored, and at the same time value of the steepened edge, it is "inserted" into the latter. This is done by means of memories, switches, output registers, and a sequence controller.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWING
The invention will be better understood from a reading of the following detailed description in conjunction with the drawing in which:
FIG. 1 is a block diagram of a first embodiment of the invention;
FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a second form of the arrangement of FIG. 1;
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of an embodiment of the slope detectors of FIGS. 1 and 2;
FIGS. 4a-c shows various waveforms to explain the basic operation of the invention; and
FIGS. 5a and 5b shows waveforms to explain the operation of the improved arrangement of FIG. 2.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
In the block diagram of FIG. 1, the digital color-difference signals yr, yb are present in the baseband at the frequency of the clock signal f, which is four times the chrominance-subcarrier frequency, i.e., the individual data words appear one after the other at this frequency. If a subharmonic of the clock signal f, i.e., the chrominance-subcarrier frequency itself, for example, is chosen for the color-difference-signal demodulation as may be the case in known digital color-television receivers, these digital signals must be brought to the aforementioned repetition frequency of the clock signal f by digital interpolation.
In FIG. 1, there are two branches for the two color-difference signal yr and yb, respectively. They are of the same design, with the branch z1 assigned to the red-minus-luminance channel, and the branch z2 to the blue-minus-luminance channel. In the branch z1, the red-minus-luminance signal yr is applied to the inputs of the first delay element v1 and the first digital slope detector fs1. The output of the first delay element v1 is fed to the input of the first memory s1 and to one of the inputs of the first switch us1, whereas the output of the first memory s1 is connected to the other input of the first switch us1, whose output is coupled to the input of the first output register r1.
The second branch z2, to which the blue-minus-luminance signals yb are applied, is of the same design as the first branch z1 as far as the individual circuits and their interconnections are concerned, and contains the second digital slope detector fs2, the second delay element v2, the second memory s2, the second switch us2, and the second output register r2.
The output signals of the two slope detectors fs1, fs2 are applied, respectively, to the first and second inputs of the OR gate og, whose output is connected to the first input of the sequence controller ab. The second input of the latter is presented with the clock signal f, and the third input with the digital signal hz, by which the hold time equal to the system rise time of the color-difference channels can be preset. The outputs of the sequence controller ab are connected to the enable inputs en of the first and second memories s1, s2 and of the first and second output registers r1, r2 and to the control inputs of the two switches us1, us2.
The sequence controller ab controls these subcircuits as follows. A red-minus-luminance signal value yr1 and a blue-minus-luminance signal value yb1 occurring at an intermediate value of the hold time are read into the memories s1 and s2, respectively. This intermediate value of the hold time lies preferably in the middle of the hold time. Furthermore, the sequence controller causes the contents of the memories s1 and s2 to be transferred via the associated switches us1 and us2 into the associated output registers r1 and r2, respectively, at the corresponding intermediate value, preferably one-half, of the steepened leading edge, while at all times other than the instant of the intermediate value of the steepened leading edge, the inputs of the associated output registers are connected to the outputs of the delay elements v1 and v2, respectively.
The block diagram of FIG. 2 shows an improved version of the arrangement of FIG. 1. The improvement is that the first and second memories s1 and s2 of FIG. 1 have been supplemented with the third and fourth memories s3 and s4, respectively, each of which is connected in parallel with the associated memory, and that the two switches us1 and us2 of FIG. 1 have been expanded into multiposition switches us1' and us2' each having one additional input connected to the output of the third memory s3 and the output of the fourth memory s4, respectively.
This improved portion of FIG. 2 concerns the sequence controller ab of FIG. 1. In FIG. 2, the latter consists of the counter c2, which counts the pulses of the clock signal s, the decoder dc, and the AND gate u2. The start input st of the counter c2 is connected to the output of the OR gate og, whereas the stop input sp is controlled by the decoder dc. The digital signal hz is fed to the decoder dc, cf. FIG. 1.
The counts of the counter c2 are decoded by reading the red- and blue-minus-luminance signal values occurring at the end of the first third of the hold time, i.e., the values yr1' and yb1', into the first memory s1 and the second memory s2, respectively, and the red- and blue-minus-luminance signal values occurring at the end of the second third of the hold time, i.e., the values yr2 and yb2, into the third memory s3 and the fourth memory s4, respectively. At the end of the first third and second third, respectively, of the steepened leading edge, the contents of the memories s1 and s3, respectively, are transferred through the switch us1' into the output register r1, and at the end of the first third and second third, respectively of that edge, the contents of the memories s2 and s4, respectively, are transferred through the switch us2' into the output register r2. The inputs of the two outputs registers are connected to the outputs of the first and second delay elements v1 and v2, respectively, except at the end of the first and second thirds, respectively, of the steepened leading edge.
The clock signal f is applied to one of the inputs of the AND gate u2, whose other input is connected to one of the outputs of the decoder dc, and whose output is coupled to the enable inputs en of the first and second output registers r1, r2.
The block diagram of FIG. 3 shows a preferred embodiment of the circuit of the slope detectors fs1, fs2. The input for the color-difference signal yr, yb is followed by the series combination of the first digital differentiator d1, the digital absolute-value stage bb, and the minuend input m of the first digital comparator k1. The subtrahend input s of the latter is presented with the digital signal corresponding to the amplitude threshold value, the signal ta.
The absolute-value stage bb delivers digital values which are unsigned, i.e., which have no sign bit, for example.
Accordingly, the absolute-value stage bb contains a subcircuit which changes negative binary numbers in, e.g., one's or two's complement representation into the corresponding positive binary number, i.e., a recomplementer.
The term "comparator" as used herein means a digital circuit which compares the two digital signals appearing at the two inputs to determine which of the two signals is greater. Since, purely formally, such a comparison is closer to the arithmetic operation of subtraction than to that of addition although the concrete internal circuitry of such comparators is more similar to that of adders than to that of subtracters, the two inputs of the comparator are called "minuend input" and "subtrahend input" as in the case of a subtracter. The three logic output signals are "minuend greater than subtrahend", "subtrahend greater than minuend", and "minuend equal to subtrahend". Thus, in positive logic, the more positive logic level will appear at the minuend-greater-than-subtrahend output of a comparator if and as long as the minuend is greater than the subtrahend. If needed, the more negative logic level appearing at this output may serve to signal the "minuend-smaller-than-subtrahend" function, i.e., it is also possible to use negative logic.
In the slope detector of FIG. 3, the enable input eb of the first clock-pulse counter c1 and one of the inputs of the second digital differentiator d2 are connected to the minuend-greater-than-subtrahend output ms of the first comparator k1. The count outputs of the first counter c1 are coupled to the input of the fifth memory s5, which has its output connected to the minuend input m of the second digital comparator k2. The subtrahend input s of the latter is presented with a digital signal corresponding to the time threshold value, the signal tt.
The reset input re of the first counter c1, the enable input en of the fifth memory s5, and the first input of the first AND gate u1 are connected to the output of the second differentiator d2. The subtrahend-greater-than-minuend output sm of the second comparator k2 is connected to the second input of the second AND gate u2, whose output is fed to the OR gate of FIGS. 1 or 2. The subcircuits d1, bb, k1, d2, and, as mentioned above, c1 are clocked by the clock signal f.
FIGS. 4a-c and 5a and b serve to illustrate the operation of the circuit arrangement in accordance with the invention. FIG. 4a shows the assumed shape of one of the two color-difference signals yr, yb; it should be noted that, in those figures, the representation commonly used for analog signals has been chosen for simplicity.
FIG. 4b shows the output signal of the absolute-value stage bb and the amplitude threshold value corresponding to the digital signal ta. Also shown is the time threshold value corresponding to the digital signal tt. FIG. 4c shows the shape of the assumed color-difference signal of FIG. 4a as it appears at the output of the output register r1, r2 of FIG. 1 or FIG. 2. A comparison between FIGS. 4a and 4c shows that the last edge on the right has been steepened since, during this edge, both the amplitude threshold value is exceeded and the time threshold value is not reached (cf. the use of the subtrahend-greater-than-minuend output sm of the second comparator k2), the steepening function becomes effective. The first comparator k1 provides a signal at the minuend-greater-than-subtrahend output ms as long as the output signal of the absolute-value stage bb is greater than the amplitude threshold value. During that time, the first counter c1 can count the clock pulses until it is reset by a signal derived by the second differentiator d2 from the trailing edge of the output signal of the first comparator k1. The previous count of the counter c1 is transferred into the fifth memory s5 and compared with the time threshold value by the second comparator k2. If the time threshold value is greater than the period measured by the counter c1, the above-mentioned function will be initiated.
FIGS. 5a and 5b serve to explain how the steepened edge is formed. Curve a of FIG. 5a shows a slowly rising edge used for the explanation. The distances between the points in curves a and b of FIG. 5a are to illustrate the period of the clock signal f. FIG. 5b shows the waveform at the enable inputs en of the output registers r1, r2. At the arrow shown on the left between curves a and b of FIG. 5a, the signal periodically applied to these inputs at the repetition rate of the clock signal f is stopped, so to speak, so that no signals are transferred to the output registers r1, r2 over several clock periods, but the signal read in at the "clocking" of the enable inputs en is retained in those registers. After the "clocking" of the enable inputs of the output registers r1, r2 has resumed at the beginning of the edge to be steepened, the signal values yr1', yb1' and yr2, yb2 read into the memories s1, s2 and s3, s4 at the end of the first third and the second third, respectively, of the slowly rising edge of curve a of FIG. 5a are transferred into the output registers r1, r2 at the end of the first third and the second third, respectively, of this edge. The arrow shown on the right between curves a and b of FIG. 5a is to indicate that, at the end of the slowly rising edge of curve a, the steepened edge of curve b has reached the desired signal value.
The period for which the "clocking" of the enable inputs en of the output registers r1, r2 is "interrupted" is equal to the duration of the digital signal hz fed to the sequence controller ab of FIG. 1 or to the decoder dc of FIG. 2.
The circuit arrangement in accordance with the invention can be readily implemented in monolithic integrated form. As it uses exclusively digital circuits, it is especially suited for integration using insulated-gate field-effect transistors, i.e., MOS technology.

ITT VCU 2133 Video Codec UNIT


High-speed coder/decoder IC for analog-to-digital and di-
gital-to-analog conversion of the video signal in digital TV
receivers based on the DIGIT 2000 concept. The VCU 2133
is a VLSI circuit in Cl technology, housed in a 40-pin Dil
plastic package. One single silicon chip combines the fol-
lowing functions and circuit details (Fig. 1):
- two input video amplifiers
- one A/D converter for the composite video signal
- the noise inverter
- one D/A converter for the luminance signal
- two D/A converters for the color difference signals
- one RGB matrix for converting the color difference sig-
nals and the luminance signal into RGB signals
- three RGB output amplifiers
- programmable auxiliary circuits for blanking, brightness
adjustment and picture tube alignment
- additional clamped RGB inputs for text and other analog
RGB signals
- programmable beam current limiting
1. Functional Description
The VCU 2133 Video Codec is intended for converting the
analog composite video signal from the video demodulator
into a digital signal. The latter is further processed

digitally
in the VPU 2203 Video Processor and in the DPU 2553 De-
flection Processor. After processing in the VPU 2203 (color
demodulation, PAL compensation, etc.), the VPU‘s digital
output signals (luminance and color difference) are recon-
verted into analog signals in the VCU 2133. From these an-
alog signals are derived the RGB signals by means of the
RGB matrix, and, after amplification in the integrated RGB
amplifiers, the RGB signals drive the RGB output amplifiers
of the color T\/ set.
For TV receivers using the NTSC standard the VPU 2203
may be replaced by the CVPU 2233 Comb Filter Video Pro-
cessor which is pin-compatible with the VPU 2203, but of-
fers better video performance. In the case of SECAM, the
SPU 2220 SECAM Chroma Processor must be connected
in parallel to the VPU 2203 for chroma processing, while
the luma processing remains inthe VPU 2203.
In a more sophisticated CTV receiver according to the Dl-
GIT 2000 concept, after the VPU Video Processor may be
placed the DTI 2223 Digital Transient Improvement Proces-
sor which serves for sharpening color transients on the
screen. The output signals of the DTI are fed to the VCU’s
luma and chroma inputs. To achieve the desired transient
improvement, the R-Y and B-Y D/A converters of the VCU
must be stopped for a certain time which is done by the
hold pulse supplied by the DTI and fed to the Reset pin 23
of the VCU. The pulse detector following this pin seperates
the (capacitively-coupled) hold pulse from the reset signal.
In addition, the VCU 2133 carries out the functions:
- brightness adjustment
- automatic CRT spot-cutoff control (black level)
- white balance control and beam current limiting
Further, the VCU 2133 offers direct inputs for text or other
analog RGB signals including adjustment of brightness and
contrast for these signals.
The RGB matrix and RGB amplifier circuits integrated in
the VCU 2133 are analog. The CRT spot-cutoff control is
carried out via the RGB amplifiers’ bias, and the white bal-
ance control is accomplished by varying the gain of these
amplifiers. The VCU 2133 is clocked by a 17.7 or 14.3 MHz
clock signal supplied by the MCU 2632 Clock Generator IC.
1.1. The A/D Converter with Input Amplifiers and Bit
Enlargement
The video signal is input to the VCU 2133 via pins 35 and 37
which are intended for normal TV video signal (pin 35) and
for VCR or SCART video signal (pin 37) respectively. The
video amplifier whose action is required, is activated by the
CCU 2030, CCU 2050 or CCU 2070 via the IM bus by soft-
ware. The amplification of both video amplifiers is doubled
during the undelayed horizontal blanking pulse (at pin 36)
in order to obtain a higher digital resolution of the color
synchronization signal (burst). At D 2-MAC reception, the
doubled gain is switched off by means of bit p = 1 (Fig. 8).

The A/D converter is of the flash type, a circuit of 2" com-
parators connected in parallel. This means that the number
of comparators must be doubled if one additional bit is
needed. Thus it is important to have as few bits as possi-
ble. For a slowly varying video signal, 8 bits are required.

ln
order to achieve an 8-bit picture resolution using a 7-bit
converter, a trick is used: during every other line the refer-
ence voltage of the A/D converter is changed by an
amount corresponding to one half of the least significant
bit. ln this procedure, a grey value located between two 7-
bit steps is converted to the next lower value during one
line and to the next higher value during the next line. The
two grey values on the screen are averaged by the viewer’s
eye, thus producing the impression of grey values with
8-bit resolution. Synchronously to the changing reference
voltage of the A/D converter, to the output signal of the Y
D/A converter is added a half-bit step every second line.
The bit enlargement just described must be switched off in
the case of using the D2-MAC standard (q = 1 and r = 1
in Fig. 8). ln the case of using the comb filter CVPU instead
of the VPU, the half-bit adding in the Y D/A converter must
be switched off (r = 1 in Fig. 8).
The A/D converter’s sampling frequency is 17.7 MHZ for
PAL and 14.3 MHz for NTSC, the clock being supplied by
the MCU 2632 Clock Generator IC which is common to all
circuits for the digital T\/ system. The converter’s resolu-
tion is 1/2 LSB of 8 bits. Its output signal is Gray-coded to
eliminate spikes and glitches resulting from different com-
parator speeds or from the coder itself. The output is fed to
the VPU 2203 and to the DPU 2553 in parallel form.
1.2. The Noise Inverter
The digitized composite video signal passes the noise in-
verter circuit before it is put out to the VPU 2203 and to the
DPU 2553. The noise inverter serves for suppressing bright
spots on the screen which can be generated by noise
VCU 2133
pulses, p. ex. produced by ignition sparks of cars etc. The
function of the noise inverter can be seen in Fig. 2. The
maximum white level corresponds with step 126 of the A/D
converter’s output signal (that means a voltage of 7 V at
pin 35). lf, due to an unwanted pulse on the composite
video signal, the voltage reaches 7.5 V (what means step
127 in digital) or more, the signal level is reduced by such
an amount, that a medium grey is obtained on the screen
(about 40 lFiE). The noise inverter circuit can be switched
off by software (address 16 in the VPU 2203, see there).
1.3. The Luminance D/A Converter (Y)
After having been processed in the VPU 2203 (color de-
modulation, PAL compensation, etc.), the different parts of
the digitized video signal are fed back to the VCU 2133 for
further processing to drive the RGB output amplifiers. The
luminance signal (Y) is routed from the VPU’s contrast mul-
tiplier to the Y D/A converter in the VCU 2133 in the form of
a parallel 8-bit signal with a resolution of 1/2 LSB of 9

bits.
This bit range provides a sufficient signal range for contrast
as well as positive and negative overshoot caused by the
peaking filter (see Fig. 3 and Data Sheet VPU 2203).


The luminance D/A converter is designed as an R-2R lad-
der network. lt is clocked with the 17.7 or the 14.3 MHz
clock signal applied to pin 22. The cutoff frequency of the
luminance signal is determined by the clock frequency.
1.4. The D/A Converters for the Color Difference Signals
R-Y and B-Y
ln order to save output pins at the VPU 2203 and input pins
at the VCU 2133 as well as connection lines, the two digital
color difference signals R-Y and B-Y are transferred in time
multiplex operation. This is possible because these signals’
bandwidth is only 1 MHZ and the clock is a 17.7 or 14.3
MHz signal.
The two 8-bit D/A converters R-Y and B-Y are also built as
R-2R ladder networks. They are clocked with ‘A clock fre-
quency, but the clock for the multiplex data transfer is 17.7
or 14.3 MHz. Four times 4 bits are transferred sequentially,
giving a total of 16 bits. A sync signal coordinates the

multi-
plex operations in both the VCU 2133 and the VPU 2203.
Thus, only four lines are needed for 16 bits. Fig. 4 shows
the timing diagram of the data transfer described.
ln a CTV receiver with digital transient improvement (DTI
2223), the R-Y and B-Y D/A converters are stopped by the
hold pulse supplied by the DTI, and their output signal is
kept constant for the duration of the hold pulse. Thereafter,
the output signal jumps to the new value, as described in
the DTl’s data sheet.
Fig. 4:
Timing diagram of the multiplex data transfer of the chroma
channel between VPU 2203, VCU 2133 and SPU 2220
a) main clock signal QSM
b) valid data out of the VCU 2133’s video A/D converter.
AIAD is the delay time of this converter, about 40 ns.
c) valid data out of the VPU 2203.
d) MUX data transfer of the chroma signals from VPU 2203
to VCU 2133, upper line: sync pulse from pin 27 VPU to
pin 21 VCU during sync time in vertical blanking time,
see Fig. 8; lower line: valid data from pins 27 to 30
(VPU) to pins 18 to 21 (VCU)
1.5. The RGB Matrix and the RGB Output Amplifiers
ln the RGB matrix, the signals Y, R-Y and B-Y are dema-
trixed, the reduction coefficients of 0.88 and 0.49 being tak-
en into account. In addition, the matrix is supplied with a
signal produced by an 8-bit D/A converter for setting the
brightness of the picture. The brightness adjustment range
corresponds to 1/2 of the luminance signal range (see Fig.
3). It can be covered in 255 steps. The brightness is set by
commands fed from the CCU 2030, CCU 2050 or CCU 2070
Central Control Unit to the VPU 2203 via the IM bus.
There are available four different matrices: standard PAL,
matrix 2, 3 and 4, the latter for foreign markets. 'The re-
quired matrix must be mask-programmed during produc-
tion. The matrices are shown in Table 1, based on the for-
mulas:
R = r1~(R-Y)+ l'2~(B-Y) +Y
G = Q1-(Ft-Y)+ Q2 - (B-Y) +Y
B = b1-(Ft-Y)+ bg - (B-Y) +Y
The three RGB output amplifiers are impedance converters
having a low output impedance, an output voltage swing of
6 V (p-p), thereof 3 V for the video part and 3 V for bright-
ness and dark signal. The output current is 4 mA. Fig. 5
shows the recommended video output stage configuration.

For the purpose of white-balance control, the amplification
factor of each output amplifier can be varied stepwise in
127 steps (7 bits) by a factor of 1 to 2. Further, the CRT
spot-cutoff control is accomplished via these amplifiers’ bi-
as by adding the output signal of an 8-bit D/A converter to
the intelligence signal. The amplitude of the output signal
corresponds to one half of the luminance range. The eight
bits make it possible to adjust the dark voltage in 0.5 %
steps. By means of this circuit, the factory-set values for
the dark currents can be maintained and aging of the pic-
ture tube compensated.
1.6. The Beam Current and Peak Beam Current Limiter
The principle of this circuitry may be explained by means of
Fig. 6. Both facilities are carried out via pin 34 of the VCU
2133. For beam current limiting and peak beam current li-
miting, contrast and brightness are reduced by reducing
the reference voltages for the D/A converters Y, Ft-Y and
B-Y. At a voltage of more than +4 V at pin 34, contrast and
brightness are not affected. In the range of +4 V to +3 V,
the contrast is continuously reduced. At +3 V, the original
contrast is reduced to a programmable level, which is set
by the bits of address 16 of the VPU as shown in Table 2. A
further decrease of the voltage merely reduces brightness,
the contrast remains unchanged. At 2 V, the brightness is
reduced to zero. At voltages lower than 2 V, the output
goes to ultra black. This is provided for security purposes.
The beam current limiting is sensed at the ground end of
the EHT circuit, where the average value of the beam cur-
rent produces a certain voltage drop across a resistor in-
serted between EHT circuit and ground. The peak beam
current limiting can be provided additionally to avoid
“blooming” of white spots or letters on the screen. For
this, a fast peak current limitation is needed which is
sensed by three sensing transistors inserted between the
RGB amplifiers and the cathodes of the picture tube. One
of these three transistors is shown in Fig. 6. The sum of the
picture tube’s three cathode currents produces a voltage
drop across resistor R1. If this voltage exceeds that gen-
erated by the divider R2, B3 plus the base emitter voltage
of T2, this transistor will be turned on and the voltage at

pin
34 of the VCU 2133 sharply reduced. Time constants for
both beam current limiting and peak beam current limiting
can be set by the capacitors C1 and C2.
1.7. The Blanking Circuit
The blanking circuit coordinates blanking during vertical
and horizontal flyback. During the latter, the VCU 2133's
output amplifiers are switched to “ultra black”. Such
switching is different during vertical flyback, however, be-
cause at this time the measurements for picture tube align-
ment are Carried out. During vertical flyback, only the ca-
thode to be measured is switched to “black” during mea-
suring time, the other two are at ultra black so that only the
dark current of one cathode is measured at the same time.
For measuring the leakage current, all three cathodes are
switched to ultra black.
The sequence described is controlled by three code bits
contained in a train of 72 bits which is transferred from the
VPU 2203 to the VCU 2133 during each vertical blanking in-
terval. This transfer starts with the vertical blanking pulse.
During the transfer all three cathodes of the picture tube
are biased to ultra black. In the same manner, the white-
balance control is done.
The blanking circuit is controlled by two pulse combina-
tions supplied by the DPU 2553 Deflection Processor
(“sandcastle pulses"). Pin 39 of the VCU 2133 receives the
combined vertical blanking and delayed horizontal blanking


pulse from pin 22 of the DPU (Fig. 7 b), and pin 36 of the
VCU gets the combined undelayed horizontal blanking and
color key pulse from pin 19 of the DPU (Fig. 7 a). The two
outputs of the DPU are tristate-controlled, supplying the
output levels max. 0.4 V (low), min. 4.0 V (high), or high-im-
pedance, whereby the signal level in the high-impedance
mode is determined by the VCU’s input configuration, a
voltage divider of 3.6 KS! and 5 KQ between the +5 V sup-
ply and ground, to 2_8 V. The VCU’s input amplifier has two
thresholds of 2.0 V and 3.4 V for detecting the three levels
of the combined pulses. ln this way, two times two pulses
are transferred via only two lines.
1.8. The Circuitry for Picture Tube Alignment
During vertical flyback, a number of measurements are tak-
en and data is exchanged between the VCU 2133, the VPU
2203 and the CCU 2030 or CCU 2050. These measure-
ments deal with picture tube alignment, as white level and
dark current adjustment, and with the photo current sup-
plied by a photo resistor (Fig. 5) which serves for adapting
Fig. 8:
Data sequence during the transfer of test results from the
VPU 2203 to the VCU 2133. Nine Bytes are transferred, in
each case the LSB first. These 9 Bytes, 8 bits each, coin-
cide with the 72 pulses of 4.4 MHz that are transferred dur-
ing vertical flyback from pin 27 of the VPU 2203 to pin 21 of
the VCU 2133 (see Fig. 9).
l and mi beam current limiter range
l<: noise inverter on/off
n: video input switching bit
S: SECAM chroma sync bit; S = 1 means that the chroma
demultiplexer is synchronized every line. The switch-over
time from C0 to demux counter begins with the end of the
undelayed horizontal blanking pulse and remains valid for a
time of 12 Q M clock periods.
6
the contrast of the picture to the light in the room where
the TV set is operated. The circuitry for transferring the

pic-
ture tube alignment data, the sensed beam currents and
the photo current is clocked in compliance with the VPU
2203 by the vertical blanking pulse and the color key pulse.
To carry out the measurements, a quadruple cycle is pro-
vided (see Table 3). The timing of the data transfer during
the vertical flyback is shown in Fig. 9, and Fig. 8 shows the
data sequence during that data transfer.
Ft, G, B: code bits
p=1; no doubled gain in the input amplifier during horizon-
tal blanking (see section 1.1.)
q=1: no changing of the A/D converter’s reference vol-
tage during every other line (see section 1.1.)
r=1: when operating with the DMA D2-MAC decoder or
the CVPU comb filter video processor, the adding of
a step of ‘/2 LSB to the output signal of the Y D/A
converter is switched off (see section 1.1.).
s=1; the blankirig pulse in the analog video output signal
at pins 26 to 28 is switched off, as is required in
stand-alone applications.


1.9. The Additional RGB Inputs
The three additional analog RGB inputs are provided for
inputting text or other analog RGB signals. They are con-
nected to fast voltage-to-current converters whose output
current can be altered in 64 steps (6 bits) for contrast set-
ting between 100 % and 30 %. The three inputs are
clamped to a DC black level which corresponds to the level
of 31 steps in the luminance channel, by means of the color
key pulse. So, the same brightness level is achieved for
normal and for external RGB signals. The output currents
ofthe converters are then fed to the three RGB output am-
plifiers. Switchover to the external video signal is also

fast.
1.10. The Reset Circuit and Pulse Detector
The reset pulse produced by the external reset RC network
in common for the whole DIGIT 2000 system, switches the
RGB outputs to ultra black during the power-on routine of
the TV set. At other times, high level must be applied to the
reset input pin 23.
There is an additional facility with pin 23 which is used only
in conjunction with the DTl 2223 Digital Transient Improve-
ment Processor. The hold pulse produced by the latter
which serves for stopping the R-Y and B-Y D/A converters,
is also fed to pin 23, capacitively-coupled. The pulse detec-
tor responds on positive pulses which exceed the 5 V sup-
ply by about 1 V. The two DACs are stopped as long as the
hold pulse lasts, and supply a constant output signal of the
amplitude at the begin of the hold pulse.


5. Description of the Connections and the Signals
Pins 1, 9, and 25 - Supply Voltage, +5 V
The supply voltage is +5 V. Pins 1 and 25 supply the ana-
log part and must be filtered separately.
Pins 2 to 8 - Outputs V0 to V6
Via these pins the VCU 2133 supplies the digitized video
signal in a parallel 7-bit Gray code to the VPU 2203 and the
DPU 2553. The output configuration is shown in Fig. 16.
Pins 10 to 17 - Inputs L7 to L0
Fig. 17 shows these inputs’ configuration. Via these pins,
the VCU 2133 receives the digital luminance signal from the
VPU 2203 in a paraliel 8-bit code.
Pins 18 to 21 - Inputs C0 to C3
Via these inputs, whose circuitry and data correspond to
those of pins 10 to 17, the VCU 2133 is fed with the digi-
tized color difference signals R-Y and B-Y and with the
control and alignment signals described in section 1.8., in
multiplex operation. Pin 21 is additionally used for the

multi-
plex sync signal.
Pin 22 - QSM Main Clock Input
Via this pin, whose circuitry is shown in Fig. 18, the VCU
2133 is supplied with the clock signal QSM produced by the
MCU 2600 or MCU 2632 Clock Generator IC. The clock fre-
quency is 17.7 MHz for PAL and SECAM and 14.3 MHz for
NTSC. The clock signal must be DC-coupled.
Pin 23 - Reset and Hold Pulse Input (Fig. 19)
Via this pin, the VCU 2133 is supplied with the reset and
hold signals which are supplied by pin 21 of the DTI 2223
Digital Transient Improvement Processor for stopping the
R-Y and B-Y D/A converters, and for Reset.
Pins 24 and 29 - Analog Ground, 0
These pins serve as ground connections for the supply and
for the analog signals (GND pin 24 for RGB).
Pins 26 to 28 - RGB Outputs
These three analog outputs deliver an analog signal suit-
able for driving the RGB output transistors. Their diagram
is shown in Fig. 20. The output voltage swing is 6 V total,
3 V for the black-to-white signal and 3 V for adjusting
the brightness and the black level.
Pins 30 to 32 - Additional Analog Inputs R, G and B
Fig. 21 shows the configuration of these inputs. They serve
to feed analog RGB signals, for example for Teletext or si-
milar applications, and they are clamped during the color
key pulse. At a 1 V input, full brightness is reached. The
bandwidth extends from 0 to 8 MHz.
Pin 33 - Fast Switching Input
This input is connected as shown in Fig. 22. It ser\/es for
fast switchover of the video channel between an internally-
produced video signal and an externally-applied video sig-
nal via pins 30 to 32. With 0 V at pin 33, the RGB outputs
will supply the internal video signal, and at a 1 V input

level,
the RGB outputs are switched to the external video signal.
Bandwidth is 0 to 4 MHz, and input impedance 1 KQ mini-
mum.
Pin 34 - Beam Current Limiter Input
The diagram of pin 34 is shown in Fig. 25. The input voltage
may be between +5 V and 0 V. The input impedance is 100
kQ. The function of pin 34 is described in section 1.6.
Pin 35 - Composite Video Signal Input 1
To fully drive the video A/D converter the following ampli-
tudes are required at pin 35: +5 V = sync pulse top level,
all bits low; +7 V = peak white, all bits high. Fig. 24 shows
the configuration of pin 35.
Pin 36 - Undelayed Horizontal Blanking and Color Key
Pulse Input
The circuitry of this pin is shown in Fig. 23. Pin 36 receives
the combined undelayed horizontal blanking and color key
pulse which are “sandcastled” and are supplied by pin 19
of the DPU 2553 Deflection Processor. During the undelay-
ed horizontal blanking pulse, the input amplifiers’ gain is
doubled, and the bit enlargement circuit is also switched
by this pulse, and the counter for the data transmission
gap started. The color key pulse is used for clamping the
RGB inputs pins 30 to 32.
Pin 37 - Composite Video Signal Input 2
This pin has the same function and properties as pin 35,
except the gain of the input amplifier which is twice the
gain as that of the amplifier at pin 35. This means an input
voltage range of +5 V to +6 V.
Pin 38 - Supply Voltage, +12 V »
The 12 V supply is needed for certain circuit parts to obtain
the required input or output voltage range, as the video in-
put and the RGB outputs (see Figs. 20 and 24).
Pin 39 - Vertical Blanking and Delayed Horizontal Blanking
Input
This pin receives the combined vertical blanking and delay-
ed horizontal blanking. pulse from pin 22 of the DPU 2553
Deflection Processor. Both pulses are “sandcastled” so
that only one connection is needed for the transfer of two
pulses. These two pulses are separated in the input circui-
try of the VCU 2133, and are used for blanking the picture
during vertical and horizontal flyback. Fig. 23 shows the cir-
cuitry of pin 39.
Pin 40 - Digital Ground, O
This pin is used as GND connection in conjunction with the
pins 2 to 8 and 10 to 21 which carry digital signals.DPU 2553, DPU 2554 Deflection Processors UNIT

Note: lf not otherwise designated, the pin numbers
mentioned refer to the 40-pin Dil package.

1. Introduction
These programmable VLSI circuits in n-channel mOS
technology carry out the deflection functions in digital
colorTV receivers based onthe DiGiT 2000 system and
are also suitable for text and D2~mAC application. The
three types are basically identical, but are modified ac-
cording to the intended application:

DPU 2553
normal-scan horizontal deflection, standard CTV re-
ceivers, also equipped with Teletext and D2-mAC fa-
cility
DPU 2554
double-scan horizontal deflection, for CTV receivers
equipped with double-frequency horizontal deflection
and double-~frequency vertical deflection for improved
picture quality. At power-up, this version starts with
double horizontal frequency.

1.1. General Description
The DPU 2553/54 Deflection Processors contain the fol-
lowing circuit functions on one single silicon chip:
- video clamping
- horizontal and vertical sync separation
~ horizontal synchronization
- normal horizontal deflection
-east-west correction, also for flat-screen picture
tubes
- vertical synchronization
- normal vertical deflection
~ sawtooth generation
-text display mode with increased deflection frequen-
cies (18.7 kHz horizontal and 60 Hz vertical)
- D2-mAC operation mode

and for DPU 2554 only:
- double-scan horizontal deflection
- normal and double-scan vertical deflection
ln this data sheet, all information given for double~scan
mode is available with the DPU 2554 only. Type DPU
2553 starts the horizontal deflection with 15.5 kHz ac-
cording to the normal TV standard, whereas type DPU
2554 starts with 31 kHz according to the double-scan
system.
The following characteristics are programmable:
~ selection ofthe TV standard (PAL, D2-mAC or NTSC)
- selection ofthe deflection standard (Teletext, horizon-
tal and vertical double-scan, and normal scan)
- filter time»constant for horizontal synchronization
- vertical amplitude, S correction, and vertical position
for in-line, flat-screen and Trinitron picture tubes
- east-west parabola, horizontal width, and trapezoidal
correction for in-line, flat-screen and Trinitron picture
tubes
- switchover characteristics between the different syn-
chronization modes
~characteristic of the synchronism detector for PLL
switching and muting

1.2. Environment
Fig. 1-1 showsthe simplified block diagram ofthe video
and deflection section of a digital TV receiver based on
the DIGIT 2000 system. The analog video signal derived
from the video detector is digitized in the VCU 2133,
VCU 2134 or VCU 2136 Video Codec and supplied in a
parallel 7 bit Gray code. This digital video signal is fed to
the video section (PVPU, CVPU, SPU and DmA) and to
the DPU 2553/54 Deflection Processorwhich carries out
all functions required in conjunction with deflection, from
sync separation to the control of the deflection power
stages, as described in this data sheet.




3. Functional Description
3.1. Block Diagram
The DPU 2553 and DPU 2554 Deflection Processors
perform all tasks associated with deflection in TV sets;
- sync separation
- generation and synchronization of the horizontal and
the vertical deflection frequencies
-the various eastevvest corrections
- vertical savvtooth generation including S correction
as described hereafter. The DPU communicates, viathe
bidirectional serial lm bus, with the CCU 2050 or CCU
2070 Central Control Unit and, via this bus, is supplied
with the picture-correction alignment information stored
in the mDA 2062 EEPROM during set production, vvhen
the set is turned on. The DPU is normally clocked with
a trapezoidal 17.734 mHz (PAL or SECAm), or 14.3 mhz
(NTSC) or 20.25 mHz (D2-mAC) clock signal supplied
by the mCU 2600 or mCU 2632 Clock Generator IC.

The functional diagram of the DPU is shovvn in Fig. 3-1.
3.2. The Video Clamping Circuit and the Sync Pulse
Separation Circuit

The digitized composite video signal delivered as a 7»bit
parallel signal by the VCU 2133, VCU 2134 or VCU 2136
Video Codec is first noise-filtered by a 1 mHz digital lovv-
pass filter and, to improve the noise immunity ofthe
clamping circuit, is additionally filtered by a 0.2 mHz low-
pass filter before being routed to the minimum and back
porch level detectors (Fig. 3-3).
The DPU has tvvo different clamping outputs, no. 1 and
No. 2, one of vvhich supplies the required clamping
pulses to the video input of the VCU as shovvn in Fig.
3-1. The following values forthe clamping circuit apply
for Video Amp. l. since the gain of Video Amp. ll istwice
th at of Video Amp l, all clamping and signal levels of Vid-
eo Amp ll are halt those of Video Amp l referred to +5 V.
Afterthe TV set is switched on,thevideo clamping circuit
first of all ensures by means of horizontal-frequency
current pulses from the clamping output of the DPU to
the coupling capacitor of the analog composite video
signal, that the video signal atthe VCU’s input is optimal-
ly biased for the operation range of the A/D converter of
5 to 7 V. For this, the sync top level is digitally measured
and set to a constant level of 5.125 V by these current
pulses. The horizontal and vertical sync pulses are novv
separated by a fixed separation level of 5.250 V so that
the horizontal synchronization can lock to the correct
phase (see section 3.3. and Figs. 3-2 and 3-3).
vvith the color key pulse which is now present in syn-
chronism with the composite video signal, the video
clamping circuit measures the DC voltage level of the
porch and by means of the pulses from pin 21 (or pin4),
sets the DC level ofthe porch at a constant 5.5 V (5.25 V
for Video Amp ll). This level is also the reference black
to Video Processorffeletext Processor, D2-MAC Processor tc.


level for the PVPU 2204 or CvPU 2270 Video Proces-
sors.
When horizontal synchronization is achieved, the slice
level for the sync pulses is set to 50 % of the sync pulse
amplitude by averaging sync top and black level. This
ensures optimum pulse separation, even with small
sync pulse amplitudes (see application notes, section
4).


3.3. Horizontal Synchronization
Two operating modes are provided for in horizontal syn-
chronization. The choice of mode depends on whether
or not the Tv station is transmitting a standard PAL or
NTSC signal, in which there is a fixed ratio between color
subcarrier frequency and horizontal frequency. ln the
first case we speak of “color-locked” operation and in
the second case of “non-color-locked” operation (e.g.
black-and-white programs). Switching between thetwo
modes is performed automatically by the standard sig-
nal detector.


3.3.1. Non-Color-Locked Operation
ln the non»locked mode,which is needed in the situation
where there is no standard fixed ratio between the color
subcarrier frequency and the horizontal frequency ofthe
transmitter, the horizontal frequency is produced by subdemding the clock frequency (1 7.7 mHz for PAL and SECAM, 14.3
mHz for NTSC) in the programmable fre-
quency dmder (Fig. 3-4) until the correct horizontal
frequency is obtained. The correct adjustment of fre-
quency and phase is ensured by phase comparator l.
This determines the frequency and phase deviation by
means of a digital phase comparison between the sepa-
rated horizontal sync pulses and the output signal of the
programmable dmder and corrects the dmder accordingly. For
optimum adjustment of phase iitter, capture
behavior and transient response of the horizontal PLL
circuit, the measured phase deviation is filtered in a digi-
lowpass filter (PLL phase filter). ln the case of non-
OZMH synchronized horizontal PLL, this filter is set to
wideband PLL response with a pull-in range of 1800 Hz. if the
- sync sync PLL circuit is locked, the PLL filter is
automatically switched to narrow-band response by an internal
synchronism detector in order to limit the phase jitter to a
minimum, even in the case of weak and noisy signals.

A calculator circuit in phase comparator , which analyzes the
edges of the horizontal sync pulses, increases
the resolution of the phase measurement from 56 ns at
Fig. 3-3: Principle ofvideo clamping and pulse separa- 17.7

mHz clock frequency to approx. 6 ns, or from 70 ns
NON at 14.3 MHz clock frequency to approx. 2.2 ns.



The various key and gating pulses such as the color key
pulse (tKe(,), the normal-scan (1 H) and double-scan
(2H) horizontal blanking pulse (tAZ(/) and the 1 H hori-
zontal undelayed gating pulse (t/(Z) are derived from the
output signals ofthe programmable dmder and an addi-
tional counter forthe2H signals and the 1 H and 2H skew
data output. These pulses retain a fixed phase position
with respect to the 1 H inputvideo signal andthe double-
scan output video signal from the CvPU 2270 Video Pro-
cessor
Forthe purpose of equalizing phase changes in the hori-
zontal output stage due to switching response toler-
ances or video influence, a second phase control loop
is used which generates the horizontal output pulse at
pin 31 to drivethe horizontal output stage. ln phase com-
parator li (Fig. 3~4), the phase difference between the
output signal of the programmable dmder and the lead-
ing edge (or the center) of the horizontal flyback pulse
(pin 23) is measured by means of a balanced gate delay
line. The deviation from the desired phase difference is
used as an input to an adder. ln this, the information on
the horizontal frequency derived from phase com-
parator l is added to the phase deviation originating form
phase comparator ll. The result of this addition controls
a digital on-chip sinewave generator (about 1 mHz)
which acts as a phase shifter with a phase resolution of
1/128 of one main clock period m_
By means of control loop ll the horizontal output pulse
(pin 31) is shifted such that the horizontal flyback pulse
(pin 23) acquiresthe desired phase position with respect
to the output signal of the programmable dmder which,
in turn, due to phase comparator l, retains a fixed phase
position with respect to the video signal. The horizontal
output pulse itself is generated by dmding the frequency
ofthe 1 mHz sinewave oscillator by a fixed ratio of 64 in
the case of norm al scan and of 32 in the case of double-
scan operation.


3.3.2. Color-Locked Operation
When in the color~locked operating mode, after the
phase position has been set in the non-color-locked
mode, the programmable dmder is set to the standard
dmsion ratio (1135:1 for PAL, 91O:1 for NTSC) and
phase comparator is disconnected so that interfering
pulses and noise cannot influence the horizontal deflec-
tion. Because phase comparator ll is still connected,
phase errors ofthe horizontal output stage are also cor-
rected in the color»locKed operating mode. The stan-
dard signal detector is so designed that it only switches
to color-locked operation when the ratio between color
subcarrier frequency and horizontal frequency deviates
no more than 1O'7 from the standard dmsion ratio. To
ascertain this requires about 8 s (NTSC). Switching off
color-locked operation takes place automatically, in the
_ case of a change of program for example, within approx-
imately 67 ms (e.g. two NTSC fields, 60 Hz).


3.3.3. Skew Data Output and Field Number Informa-
tion
with non-standard input signals, the TPU 2735 or TPU
2740 Teletext Processor produce a phase error vvith re-
spect to the deflection phase.
The DPU generates a digital data stream (skevv data,
pin 7 ofthe DPU), which informs the PSP and TPU on
the amount of phase delay (given in 2.2 ns increments)
used in the DPU for the 1H and 2h output pulse com-
pared With the Fm main clock signal of 17.7 mHz (PAL
or SECAm) or 14.3 mhz (NTSC), see also Figs. 3-6 to
3-8. The skew data is used by the PSP and by the TPU
to adjust the double-scan video signal to the 1 H and 2H
phase of the horizontal deflection to correct these phase
errors.
For the vmC processor the skew data contains three additional

bits for information about frame number, 1 V
sync and 2 V sync start.


3.3.4. Synchronism Detector for PLL and Muting
Signal
To evaluate locking ofthe horizontal PLL and condition
of the signal, the DPU’s HSP high-speed processor
(Fig. 3~1) receives two items of information from the hor-
izontal PLL circuit (see Fig. 3-11).
a) the overall pulsevvidth of the separated sync pulses
during a 6.7 us phase window centered to the horizontal
sync pulse (value A in Fig. 3-11).
b) the overall pulsevvidth of the separated sync pulse
during one horizontal line but outside the phase window
(value B in Fig. 3-11).
Based on a) and b) and using the selectable coefficients
KS1 and KS2 and a digital lovi/pass filter, the HSP pro-
cessor evaluates an 8-bit item of information “SD” (see
Fig. 3-12). By means of a comparator and a selectable
level SLP, the switching threshold for the PLL signal
“UN” is generated. UN indicates Whether the PLL is in
the synchronous or in the asynchronous state.
To produce a muting signal in the CCU, the data SD can
be read by the CCU. The range ot SD extends from O
(asynchronous) to +127 (synchronous). Typical values
torthe comparator levels and their hysteresis B1 = 30/20
and for muting 40/30 (see also HSP Bam address Table
5-6).



DPU 2553, DPU 2554

3.4. Start Oscillator and Protection Circuit
To protect the horizontal output stage of the TV set dur-
ing changing the standard and for using the DPU as a
low power start oscillator, an additional oscillator is pro-
vided on-chip (Fig. 3-4), with the output connected to
pin 31. This oscillator is controlled by a 4 mHz signalin-
dependent trom the Fm main clock produced by the
MCU 2600 or mCU 2632 Clock Generator IC and is pow-
ered by a separate supply connected to pin 35. Thefunc-
tion ofthis circuitry depends on the external standard se-
lection input pin 33 and on the start oscillator select input
pin 36, as described in Table 3-3. Using the protection
circuit as a start oscillator, the following operation modes
are available (see Table 3-3).
With pin 33 open-circuit, pin 36 at high potential (con-
nected to pin 35) and a 4 mHz clock applied to pin 34,
the protection circuit acts as a start oscillator. This pro-
duces a constant-frequency horizontal output pulse of
15.5 kHz in the case of DPU 2553, and of 31 khz in the
case of DPU 2554 while the Beset input pin 5 is at low
potential. The pulsewidth is 30 us with DPU 2553, and
16 us with DPU 2554. main clock at pin 2 or main power
supplies at pins 8, 32 and 40 are not required for this start
oscillator After the main power supply is stabilized and
the main clock generator has started, the reset input pin
5 must be switched to the high state. As long as the start
values from the CCU are invalid, the start oscillator will
continuously supply the output pulses of constant fre-
quency to pin 31 _ By means of the start values given by
the CCU via the lm bus, the register FL must be set to
zero to enable the stan oscillator to be triggered by the
horizontal PLL circuit. After that, the output frequency
and phase are controlled by the horizontal PLL only.
It the external standard selection input pin 33 is con-
nected to ground or to +5 V, the start oscillator is
switched off as soon as it ls in phase with PLL circuit. Pin
33to ground selects PAL or SECAm standard (17.7 mHz
main clock), and pin 33 to +5 V selects NTSC standard
(14.3 MHz main clock). After the main power supplies to
pins 8, 32 and 40 are stabilized, the start oscillator can
be used as a separate horizontal oscillator with a con-
stant frequency of 15.525 khz. For this option, pin 33
must be unconnected. By means ofthe lm bus register
SC the start oscillator can be switched on (SC = 0) or oft
(SC = 1). Setting SC =1 is recommended.
By means of pin 29 (horizontal output polarity selectin-
put and start oscillator pulsewidth select input), the out-
put pulsewidth and polarity ofthe start oscillator and pro-
tection circuit can be hardware-selected. Pin 29 at low
potential gives 30 us for DPU 2553 and 16 us for DPU
2554,with positive output pulses. Pin 29 at high potential
gives 36 us for DPU 2553 and 18 its for DPU 2554, with
negative output pulses. Both apply forthetime period in
which no start values are valid from the CCU. If pin 29
is intended to be in the high state, it must be connected
to pin 35 (standby power). Pin 29 must be connected to
ground or to +5 V in both cases.
Table 3-3: Operation modes ofthe start oscillator and
protection circuit


Operation Mode Pins
33 34 35 36
Horizontal output stage protected not connected 4 mHz Clock at

+5 V at ground
during main clock frequency changing
(for PAL and NTSC)
Horizontal output stage protected not connected 4 MHz Clock +5

V with connected to
and start oscillator function start oscilla- pin 35
(for PAL and NTSC) tor supply
Only start oscillator function with at +5 V 4 mHz Clock +5 V

with connected to
NTSC standard after Beset start oscilla- pin 35
tor supply
Only start oscillator function with at ground 4 mHz Clock +5 V

with connected to
PAL or SECAM standard after Beset start oscilla~ pin 35
5 tor supply
_ with 17.7 mHz clock at ground at ground at +5 V at ground
without protection.



3.5. Blanking and Color Key Pulses

Pin 19 supplies a combination ofthe color key pulse and
the undelayed horizontal blanking pulse in the form of a
three-level pulse as shown in Fig. 3-13. The high level
(4 V min.) and the low level (0.4 V max.) are controlled
by the DPU. During the low time of the undelayed hori-
zontal blanking pulse, pin 19 of the DPU i sin the high--
impedance mode and the output level at pin 19 is set to
2.8 V by the VCU.
At pin 22, the delayed horizontal blanking pulse in com-
bination with the vertical blanking pulse is available as
athree-level pulse as shown in Fig. 3-13. Output pin 22
is in high-impedance mode during the delayed horizon-
tal blanking pulse.
ln double-scan operation mode (DPU 2554), pin 22 sup-
plies the double-scan (2H) horizontal blanking pulse in-
stead ofthe 1H blanking pulse (DPU 2553). ln text dis-
play mode with increased deflection frequencies (see
section 1.), pin 22 ofthe respective DPU (DPU 2553, as
defined by register ZN) delivers the horizontal blanking
pulse with 18.7 kHz and the vertical blanking pulse with
60 Hz according to the display. At pin 24 the undelayed
horizontal blanking pulse is output.
normally,pin3suppliesthe samevertical blanking pulse
as pin 22. However, with“DVS” = 1, pin 3 will be in the
single-scan mode also with double-scan operation of
the system. The pulsewidth of the single-scan vertical
blanking pulse at pin 3 will be the same as.that of the
double-scan vertical blanking pulse at pin 22. The out-
put pulse of pin 3 is only valid if the COU register “VBE”
is set to 1 . The default value is set to 0 (high-impedance
state of pin 3).

Fig. 3-13: Shape of the output pulses at pins 19 and 22
*) The output level is externally defined
3.6. Output for Switching the Horizontal Power
Stage Between 15.6 kHz (PAL/NTSC) and 18 kHz
(Text Display)
This output (pin 37) is designed as a tristate output. High
levels (4 V mln.) and low levels (0.4 V max.) are con-
trolled bythe DPU. During high-impedance state an ex-
ternal resistor network defines the output level,
For changing the horizontal frequency from 15 kHz to
18 kHz, the following sequence of output levels is
derived at pin 37 (see Fig. 3-14).
After register ZN is set from ZN = 2 (15 kHz) to ZN = 0
(18 kHz) by the CCU, pin 37 is switched from High level
to high-impedance state synchronously with the fre-
quency change at pin 31. Following a delay of 20ms, pin
37 is set to Low level and remains in this state forthetime
the horizontal frequency remains 18 kHz (with ZN == 0).
This 20 ms delay is required for switching-over the hori-
zontal power stage.
To change the horizontal frequency in the opposite di-
rection, from 18 kHz to 15.6 kHz, the sequence de-
scribed is reversed.


3.7. Text Display Mode with Increased Deflection
Frequencies
As already mentioned, the DPU 2553 provides the fea-
ture of increased deflection frequencies for text display
for improved picture quality in this mode of operation. To
achieve this, the processor acting as deflection proces-
sor has its register Zn set to 0. The horizontal output fre-
quency at pin 31 is then switched to a frequency of
18746.802 Hz which is generated by dmding the Fm
main clock frequency by 946 i 46. The horizontal PLL is
then able to synchronize to an external composite sync
signal offH = 18.746 kHzi 46. The horizontal PLL isthen
able to synchronizeto an external composite sync signal
of fH = 18.746 kHzi 5 % and f\, = 60 Hz i 10 % and can
be set to an independent horizontal and vertical sync
generator by setting register VE = 1 and register VB = 0.
That means a constant dmder of 946 for horizontal fre-
quency and constant 312 lines per frame.

The DPU working in this mode supplies the TPU 2740
Teletext Processor or the respective Viewdata Proces-
sor with the 18.7 kHz horizontal blanking pulses form pin
24 and the 60 Hz vertical blanking pulses form pin 22
(see Fig. 3-8).
To be able to receive and store data from an IF video sig-
nal at the same time, the Teletext or Viewdata Processor
requires horizontal and vertical sync pulses from this IF
signal. Therefore, the second DPU provides video
clamping and sync separation forthe external signal and
supplies the horizontal sync pulses (pin 24) and the ver-
tical sync pulses (pin 22) to the Teletext or viewdata Pro-
cessor. For this, the second DPU is set to the PAL stan-
dard by register ZN = 2, and the clamping pulses of the
other DPU are disabled by CLD = 1.
To change the output frequency ofthe DPU acting as de-
flection processor from 18.7 kHz to 15.6 kHz, the control
switch output pin 37 prepares the horizontal output
stage for 15.6 khz operation (pin 37 is in the high-impe-
dance state) beforethe DPU changesthe horizontal out-
put frequencyto 15.6 kHz, after a minimum delay of one
vertical period. Switching the horizontal deflection fre-
quency from 15.6 kHzto 18.7 kHz is done in the reverse
sequence. Firstly, the horizontaloutput frequency of pin
31 is switched to 1 8.7 khz, and after a delay of one verti-
cal period, pin 37 is set low.
3.8. D2-MAC Operation Mode
When receiving Tv signals having the D2-mAC stan-
dard (direct satellite reception), register ZN is set to 3.
The programmable dmder is set to a dmsion ratio of
1296 i48 to generate a horizontal frequency of 15.625
khz with the clock rate of 20.25 mHz used in the
D2-mAC standard. ln this operation mode, pin 6 acts as
input forthe composite sync signal supplied by the DmA
2271 D2-mAC Decoder. The DPU is synchronized to
this sync signal, and after locking-in (status register
UN = 0), the CCU switches the DPU to a clock-locked
mode between clock signal and horizontal frequency
(fm main
clock by 1024, during the vertical sync signal separated
from the received video signal. To use an 8-bit register,
the result of the count is dmded by 2 and given to the
DPU status register. ln the CCU, the vertical frequency
can be evaluated using the following equation:

fv I __lL1’_l\
1024- vP- 2
with
fm), = 17.734475 mHz with PAL and SECAm
fq,M =14.31818 mHz with NTSC
rw = 2o_25 MHZ with D2-mAc
VP = status value, read from DPU.

The interlace control output pin 39 supplies a 25 Hz (for
PAL and SECAm) or 80 Hz (for NTSC) signal for control-
ling an external interlace-off switch, which is required
with A.C.-coupled vertical output stages, becausethese
are not able to handle the internal interlace-off proce-
dure using register “ZS”.
For operation with the vmC Processor the DPU 2554
hasthree interlace control modes in double vertical scan
mode (DVS = 1). These options can be selected with the
register “IOP” and can be used together with the control
output pin 39 only. This output has to be connected to the
vertical output stage, so that the vertical phase can be
shifted by 16 us (or 32 us with DPU 2553).













Chassis DIGI BE-2 110° FST. Modular Parts. Digital Sound Modul: SEL Stereo Modul DIGI. B Viewing of Digital Audio - Sound Processing: ADC 2310 (ITT ADC2310) and APU 2470 (ITT APU247

Chassis DIGI BE-2 110° FST. Modular Parts. Digital Sound Modul: SEL Stereo Modul DIGI. B
Viewing of Digital Audio - Sound Processing: ADC 2310 (ITT ADC2310) and APU 2470 (ITT APU2470)





Stereo Modul DIGI. BE 2/3
Plug connectors ST 23 and ST 25 constitute the AF signal inputs
for the TV I and TV ll signals coming from the RF module. Each
of these signals is then passed (via 2 impedance converters
and 1 notch filter for suppressing interference frequency
components) to Pins 4 and 5 ofthe audio signal converter ADC
2310 E, IC 3101.
The stereo pilot carrier is selectively decoupled from sound
channel TV ll and fed separately to Pin 8 for recognition of the
station operating mode.
The digitized output signals are then available as pulse-rate-
modulated signals PDM I and PDM ll at Pins 10 and 11. Digital
signal processing is then performed completely in APU 2470,
the audio processor IC 3201, to which of course all control
functions controlled via the IM Bus belong. At IC outputs 22 and
23, the processed signals are outputted as pulse-width-
modulated information, so that they can be reconverted into
their original analog form by simple integration (RC element).
The downstream lC’s TDA 2040 H (3401/3501) supply power
amplification for feed to the loudspeakers. A second pair of
analog outputs, Pins 19, 20 ofthe APU, followed by an
integrated amplifier stage, IC 3301 , TDA 2822 M, serves for
connection of earphones or a stereo system via cinch sockets.
This output is likewise controllable, and also suitable for the
listening to the alternative sound channel in dual-channel sound
mode. Pins 21 and 24 at ADC 2310 E are available for coupling
a second dual-channel analog sound source. The signals
concerned come from the SCART socket (PPT), and in sets with
picture-in-picture function are passed via the PIP decoder. In
the opposite direction, the ADC 2310 E supplies at Pins 22 and
23 analog output signals to the SCART socket, e.g. as required
for recording audio signals. All switch-over functions necessary
in this area are executed inside the IC and controlled via the IM
Bus. Detection of the station transmission mode (mono, stereo,
dual-sound) is performed in the lC’s in exactly the same way as
the corresponding switch-over to the operating mode being
transmitted. A muting stage in each of the two audio channels
(T 3401 and T 3501) provides an audio muting function by short-
circuiting the signal input Pin 1 at the power output stage lC’s.
This function can be controlled in two different ways:
1. Via ST 33 at the moment when the set is switched on, in
order to suppress the switch-on click.
2. From Pin 16 of ADC 2310 E, e.g. for noise suppression,
when no TV signal is being received.
ln the first case, the L signal, which is passed as a switch-on
signal from Pin 5 of the CCU via R 1505 to ST 33 of Stereo
Module B, and thus via R 3511 to the base of T 3510, will switch
the transistor to on-state and thus connect the muting line to
12 V. Since in this case the two switching transistors T 4301 and
T 3501 also become conducting, the signal inputs to the audio
output stages are then short-circuited. The second muting
branch from Pin 16 of ADC 2310 E is software-controlled, and
receives the switch-off information from the CCU via the IM
Bus.
The stereo module also houses the SCART socket (PPT).



Tuner HF-MOD.OS.OPT.FS.5,6 MHz RF-IF Module Os. 5827 02 38
































































Tuner HF-MOD.OS.OPT.FS.5,6 MHz RF-IF Module Os. 5829 01 18 Details:
TDA5030A OSC + Mixer
TDA2556 Stereo IF AMP - Demod
TDA4427A VIF VIDEO IF AMPL - Demod
U664B Prescaler

OFW G 3251 SAW Filter.










TDA2556 QUASI-SPLIT-SOUND CIRCUIT WITH DUAL SOUND DEMODULATORS

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The TDA2556 is a monolithic integrated circuit for quasi-split-sound processing, including two FM
demodulators, for two carrier stereo TV receivers and VTR.
Features
First IF (vision carrier plus sound carrier).
0 3 stage gain controlled IF amplifier
0 AGC circuit
0 Reference amplifier and limiter amplifier for vision carrier (V.C.) processing
0 Linear multiplier for quadrature demodulation
Second IF (two separate channels for both FM sound signals).
0 4-stage-limiting amplifier
0 Ouadrature demodulator
0 AF amplifier with de-emphasis
O Output buffer
0 Muting for one or both AF outputs


TDA4427 VIDEO IF CIRCUIT

Technology: Bipolar
Features:
o Very high input sensitivity
0 Very low intermodulation
products
0 Minimum differential error
o Constant input impedance
independent of AGC
o Fixed video output, voltage
with small tolerance range
o Negative video signal hardly
affected by supply voltage
variations
o Very few external components
TDA 4427 A: For ceramic sound traps
Extreme fast AGC action - gating
largely independent of pulse shape
and amplitude
Positive as well as neg. video signal
available from low-impedance outputs
Positive or negative going gating pulse
Large AFC output current swing
(push-pull output)
Switchable AFC
Connecting and basic circuitry compa-
tible to the TELEFUNKEN electronic
video IF type programme - permits
building block system for video IF
module.


ITT NOKIA 6381 PIP DIGIVISION  BLACKLINE  CHASSIS  DIGI BE-2 Television receiver with multipicture display PIP DIGIVISION ITT DIGIT2000:
CHASSIS DIGI BE-2 PIP DECODER UNIT 6911 29 82 PIP MODUL BE2:The output signal of one tuner or of other TV signal sources in the base band are digitized and stored in a part of a memory. After automatic switching over to another TV-channel, this new signal is stored in another part of the memory and so on. The whole memory is then read out continuously and produces the displayed multipicture on the screen.

What is claimed is:

1. A television receiver in which a single video signal can be reproduced simultaneously in at least two subareas of a picture screen, or at least two different video signals can each be reproduced in different subareas, with each subarea displaying either a reduced size picture or part of the picture supplied by a video signal source, said receiver comprising:
a digital signal processing circuit for receiving signals from a plurality of video signal sources and converting said signals to picture data comprising luminance and color data for each picture element;
a random access memory for storing picture data for an entire screen;
a control unit for controlling the writing of picture data into an area of said random access memory, the area being selected depending on how many of said different video signals are to be reproduced on said picture screen and also depending upon an order by which lines of picture data are read from said random access memory, only selected lines being transferred from said video signal sources into associated areas of said random access memory;
a digital to analog converter which receives picture data read from said random access memory and which generates therefrom analog red, green and blue signals;
line counters, each having its respective count outputs coupled to said control unit, said line counters each being associated with one of said video signal sources and each being advanced between received periods such that at the beginning of a receive period it has a count corresponding to the line being received from the respective video signal source;
a sensing circuit for sensing horizontal and vertical synchronizing pulses received in receive periods of said video signal sources to synchronize said line counters; and
a signal source counter connected to said control unit that causes said control unit to periodically switch between selected ones of said video signal sources.


2. A television receiver in accordance with claim 1, comprising:
a single radio-frequency receiver receiving at least two television channels originating as video signals from a single video-signal source
said radio frequency receiver being switched by said control unit to a frequency range of a corresponding television channel for the duration of one receive period which starts with the beginning of a complete scanning line, lasts at least one line period, and, if all receive periods of a switching cycle are approximately equally long, does not exceed the duration of a received field.


3. A television receiver in accordance with claim 1, wherein: a field stored in a memory area is composed of parts originating at a receiving end from odd-and even-numbered fields the size and the arrangement of the various parts of the field changing at most only slightly within a few multipicture display periods.

4. A television receiver in accordance with claim 1, wherein said control unit causes at least one video signal to be displayed in a selected subarea of the screen to be skipped and displays a still picture in said selected subarea.

5. A television receiver in accordance with claim 1, wherein:
a frequency at which switching of video signals of at least one subarea is adjustable to obtain a lower frame frequency.


6. A television receiver in accordance with claim 1 wherein:
said random access memory comprises at least one DRAM having a common bidirectional data bus and a common address bus for providing write addresses and read addresses to said DRAM to select a storage location within said DRAM, and at least one first FIFO (first-in first-out) buffer and one second FIFO buffer;
said bidirectional data bus being connected to a data output of said first FIFO buffer and to a data input of second FIFO buffer;
said first FIFO buffer having a data input supplied with picture data, and having clock input receiving a write signal;
said second FIFO buffer having an output which delivers picture data which is read out under control of a read signal and wherein
during writing into and reading from said DRAM, data is transferred block by block over said bidirectional data bus, respective write addresses and read addresses are applied over said common address bus, and a read/write signal is supplied to said DRAM.


7. A television receiver in accordance with claim 1, wherein said plurality of video signal sources indicate at least one television channel.

Description:

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
The invention pertains to a television receiver. More specifically, the present invention pertains to a television receiver with a multipicture display.
In a television receiver with multipicture display a single video signal can be reproduced simultaneously in two or more subareas, or two or more different video signals can each be reproduced in associated subareas. Each of the subareas can display either a reduced-size picture or a part of the picture supplied by a video-signal source. A digital signal-processing circuit converts the signals from the video-signal source to picture data consisting of luminance and color data for each picture element. A random-access memory (RAM) holds the picture data of the entire screen. A control unit controls the writing of the picture data into an area of the RAM depending on the number of video signals to be reproduced and the line-by-line readout, with only selected lines being transferred from the video-signal source into the associated memory area. A digital-to-analg converted which is furnished with the picture data read from the RAM delivers the analog red, green, and blue signals.
A television receiver of this kind is described in a printed publication by Intermetall Semiconductors ITT, "VMC Video Memory Controller", August 1985.
That television receiver circuit uses random-access memories (RAMs). For the multipicture display, the screen is divided into up to nine equal-sized subareas which each contain a part of a picture of normal size or a complete picture of reduced size. In that mode, successively produced "snapshots" of up to nine different video signals can be displayed simultaneously. The switching of the video signals takes place manually.
Offenlegungsschrift DE No. 24 13 839 A1 describes a circuit for a television receiver with a facility for simultaneously reproducing two or more programs. In a part of the picture of the directly received main program, the secondary program, received with a single switchable tuner, is stored in a memory with a reduced number of lines and is called up line by line when the electron beam of the picture tube sweeps across the predetermined part of the picture. The disadvantage of this method lies in horizontal grating-like interference in the main picture which results from the fact that lines of the main picture are missing at regular intervals when the tuner has been switched to the secondary program, and which can only be incompletely compensated.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
Accordingly, the problem to be solved by the invention is to provide a circuit of the above kind with which the grating-like interference caused during reproduction using the above-described single-tuner switching method is eliminated.
The output signal of one tuner or of other TV signal sources in the base band are digitize and stored in part of a memory. After automatic switching over to another TV-channel, this new signal is stored in another part of the memory and so on.
The whole memory is then read out continuously and produces the multi-picture display on the screen. Another advantage consists in the fact that, for the construction of the whole screen picture, all picture data are withdrawn from the RAM, so that the usual picture-improvement techniques can be applied. By fast readout from the memory rows, the displayed picture is freed from both line flicker and background flicker.
By changing the sampling rates of the different video-signal sources, it is readily possible to monitor the latter, nearly up to the still picture. In an arrangement in accordance with the invention digital picture processing and digital storage are used thereby permitting the circuit to process analog or digital signals,from video signal sources.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWING
The invention will be better understood from a reading of the following detailed description in conjunction with the drawing in which:
FIG. 1 is a block diagram of a simplified embodiment of a television receiver with multipicture display in accordance with the invention;
FIG. 2 illustrates the division of the screen in the multipicture display mode;
FIG. 3a shows the sampling scheme for two television channels each consisting of an alternating sequence of even-and odd-numbered fields;
FIG. 3b shows schematically the division of the RAM if the sampling scheme of FIG. 3a is used,and
FIG. 4 is a block diagram of RAM.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
In the simplified block diagram of FIG. 1, the video-signal sources suitable for the multipicture display are as follows: q1 is the respective signal of a television channel k1 . . . kn which is the output signal of the inermediate-frequency amplifier 112, which follows the radio-frequency receiver 114, that contains a single tuner and is supplied with the antenna signal hf; q2 is the output signal of 120 the video recorder; q3 is the output signal of 124 the video camera; q4 and q5 are the output signal of two further terminals (not shown) to which a source such as computer or a videotext set can be connected; q6 is the output signal of the teletext decoder 132. The video-signal q1 can provide alternately different television channels k1, k2 . . . if the tuner is switched in a suitable manner.
The video-signals q1 . . . q5 are connected to the input sockets of the analog signal switch 134. The output of the teletext decoder 132 is connected internally to one input of the data switch 136. The signal switch 134 and the data switch 136 are controlled via the control bus 138, which carries the control data sd derived by the control unit 142.
The selection of the different television channels contained in the antenna signal hf takes place in the radio-frequency receiver 114, which contains a frequency-programable tuner. Control data sd which designates the respective television channel to be selected is fed to the tuner over the control bus 138 and prepares the tuner for switching. The actual and very fast switching of the tuner is effected by the tuner switching signal ts, which is produced by the control unit 142. A corresponding switching signal, the switching signal sus, is applied to the signal switch, and an additional signal from the control unit, the digital switching signal dss, controls the switching of the data switch 136. With switching signals ts, sus, and dss, accurate and fast switching is possible.
The composite color signal output f of the signal switch 134, is fed to the input of the digital signal-processing circuit 150. The latter delivers the picture data bd, consisting of the (R-Y) signal and the (B-Y) signal (R=red, B=blue, Y=luninance). The picture data bd from the digital signal processing circuit 150 and the picture data bd' from the teletext decoder 132 are fed respectively to two inputs of the data switch 136. The latter has two outputs a1, a2, which are switched by the control unit 142. In the normal mode, without multipicture display, the output signals of the data switch 136 are transferred from the output a1 directly to the digital-to-analog converter 162, which also contains the R-G-B matrix and delivers the analog R, G, and B signals (G=green), which are fed to the output amplifiers and then to the individual color cathodes of the picture tube. In the multipicture display mode, the digital-to-analog converter 162 is fed with the picture data br read from the RAMs, the latter being designed to have the capability of being written into and read from simultaneously.
The other output a2 of the data switch 136 feeds the RAM 164, which is divided into four areas 166, 168, 170, 172 in this embodiment. The division is only an imaginary or address-related division and is to illustrate a four-picture display. The simultaneous writing and reading of the picture data bd, bd' into and out of the RAM 164 is controlled by the control unit 142, which transfers addresses w and read addresses r over separate address buses. The control unit 142 also supplies the RAM 164 with the write signal tw and the read signal tr, which may differ in frequency. This depends on whether, in the multipicture display mode, the video-signal sources are to be presented reduced in size, as a section in the same picture size, or even as an enlarged section. In addition, the clock frequency depends on whether, during a multipicture display, the picture is to be flicker-free, because the individual television lines are then written on the screen at an increased scanning speed, which necessitates reading the individual lines from the RAM 164 at a correspondingly higher speed.
A further output signal of the digital signal-processing circuit 150, which corresponds to the digital composite color signal f', is fed to the teletext decoder 132 and the sensing circuit 182. The latter separates the horizontal synchronizing pulses and any vertical synchronizing pulses from the digital composite color signal f' in the respective receive cycle and feeds a line pulse h to one of the line counters 186 associated with the respective video-signal source or television channel. The contents of the selected one of the line counters 186 are fed to the control unit 142. The line counters 186 are advanced during the different receive periods so that, at the beginning of a receive period, the respective line counter has the count which corresponds to the line being received. This advance is controlled by the control unit 142. In this manner, line synchronism with the respective video-signal source or the television channel is achieved which is independent of whether the video-signal source or the television channel is connected to the RAM 164. Only with this exact synchronism is it possible to ensure that, despite the video-signal-source or television-channel switching, the corresponding scanning line is written at the correct location of the RAM 164 and that the beginning of this line is placed at the beginning of the respective memory-area row. A receive period thus starts with the beginning of a complete scanning line and continues at least for the duration of that line.
If the respective receive period contains a vertical synchronizing pulse, the sensing circuit 182 supplies the vertical pulse v to the respective one of the line counters 186 which uses it to synchronize the counting of the individual lines.
The control unit 142 is also suppied with the contents of the signal-source counter 190, which is advanced with the switching of the video signals. The signal-source counter 190 is a sort of ring counter whose number of states is equal to the number of video signals to be reproduced.
If either alternate even and odd-numbered fields or only like fields are to be tranferred into the respective memory area ss . . . , the signal-source counter 190 may be designed accordingly, e.g., by increasing the number of counter states to an even-or-odd-number value.
During the multipicture display, line flicker or background flicker can be eliminated by suitable techniques, as described in the above prior art. Jerky movements of the picture content in the case of video signals with moving picture content are unavoidable. However, this impairment is reduced by the reduced-size display of the video signals in subareas 192, 194, 196, 198 of the screen 200. However, the effect increases as the number of video signals contributing to the construction of the picture increases. It is therefore an advantage if the average receive periods of the video signals are not equal to each other but are individually adjustable. With this, a less important video-signal q3, which originates from a camera, or a less important channel k . . . can be switched to the signal switch 134 only at a very low repetition rate. The receive periods thus remaining vacant can be used for another video-signal source, which can then provide a nearly jerk-free picture. For this specific control, a signal-source counter 190 in connection with the control unit 142 is required. The signal-source counter 190 thus has its input connected to the control bus 138 and is supplied with a switching signal, here the switching signal sus, and its output is fed to the control unit 142.
The durations of the individual receive periods, which are normally about equally long within a switching cycle and do not exceed the duration of a received field, are changed by the individual switch over so that individual receive periods occur which may comprise more than one field. In exchange, receive periods for other video signals become shorter or even are skipped completely.
Between the digital signal-processing circuit 150 and the RAM 164 a filter circuit may be provided which compresses the picture data bd, whereby the size of the RAM 164 can be reduced.
Another advantage of such filter circuits is a horizontal and vertical interpolation of the selected scanning lines of the respective video signal, which permits improved picture reproduction in the subareas 192, 194, 196, 198 and horizontal structures occur in the respective video signal, these structures may be present or absent in the read-out picture data br as a result of the selection of the picture elements stored in the memory area 166, 168, 170, 172, thus interfering with the picture reproduction. The interpolation eliminates this interference, which may also appear as moire.
FIG. 2 shows a typical multipicture display on the screen 200 of a television set which is divided into four subareas 192, 194, 196, 198 in accordance with the embodiment of FIG. 1. In the first subarea 192 and the second subarea 194, pictures of two different television channels k1, k2 are shown. The third subarea 196 shows a videotext page as is delivered by the video-signal q6, while in the fourth subarea 198, the recorded signal of the video recorder 120 is being reproduced. In all four subareas, the images of the different video-signal sources are reduced in size.
In the display in the second subarea 194, the frame frequency can be reduced, for this area only serves to check when a particular program, e.g., a film, begins. The videotext page in the third subarea 196 can be stored as a still picture; the frame frequency is thus increased for the first and fourth subareas 192, 198.

FIG. 3a shows an embodiment of the sampling scheme of two television channels k1, k2 of a 625-line standard with 25 blanked lines per field. The respective fields h1, h2 are shown one above the other, with the odd-numbered field h1 containing the odd-numbered lines, and the even-numbered field h2 the even-numbered lines. The schematic course of the sampling of the two television channels k1, k2 is indicated by the meander line bd*, which runs between the two television channels k1, k2. The first memory area 166 is used for the first television channel k1, and the fourth memory area 172 for the second television channel k2. The receive period is 20 ms, after which the received televisions channel is switched to the other channel. The sampling beginnings with line 1 in the odd-numbered field h1 of the television channel k1, and lines 47 to 451 of this field are stored. Then, the television channel k2 is turned on, whose phase position is such that the 121st line of the odd-numbered field h1 can just be written in. This field h1 is stored until line 619 inclusive. During the retrace period, no storage takes place. Of the even-numbered field h2, the 46th to the 120th lines are then stored at the corresponding locations of the fourth memory area 172. Another switchover to the television channel k1 finds the line 452 in the even-numbered field h2, after which this field is written in until line 618 inclusive. During the retrace period, no storage takes place. The new odd-numbered field h1 is again written in with line 47, and the sampling process continues periodically in this manner.
For simplicity, in FIG. 3a, only the area between the line 46, 47 and 618, 619 has been included in the storage process. The memory area required for the video signal sources thus decreases by the retrace lines without picture information.
FIG. 3b shows schematically how the storage process of FIG. 3a takes place in the RAM 164. The first memory area 166 shows a stored line combination from the odd-numbered field h1 and the even-numbered field h2 of the first television channel k1. In the fourth memory area 172, the corresponding stored lines of the television channel k2 are shown, again a combination from the odd-numbered field h1 and the even-numbered field h2. The memory areas ss2, ss3 contain "old" picture data and are not involved in the above-described video-signals switching but may contain, for example, a previously taken "snapshot" or a still picture which is then presented as part of the multipicture display.
The sampling scheme of FIG. 3a is the associated memory content of FIG. 3b also show that the size and arrangement of the different parts of the picture which are stored in the individual memory areas 166, 168, 170, 172 change only slightly, if at all, within a few multipicture display periods. This results if the phases of the video signals involved drift past each other, so that the relative phase position of the fields h1, h2 of the video signals gradually changes.
Unlike the circuit described in Offenlegungsschrift DE No. 24 13 839, all video signals to be reproduced are first written into a memory area 166, 168, 170, 172 and then read out for display. No distinction is made between a main program and a secondary program. The respective picture reproduction in the subareas 192, 194, 196 and 198 corresponds to the picture data read from the respective memory areas 166, 168, 170, and 172. The switching and storage process has thus become highly variable in time, for the duration of the receive periods is variable within a wide range-from the duration of a line up to the duration of a field-without this resulting in a superposed interference pattern on the screen because of missing lines or missing line blocks. The more video signals are to be reproduced, the clearer the improvement over the method disclosed in the above Offenlegungsschrift, in which the number of missing lines in the main picture would increase intolerably if there were several secondary pictures. Therefore, that method is applicable in practice to a single secondary picture at best.
The RAM 162 shown in the schematic presentation of FIG. 1 is a "dual-port RAM" with separate read and write cycles, which has a data bus for the picture data to be stored, bd, or bd', a data bus 210 for the picture data read out, a data bus 212 for the write addresses, a data bus 214 for the read addresses, an input 216 for the write signal tw, and an input 218 for the read signal tr.
Direct realization of this arrangement with currently availably RAMs, particularly with the currently standardized and, therefore, less expensive dynamic RAMs (dynamic RAM=DRAM) is not possible because the above described function separation is not provided for.
With the specific "dual-port DRAM" MB 81461-12, the function separation is possible in a slightly modified form, for this commercially available memory module includes all separate functional units except a separate address bus. In addition, this dual-port DRAM permits fast reloading of stored data blocks from the actual memory area to an integrated buffer. From the latter, the stored picture data br for the multipicture display are then read strictly sequentially, so that the common address bus is free for the loading process during that time.
FIG. 4 shows a somewhat more sophisticated realization with two so-called first-in, first-out buffers (FIFO buffers) 230, 232, which, however, allows the use of standardized DRAMs 234 with a common address bus 236 and a common data bus 238. Such FIFO buffers 230, 232 (example of a commercially available type: TDC 1030) convert the bidirectional data bus 238 functionally into two isolated data busses for simultaneous write-in and readout of data.
The output of the first FIFO buffer 230 and the input of the second FIFO buffer 232 are connected to the bidirectional data bus 238 of the DRAM 234. The first FIFO buffer 230 is supplied with the write signal tw, and the second FIFO buffer 232 with the read signal tr. The writing of the picture data bd, bd' into the first FIFO buffer 230 and the reading of the stored picture data br from the second FIFO buffer 232 are thus isolated from each other.
The fast block-by-block reloading of the data stored in the first FIFO buffer 230 into the DRAM 234 takes place via the bidirectional data bus 238, with the write addresses w entered as block addresses over the address bus of the DRAM 234, and thus represents the actual loading process of the DRAM 234. The clock signal supplied to the DRAM 234 is the read/write signal twr.
Data is read out of the DRAM 234 over the bidirectional data bus 238 in blocks which are temporarily stored in the second FIFO buffer 232, with the read addresses r entered as block addresses over the address bus 236 of the DRAM 234, and the clock signal being the rear/write signal twr. For the multipicture display, the readout of the stored picture data br from the second FIFO buffer 232 then takes place strictly sequentially for the scanning lines to be displayed.

A picture-in-picture television receiver is disclosed in which a television picture to be inset is compressed at a compression rate of 1/n and inset as a small-picture in part of a main television picture or large picture, and a single field memory for small-picture reproduction is provided therein in or from which a video signal can be randomly read and written line by line as a unit. In the single field memory is stored the small-picture video signal line by line by the application of a writing clock in which case the time taken in the writing is less than 1/(n+1) of a horizontal period. Then, from the memory is read the stored small-picture information by the application of a reading clock of n times the frequency of the writing clock during the time that writing is not performed, and supplied to be inset in the main television picture. A small-capacity buffer memory is provided at the prestage or following stage of the field memory to prevent the read/write timing overlap in the field memory irrespective of whether the small-picture and the main television picture are synchronized or not in the transmission systems. Thus, the capacity of the field memory essential for the small-picture is about a half of the conventional one.

ITT PIP2250 / VSP2850 Technology Overview:

Picture-in-picture means the insertion of a second programs picture on the screen of a CTV receiver (at reduced size) simultaneously with the full-size main picture. The second, smail picture may origine from anofher TV"transmitter, from a video recorder, a monitor camera or another source. It allows monitoring of the second channel while watching the main channel. Main requirementfor picture-in-picture is to store the content of the small picture when it is supplied by its source, and to deliver the content at the proper Instant when it must be inserted into the main picture which is received and displayed continuously. For storing the content of the second, small picture, two standard 64 K dynamic RAMs (16 x 4) are used, thus makingthe storage simple and economic. Todays picture-in-picture fits neatless Into the wellknown DIGIT2000 system, but is also suitable for stand-alone applications. The PIP2250 is a fast signal processor in CMOS technology which is used to filter (for anti-aliasing) and to decimate the digital Y, R-Yand B-Y signal supplied by the VSP2850 VideoSync Processor, to control the DRAMs for storing the small pictures content and for reading the same at the proper time for display. Further, a border generator supplies the borderline for the small picture.

ITT NOKIA 6381 PIP DIGIVISION  BLACKLINE  CHASSIS  DIGI BE-2 Digit 2000 VLSI Digital TV System DIGIVISION ITT Intermetal Timing correction for a picture-in-picture television system
System performance of picture-in-picture video display systems is dependent on critical timing relationships between the incoming signals and the clock signals used to sample and display both the large picture and small picture signals. Video signals from various sources, e.g. VTR's, tend to have jittering time bases which may cause the small image to appear jagged or tilted. This distortion in the small image may be reduced by effecting adaptive signal delays in the small picture signal responsive to the relative phase of the system clock signal with respect to the horizontal synchronizing pulses of the large and/or small picture signal. One phase measure is used to control an interpolator which combines successive samples of the small picture signal in proportions to develop sample values corresponding to samples that would have occurred had the small picture signal been sampled by a clock properly aligned to the small picture horizontal synchronizing pulses. A second phase measure is used to delay the clock signal used to display the small picture so that the clock pulses that define the edges of the small picture occurs with the same timing relative to the large picture horizontal synchronizing pulses form line-to-line.



1. In a video signal processing system including a source of first video signal having a periodic horizontal line synchronizing signal component and a memory for holding sampled data representing a second video signal, apparatus for processing said sampled data in synchronism with said first video signal comprising:
means coupled to said source for developing horizontal synchronizing pulses representing the horizontal line synchronizing signal component of said first video signal:
a terminal for applying a clock pulse signal wherein the occurrence of clock pulses possibly exhibits varying amounts of skew relative to said horizontal synchronizing pulses;
skew measuring means coupled to said clock signal terminal and responsive to said horizontal synchronizing pulses for generating a control signal corresponding to the difference in time, as a proper fraction of the period of said clock pulse signal, between the occurrence of a horizontal synchronizing pulse and a pulse of said clock signal;
means coupled to said clock signal terminal, for controlling the reading of the sampled data from said memory; and
skew correcting means coupled to said clock signal terminal, to said memory and to said skew measuring means for effecting a time displacement of the signal represented by the sampled data read from said memory, the magnitude of said time displacement being determined by said control signal.
2. The apparatus set forth in claim 1 wherein said skew correcting means comprises:
means coupled to said clock signal terminal and responsive to said control signal for effecting a time displacement of said clock signal to develop a skew corrected clock signal; and
means for applying said skew corrected clock signal to said means for controlling the reading of sampled data from said memory.
3. The apparatus set forth in claim 2 wherein:
said skew measuring means includes means for measuring the time interval between the center point of a pulse of said horizontal line synchronizing signal and a transition of the pulse of said clock signal which occurs in time immediately prior to said center point.
4. The apparatus set forth in claim 1 wherein said skew correcting means comprises:
means for generating samples corresponding to the sums of first and second consecutive samples read from said memory and scaled by respective first and second scale factors proportional to said control signal.
5. The apparatus set forth in claim 1 wherein said skew correcting means comprises:
means for scaling the values of first and second consecutive samples read from said memory by first and second mutually complementary scale factors proportional to said control signal; and
means for combining the first and second scaled samples to develop samples representing said time displaced signal.
6. In a video signal processing system including a source of first video signal having a horizontal line synchronizing component and a source of second video signal having a horizontal line synchronizing component, apparatus for processing said second video signal in synchronism with said first video signal comprising:
means coupled to said source of first video signal for developing first horizontal synchronizing pulses representing the horizontal synchronizing component of said first video signal;
means coupled to said source of second video signal for developing second horizontal synchronizing pulses representing the horizontal line synchronizing component of said second video signal;
a terminal for applying a clock pulse signal, wherein the occurrence of clock pulses possibly exhibits respectively different varying amounts of skew relative to said first and second horizontal sync pulses;

means coupled to said source of second video signal for developing samples representing said second video signal at instants in time determined by said clock signal;
first skew measuring means coupled to said clock signal terminal and responsive to said second horizontal synchronizing pulses for generating a first control signal corresponding to the time difference between the occurrence of one of said second horizontal synchronizing pulses and a pulse of said clock pulse signal;
first skew correcting means responsive to said first control signal and coupled to said sampling means for modifiying the values of samples provided thereby to effect a time displacement of the signal represented by said samples, the magnitude of said time displacement being determined by said first control signal;
memory means coupled to said skew correcting means for storing samples representing said time displaced second signal;
second skew measuring means responsive to said clock signal and to said first horizontal synchronizing pulses for generating a second control signal corresponding to the time difference between the occurrence of one of said first horizontal synchronizing pulses and a pulse of said clock signal;
means coupled to said clock signal terminal for controlling the reading of the sampled data from said memory means; and
second skew correcting means coupled to said clock signal terminal, to said memory and to said skew measuring means for effecting a time displacement of the signal represented by the sampled data read from said memory, the magnitude of said time displacement being determined by said second control signal.
7. The apparatus set forth in claim 6 wherein said second skew correcting means comprises:
means coupled to said clock signal terminal and responsive to said second control signal for effecting a time displacement of said clock signal to develop a skew corrected clock signal; and
means for applying said skew corrected clock signal to said means for controlling the reading of sampled data from said memory.
8. The apparatus set forth in claim 6 wherein said second skew correcting means comprises:
means for generating samples corresponding to the sums of first and second consecutive samples read from said memory and scaled by respective first and second scale factors proportional to said second control signal.
9. The apparatus set forth in claim 6 wherein said second skew correcting means comprises:
means for scaling the values of first and second consecutive samples read from said memory by first and second mutually complementary scale factors proportional to said second control signal; and
means for combining the first and second scaled samples to develop samples representing said time displaced signal.
10. The apparatus set forth in claim 6 wherein:
said first skew measuring means comprises means for measuring the time interval, as a proper fraction of a period of said clock signal, between a predetermined point on a pulse of said second horizontal line synchronizing signal and a transition of a pulse of said clock signal which is adjacent in time to said predetermined point; and
said second skew measuring means comprises means for measuring the time interval, as a proper fraction of a period of said clock signal, between a predetermined point on a pulse of said first horizontal line synchronizing signal and a transition of a pulse of said clock signal which is adjacent in time to said predetermined point.
11. The apparatus set forth in claim 10 wherein said first skew correcting means includes means for scaling the values of first and second consecutive samples representing said second signal by a factor proportional to said first control signal and by a factor proportional to the complement of said first control signal respectively and means for adding the first and second scaled samples to develop a first sample representing said time displaced signal. 12. In a picture-in-picture television display system including a source of first video signal having a periodic horizontal line synchronizing signal component and a source of second video signal having a periodic horizontal line synchronzing signal component, apparatus for processing said second video signal in synchronism with said first video signal comprising:
means including a memory for processing said second video signal to develop sampled data in said memory representing said second video signal;
a terminal for applying a clock pulse signal wherein the occurrence of pulses of said clock signal possibly exhibits varying amounts of skew relative to the horizontal synchronizing pulses of said first video signal;
skew measuring means coupled to said clock signal terminal and responsive to said horizontal synchronizing pulses of said first signal for generating a control signal corresponding to the amount time, as a proper fraction of the period of said clock signal, between the occurrence of a horizontal synchronizing pulse and a pulse of said clock signal;
skew correcting means coupled to said clock signal terminal and responsive to said control signal for effecting a time displacement of said clock signal to develop a skew corrected clock signal:
means coupled to said skew correcting means and to said memory for extracting the sampled data therefrom in synchronism with said skew corrected clock signal; and
multiplexing means coupled to said sampled data extracting means and to said source of first video signal for selectively providing signals from said source of first video signal and from said memory to a display device.
13. The apparatus set forth in claim 12 wherein:
said skew measuring means includes means for measuring the time interval between a predetermined point on a pulse of said horizontal line synchronizing signal and a transition of the pulse of said clock signal which occurs immediately prior to said predetermined point; and
said skew correcting means includes means for delaying said clock signal by an amount of time approximately equal to said time interval to develop said skew corrected clock signal.
14. The apparatus set forth in claim 12 wherein said means for processing said second video signal comprises:
means coupled to said source of second video signal for developing further horizontal synchronizing pulses representing the horizontal line synchronizing signal component of said second video signal;
means coupled to said source of second video signal for developing samples representing said second video signal at instants in time determined by said clock signal;
further skew measuring means coupled to said clock signal terminal and responsive to said further horizontal synchronizing pulses for generating a further control signal corresponding to the amount of time, as a proper fraction of the period of said clock signal, between the occurrence of a further horizontal sync pulse and a pulse of said clock signal;
further skew correcting means coupled to said sample developing means and to said clock signal terminal and responsive to said further control signal for effecting a time displacement of the signal represented by the samples provided by said sample developing means;
means coupled to said further skew correcting means for applying selected ones of the samples provided thereby to said memory.
15. The apparatus set forth in claim 14 wherein,
said second video signal may include a color synchronizing burst signal component; and
the clock pulse signal applied to said clock terminal is synchronized in frequency and phase to said color synchronizing burst signal component.
16. The apparatus set forth in claim 14, wherein:
said first and second video signals include respective first and second chrominance signal components including respective first and second color synchronizing burst signal components;
the clock pulse signal applied to said clock terminal is synchronized in frequency and phase to said first color synchronizing burst signal component;
the chrominance signal components of the samples provided by said sample providing means tend to have phase errors relative to the samples which would be provided if the clock signal were locked in frequency and phase to the second color synchronizing burst signal component; and
means coupled to said sample providing means and responsive to said second color synchronizing burst signal component for substantially correcting said phase errors.
17. In a picture-in-picture television display apparatus including a source of first video signal having a periodic horizontal line synchronizing component, means for applying a clock pulse signal wherein the occurrence of clock pulses may exhibit varying amounts of skew relative to said horizontal line synchronizing component, a memory for holding sampled data representing a second video signal, means for displaying the image represented by said first video signal and means for reading the sampled data from said memory and for displaying the image represented by said samples as an inset in the image represented by said second video signal, wherein the improvement comprises:
skew measuring means responsive to said clock signal and to said horizontal synchronizing pulses for generating a control signal corresponding to the difference in time, as a proper fraction of the period of said clock signal between the occurrence of a horizontal synchronizing pulse and a pulse of said clock signal; and
skew correcting means responsive to said clock signal and coupled to said memory and to said skew measuring means for effecting a time displacement of the sampled data read from said memory, the magnitude of said time displacement being determined by said control signal.

Description:

This invention relates to apparatus for reducing the visibility of timing errors in the inset image of a picture in picture (PIP) television display system.

In a PIP system, two images from possibly unrelated sources are displayed simultaneously as one image. The composite image includes a full size primary image and a reduced size secondary image displayed as an inset. The subjective quality of the inset portion of the composite image may be affected by timing errors in either the primary or secondary signals.
The timing errors relevant to the present invention occur when either the primary or secondary signal is a nonstandard signal. As used in this application, the term nonstandard signal means a video signal having a horizontal line period which may vary in width by, for example, 4 ns or more from the horizontal line period set by the signal standard to which the video signal nominally conforms (e.g. NTSC, PAL, or SECAM).
To understand how these timing errors may affect the inset image, it is helpful to know how the secondary signal is processed and displayed. In a conventional PIP display system, the secondary signal is sampled at instants determined by a sampling clock signal which, desirably, bears a fixed relationship to the horizontal line scanning frequency of the secondary signal. To aid separation of the luminance and chrominance components of color television signals, the sampling clock signal has a frequency that is a multiple of the chrominance subcarrier frequency which is itself a harmonic of one-half the horizontal line scanning frequency. This sampling clock signal may be developed by a phase locked loop which locks the clock signal to the color reference burst component of the composite video signals.
The secondary signals are separated into their component parts, generally a luminance signal and two color difference signals, and then subsampled both vertically and horizontally to develop signals which represent a reduced-size image. The lines of samples taken during one field of the secondary signal are stored in a memory. These samples are then read from the memory for display using a clock signal which is desirably related to the horizontal line scanning frequency of the primary signal.
When the secondary signal originates from a video tape recorder (VTR), video disk player or home computer, the frequency of the color burst signal may be relatively stable while the frequency of the horizontal line scanning signal may vary significantly from line to line. This variation may be caused by stretching of the tape, defects in the disk, motor speed variations in either the VTR or disk player, or inaccuracies in the frequencies used by the home computer. Since the sampling clock signal is locked to the burst signal, corresponding sampling points on successive lines may be shifted or skewed relative to each other. When these lines of samples are displayed in synchronism with the primary signal, the corresponding samples do not line up vertically. Consequently vertical lines in the inset image may appear jagged, if the timing errors randomly change the period of the horizontal sync signal, or tilted if there is a fixed error in the horizontal sync period. Assuming a 3:1 reduction in the secondary image, a timing difference of 12 ns or more in successive horizontal line periods of the secondary signal may produce noticeable skew distortion in the inset image.
Timing errors in the primary signals change the relative time difference between primary horizontal sync pulses, which define the edges of the primary image, and the first samples in lines of the inset image. Primary signal timing errors that cause the periods of successive horizontal sync pulses to vary from the applicable signal standard by 4 ns or more may produce noticeable skew distortion in the inset image. This distortion causes the entire inset image to appear jagged or tilted.
To gain a better understanding of skew and the methods which may be used to compensate for it, consider the waveforms shown in FIG. 1. The waveform A represents a portion of one horizontal line of, e.g. luminance signal, including the horizontal synchronizing pulse (note the waveforms of FIG. 1 are not drawn to scale). Waveforms B, C and C' represent sampling (system) clock waveforms. The pulses of waveform B are assumed to occur at the points in time that a subcarrier locked clock, locked to a standard signal, would occur. Put another way, if waveform A corresponds to n lines of an image, then waveform B represents the desired sampling (system) clock for each successive line, i.e. without skew. A clock signal having constant skew may also be desirable. In either a zero skew or a constant skew system, the sampling clock pulse r always occurs at the same point in time relative to the HSYNC pulse. This point in time is represented by the sample S2 on waveform A. Waveform C represents a subcarrier locked clock which exhibits a degree of skew. The number of pulses per line period contained in waveform C may not be constant from line-to-line. Generally, the difference in the number of whole clock pulses in a line period can be compensated for in the phase locked loop which generates the horizontal synchronizing signal. The sampling phase error (skew) which is a fractional portion of a clock period, however, may only be corrected by operation on the samples themselves or on the sampling clock signal.
One method of correction is to adjust the sample values on a line-by-line basis so that the adjusted samples conform to samples that would be taken by a clock with zero skew or with some constant skew. For example, the sample values generated by the clock signal of waveform C may be adjusted to equal or approximate corresponding sample values that would be generated by the clock signal of waveform B. In the FIG. 1, clock pulse r' of waveform C is assumed to correspond to clock pulse r of waveform B. Clock pulse r' is advanced in time or skewed by one-half of one clock period, TS, with respect to clock pulse r. Clock pulse r' generates a sample value S1. Desirably, clock pulse r' should occur coincident with clock pulse r and generate the sample value S2.
Replacing the sample taken coincident with clock pulse r' with a sample having a value approximately equal to S2 effectively advances the timing of the signal taken with the sampling clock signal C so that it matches the signal which would have been taken had the zero-skew sampling clock signal B been used. Neglecting the complications of chrominance decoding, an alternative method of skew correction is to adjust the phase of the sampling clock signal on a line-by-line basis so that it approximately matches the phase of the desired clock signal B or some other clock signal which exhibits equal skew from line to line. The waveform C' represents the clock signal C delayed an amount of time substantially equal to the skew. Samples taken with this delayed clock signal approximate samples taken with the desired clock signal, B.
The first skew correction method may be used to correct skew errors in the secondary signal since it does not affect the phase of the sampling clock signal. It is recalled that the phase of this clock signal cannot be changed without affecting the processing of the secondary chrominance signal components. The second skew correction method may be used to compensate for skew errors in the primary signal when the samples representing the separated luminance and color difference signal components of the secondary image are retrieved from the secondary field memory for display.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
The present invention is embodied in apparatus which compensates for timing errors in a first video signal relative to a second, stored video signal. This apparatus includes circuitry for measuring the time interval between a horizontal synchronizing pulse of the first signal and a pulse of the clock signal which controls the retrieval and display of the second signal. The apparatus further includes circuitry with changes the timing of the second signal relative to the horizontal sync component of the first signal, as the second signal is displayed, to compensate for any variations in the measured time intervals from line-to-line.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
FIG. 1 is a timing diagram useful in describing skew and methods of skew correction.
FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a PIP television display system incorporating the present invention.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a digital PIP television display system incorporating the present invention.
FIGS. 4 and 5 are a block diagrams showing skew correction circuitry which may be used in the display devices shown in FIGS. 2 and 3.
FIG. 6 is a block diagram of alternative skew correcting apparatus which may be used in the display devices shown in FIGS. 2 and 3.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
In the drawings, broad arrows represent busses for multiple-bit parallel digital signals and line arrows represent connections carrying analog signals or single bit digital signals. Depending on the processing speed of the devices, compensating delays may be required in certain of the signal paths. One skilled in the art of digital signal processing circuit design would know where such delays would be needed in a particular system.
FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a PIP display device in which the primary signal is processed using conventional analog apparatus and the secondary signal is processed digitally. This circuitry uses a single clock signal, synchronized to the secondary burst signal, both for sampling and processing the secondary signal and for displaying the secondary image as an inset in the main image.
A source of primary composite video signals 10 applies the primary video signals to a Y/C separation filter 12. Filter 12, which may include conventional low-pass and high-pass filters, separates the composite video signals into primary luminance signals, Y_P, and primary chrominance signals C_p. The primary luminance and chrominance signals are applied to a primary chroma/luma processor 14 which may include, for example, band shaping filters for peaking the high frequency components of the luminance signals to develop a signal Y'_P and a chrominance signal demodulator for deriving the baseband color difference signals (R-Y)_P and (B-Y)_P from the primary chrominance signals, C_P. The signals Y'_P, (R-Y)_P, and (B-Y)_P applied to a matrix 16 which combines the signals to develop the color signals R_P, G_P and B_P. These signals are applied to one set of signal input terminals of an analog multiplexer 26, the output of which drives a cathode ray tube (CRT) 28. The color signals R_S, G_S and B_S developed from the secondary signal are applied to a second set of signal input terminals of the multiplexer 26. These signals are developed by apparatus described below.
A source of secondary composite video signals 50, which may include the tuner, IF amplifier and video detector of a conventional color television receiver, provides secondary composite video signals to an analog-to-digital converter (ADC) 52. ADC 52 samples and digitizes the secondary composite video signals at instants determined by the sampling clock signal CK. A phase-locked-loop (PLL) 56, described below, generates the signal, CK, which has a frequency 4f_c substantially equal to four times the chrominance subcarrier frequency, f_c. The signal CK is phase locked to the color synchronizing burst component of the secondary video signals.
ADC 52 provides digitized secondary video signals to a Y/C separation filter 54. Filter 54 may be a conventional digital filter having a clock input terminal coupled to receive the signal CK. Filter 54 may include, for example, an FIR filter which passes the chrominance signal components of composite video signal to the relative exclusion of luminance signal components and a subtracter for subtracting the chrominance signal components from the composite signal to develop luminance signal components.

ADC 52 also provides secondary composite video signals to a deflection processing unit (DPU) 60, which includes sync separator circuitry 58 and skew error measuring circuitry 59. The sync separator circuitry 58 and skew measuring circuitry 59 in the illustrated embodiment are components in a phase-locked-loop which produces a horizontal synchronizing signal, SHS, that is phase-locked to the horizontal synchronizing signal component of the secondary signal. Sync separator circuitry 58 applies the signal SHS and a digital value (HSP) containing an integer part and a fractional part representing the period of the signal SHS in units of one-sixteenth of the sampling clock period (1/16 Ts) to the skew measuring circuitry 59. The sync separator circuitry 58 also develops the vertical synchronization signals, SVS, and a burst gate signal, BG, from the digitized secondary composite video signals. The burst gate signal, BG, and the separated chrominance signals from filter 54 are applied to PLL 56. PLL 56 is, for example, a circuit similar to that described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,291,332 entitled "Phase Locked Circuit" which is hereby incorporated by reference.
The clock signal CK is applied to the skew measuring circuitry 59. Exemplary skew measuring circuitry 59 accumulates the fractional part of the horizontal skew period values, HSP, provided by the sync separator circuitry 58 to develop a secondary skew signal, SSK. The integer part of the signal SSK is fed back to the sync separator circuitry 58, where it is used in the phase-locked-loop to update the horizontal sync period measurement. The fractional part of the signal SSK is retained in the accumulator of the skew measuring circuitry 59 and applied as skew values to the skew correcting circuitry 62. As used in the present embodiment, the fractional part of the signal SSK represents the time interval between the center of the respective phase locked horizontal sync pulse and the leading edge of the clock pulse which occurs immediately before the center of the respective horizontal sync pulse. This interval is measured with a resolution substantially equal to one-sixteenth of the period of the signal CK. The sync separator circuitry 58 and the skew measuring circuitry 59 are of the type contained in the integrated circuit DPU 2532 manufactured by ITT Intermetall GmbH and which is described at pages 47-72 of the data book "Digit 2000 NTSC Double-scan VLSI Digital TV System" edition 1985/5 of ITT Intermetall, Freiburg, W. Germany.
Exemplary skew error correcting circuitry 62 is shown in FIG. 4. This circuitry interpolates between successive input samples to provide output samples that are substantially equivalent to the samples which would have been taken synchronous with a sampling clock signal having zero skew. The circuitry shown in FIG. 4 may be divided into two parts, a linear interpolator and a correction circuit. Luminance samples Y_S are applied to a delay element 410, which delays the samples by one period of the clock signal CK. The delayed samples are applied to a multiplier 412 which scales the samples by a factor K. The factor K may be a value between zero and one and is provided by a read only memory (ROM) 424 in response to the secondary skew signal SSK. Luminance samples Y_S are also applied to a multiplier 414 which scales these undelayed samples by a factor 1-K, also provided by ROM 424. The samples provided by the multipliers 412 and 414 are summed in adder 416.
The samples provided by adder 416 are linearly interpolated samples. If the frequency components of the sampled signals Y_S are an order of magnitude or more lower than the sampling frequency, the apparent delay of the interpolated samples is given by the product KT_S, where T_S is the period of the sampling clock signal CK. As the frequency components of the sampled signals approach the sampling frequency, however, the amount by which Ys appears to have been delayed becomes a function of the levels of its higher frequency components as well as of K. The correction circuit, which includes filter 422, multiplier 428 and adder 420 compensates for the frequency induced delay components. Luminance signals Y_S are applied to the filter 422 which has the transfer function T₄₂₂ =-1+Z^-1 +Z^-2 -Z^-3 expressed in Z transform notation. The samples provided by filter 422 are scaled by a factor C in multiplier 428. The factor C is provided by ROM 424 in response to the secondary skew signal, SSK. The samples developed by adder 416 are applied to a delay element 418 which compensates for the processing time through filter 422. These delayed samples are then added to the samples from multiplier 428 by an adder 420.
The combination of the linear interpolator and the correcting filter produce signals having an apparent delay of (1+K)Ts where the signals to be delayed have components with frequencies as high as one-third of the frequency of the sampling clock signal. In the NTSC system, for example, where the sampling clock frequency is approximately 14.3 MHz this skew correcting circuit provides uniformly spaced delays for luminance signals which may have frequency components up to 4.2 MHz. I defines the contents of ROM 424 to achieve delay steps of one-sixteenth of a sampling clock period.

TABLE I

______________________________________

DELAY TOTAL SSK K 1-K C CHANGE DELAY

______________________________________

15 1/16 15/16 1/32 TS /16 17TS /16 14 2/16 14/16 1/32 2TS /16 18TS /16 13 3/16 13/16 2/32 3TS /16 19TS /16 12 4/16 12/16 2/32 4TS /16 20TS /16 11 5/16 11/16 2/32 5TS /16 21TS /16 10 6/16 10/16 3/32 6TS /16 22TS /16 9 7/16 9/16 3/32 7TS /16 23TS /16 8 8/16 8/16 3/32 8TS /16 24TS /16 7 9/16 7/16 3/32 9TS /16 25TS /16 6 10/16 6/16 3/32 10TS /16 26TS /16 5 11/16 5/16 3/32 11TS /16 27TS /16 4 12/16 4/16 2/32 12TS /16 28TS /16 3 13/16 3/16 2/32 13TS /16 29TS /16 2 14/16 2/16 1/32 14TS /16 30TS /16 1 15/16 1/16 1/32 15TS /16 31TS /16 0 1 0 0 TS 2TS

______________________________________

The samples provided by this skew correcting circuit 62 have apparent delays of between 17T_S /16 and 2T_S. The delay is only apparent because the actual timing of the samples has not been changed. The skew correcting circuit 62 adjusts the sample values in each line of secondary luminance signals so they appear to have been generated using a sampling clock signal which had negligible skew.

The chrominance samples provided by Y/C separation filter 54 are applied to delay element 63 which provides a two sample period delay to compensate for the delay through the skew correcting circuitry 62. Because the chrominance signal has a smaller bandwidth than the luminance signal and because the eye is less sensitive to color transitions than to changes in brightness, skew errors in the chrominance signal are not as noticeable as skew errors in the luminance signal. Accordingly, the apparatus shown in FIG. 1 does not correct skew errors in the chrominance signal. It will be appreciated, however, that delay element 63 may be replaced with a skew correcting circuit similar to circuit element 62.
The luminance samples from skew correcting circuitry 62 and the chrominance samples from delay element 63 are applied to a secondary chroma/luma processor 64. Processor 64 may include, for example, an FIR band shaping filter for peaking the frequency spectrum of the digital luminance signals to provide a modified secondary luminance signal Y_S ' and a digital chrominance demodulator for developing samples which represent the baseband secondary color difference signals (R-Y)_S and (B-Y)_S.
The signals Y_S ', (R-Y)_S and (B-Y)_S are applied to PIP field memory 68 where they are subsampled and stored under control of the write address generator circuitry 70. Memory 68 may be a conventional random access memory having a sufficient number of storage cells to hold one field of the subsampled secondary signal. This memory may be organized as three separate field memories, one for the luminance signal and one for each of the two color difference signals, or it may be organized as a single field memory with the sampled luminance and color difference signals combined into a single sampled signal. For example, these signals may be combined by alternately concatenating samples of the two color difference signals to samples of the luminance signal.
Data from the secondary chroma/luma processor 64 is written into the field memory 68 under control of the memory address generator circuity 70. The circuitry 70 develops write address signals, WADDR, and other control signals WCS, as may be needed from the clock signal CK, and the secondary vertical and horizontal sync signals SVS and SHS respectively. The write address generator circuitry 70 operates to subsample the secondary signal in, for example, a three-to-one ratio both vertically and horizontally by providing address values and control signals for the memory 68 at appropriate times.
Samples representing lines of the subsampled secondary image are read from the PIP field memory 68 under control of the read address generator circuitry 24. The signals applied to circuitry 24 are the primary vertical and horizontal sync signals, PVS and PHS respectively, and a skew corrected clock signal CK'. The circuitry 24 may for example, count pulses of the horizontal sync signal, PHS, relative to the vertical sync pulses, PVS, and pulses of the signal CK' relative to the primary horizontal sync pulses to determine when to initiate read operations for the memory 68 and when to switch the multiplexer 26 between providing primary and secondary drive signals to the display device 28. Read address generator 24 provides a read address signal, RADDR, and read control signals RCS, to the field memory 68 and a primary/secondary image selection signal, P/S to the multiplexer 26.
The write address generator circuitry 70, read address generator circuitry 24 and field memory 68 are not a part of the present invention and, so, are not described in detail. Exemplary circuitry for subsampling, storing, and retrieving the signal which produces the insert image is described in the U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,249,213 entitled "Picture-in-Picture Television Receiver" and 4,139,860 entitled "Television Receiver Equipped for Simultaneously Showing Several Programs" which are hereby incorporated by reference.
The Read address generator 24, it is recalled, operates in synchronism with the skew corrected clock signal CK'. This signal is generated as follows. Primary composite video signals from source 10 are applied to an ADC 17 which is clocked by the signal CK provided by the PLL 56. ADC 17 applies the sampled primary composite video signals to a DPU 20. DPU 20, which includes sync separator 18 and skew measuring circuitry 19 may be identical to the DPU 60 described above. The sync separator 18 develops the primary vertical sync signal, PVS, and the primary horizontal sync signal, PHS, from the primary composite video signals. The signal PHS, the horizontal sync period value HSP, and the clock signal CK are applied to the skew measuring circuitry 19. Circuitry 19 is functionally identical to the skew measuring circuitry 59 described above. It measures the time difference between the center of each pulse of the signal PHS and the leading edge of the immediately preceding pulse of the clock signal CK. The fractional part of the signal, PSK, provided by the skew measuring circuitry 19 is a four bit value indicating the skew for each primary horizontal scan line in units of one-sixteenth of the period of the clock signal CK. The integer part of the signal PSK is applied to the sync separator 18 as set forth above in reference to DPU 60. The fractional part of the signal PSK and the signal CK are applied to the skew correcting circuitry 22. Circuitry 22 may be a programmable delay element similar to that shown in FIG. 5.
In FIG. 5, the clock signal CK is applied to the input termnal of an inverter I₁ which is the first inverter in a chain of thirty series-connected inverters. The inverter chain is organized as fifteen pairs of inverters, I₁ and I₁ ' through I₁₅ and I₁₅ '. The input terminal to the inverter I₁ and the output terminals of all of the pairs, i.e. I₁ ', I₂ ' . . . I₁₅ ' are connected to respectively different data input terminals of the multiplexer 500. The control input port of multiplexer 500 is coupled to receive the fractional part of the primary skew signal, PSK, provided by the skew measuring circuitry 19. Each pair of inverters in the chain has a signal propogation delay of approximately one-sixteenth of the period of clock signal CK so the output terminals of each of the pairs provide clock signals delayed by between one-sixteenth and fifteen-sixteenths of a clock period. The multiplexer 500 is conditioned by the fractional part of the signal PSK to provide, as its output signal CK', the signal CK when PSK is zero, the signal at the output terminal of inverter of I₁ ' when PSK is one, the signal at the output terminal of inverter I₂ ' when PSK is two, and so on, providing the signal at the output terminal of inverter I₁₅ ' when PSK is fifteen. Accordingly, the signal CK' provided by the skew correcting circuitry 22 is a clock signal CK delayed by an amount of time approximately equal to the value of the fractional part of PSK times one-sixteenth of the period of the signal CK. As set forth above, in reference to FIG. 1, this signal is a skew corrected clock signal, which is to say a clock signal aligned with the horizontal sync signal PHS from line-to-line.
The samples provided by the memory 68 in synchronism with the skew corrected clock signal CK' are applied to a digital-to-analog converter (DAC) 72 which is clocked by the skew corrected clock signal CK'. DAC 72 provides analog signals representing the secondary luminance and (R-Y) and (B-Y) color difference signals to the matrix 74. Matrix 74 is a conventional analog matrix which converts secondary luminance and color difference signals into the color signals R_S, G_S, and B_S for application to the multiplexer 26 as set forth above.
The analog multiplexer 26 is controlled by the image selection signal P/S provided by the read address generator 24 to apply either primary or secondary signals to the display device 28 to develop composite PIP images.
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing aternative circuitry to correct for skew in the primary signal. This embodiment uses an interpolation scheme which is the same as is used to correct for the skew of the secondary signal. The read address generator circuitry 24' is clocked by the signal CK but is otherwise the same as the circuitry 24 described in reference to FIG. 2. From the clock signal CK and the primary horizontal and vertical sync signals PHS and PVS, read address generator circuitry 24' develops the read address signal RADDR and the read control signals RCS which control the reading of the subsampled secondary luminance and color difference signals from the PIP field memory 68. The luminance samples, Y_ss, are applied to skew correcting circuitry 22' which is responsive to the fractional part of the signal PSK. Circuitry 22' may be identical to the skew correcting circuitry 62 described above in reference to FIG. 2. Circuitry 22' interpolates between successive ones of the samples Y_ss to provide samples having values representing a signal delayed by the skew value. In other words, substantially the same signal as would be represented by the samples read from the memory in synchronism with a skew corrected clock signal. The luminance samples developed by the skew correcting circuitry 22' are applied to a DAC 72'. The (R-Y) and (B-Y) color difference samples provided by the field memory 68' are applied to the DAC 72' via the compensating delay elements 602 and 604 respectively. Delay elements 602 and 604 compensate for processing delay in the skew correcting circuitry 22'. As set forth in reference to the skew correcting circuitry 62, only the luminance signals need skew correction since the eye is less sensitive to changes in color than to changes in brightness. Nonetheless, it is contemplated that the delay elements 602 and 604 may be replaced by skew correcting circuitry similar to the circuitry 22' if skew correction of the color difference samples is found to be desirable. The DAC 72' is clocked by the uncorrected clock signal CK but is otherwise the same as the DAC 72 described with reference to FIG. 2. DAC 72' provides analog luminance and color difference signals representing the reduced secondary signal to the matrix 74.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of an alternative embodiment of the invention in which both the primary and secondary signals are processed digitally. A single clock signal, PCK, which is phase locked to the primary color synchronizing burst signal, is used for both the primary and secondary processing circuitry. Since the secondary signals are sampled by a clock which is not phase locked to the secondary color burst signal, this embodiment of the invention includes circuitry to adjust the phase of the secondary chrominance signals to ensure proper color reproduction.
In the PIP system shown in FIG. 3, analog composite video signals from a source of primary composite video signals 310 are applied to an ADC 317. ADC 317 is responsive to the primary burst locked clock signal PCK to provide digital samples representing the analog primary video signals. These samples are applied to a Y/C separation filter 312 and to the DPU 320. DPU 320 is, for example, identical to the DPUs 20 and 60 described above. It provides the primary vertical and horizontal synchronization signals, PHS and PVS, a primary burst gate signal, PBG, and a signal, PSK, representing the skew of the clock signal, PCK, relative to the primary horizontal sync signal, PHS, as a proper fraction of the clock period. The Y/C separation filter 312, which may be identical to the filter 54, separates the luminance and chrominance components from the primary composite video signals.
The primary chrominance signals from filter 312 and the burst gate signal PBG from sync separator 318 are applied to the PLL 321. PLL 321, which may contain circuitry identical to that used by the PLL 56, generates the clock signal PCK having a frequency of substantially 4f_c that is phase-locked to the color burst component of the primary signal.
The primary luminance and chrominance signal components are applied to the primary chroma/luma processor 314. Chroma/luma processor 314 provides processed luminance signals and (R-Y) and (B-Y) color difference signals to the DAC 315. DAC 315 converts the digital luminance and color difference signals into analog form and applies the analog signals to an RGB matrix 316. Matrix 316 develops the red, green, and blue color signals which represent the primary image, and applies them to a first set of signal input terminals of a multiplexer 326. Multiplexer 326, selects between the color signals representing the primary image and color signals representing the secondary image, which are applied to a second set of signal input terminals, to drive the display device 328. Apparatus which generates the color signals for the secondary image and which generates the selection signal, P/S, for the multiplexer 326 is described below.
Analog composite video signals from a source of secondary composite video signals 350 are applied to an ADC 352. ADC 352 is responsive to the primary sampling clock signal PCK for providing samples representing secondary composite video signals to the Y/C separation filter 354 and to the DPU 360. DPU 360, for example, is identical to the DPUs 20 and 60 described above. It provides the secondary horizontal and vertical synchronization signals, SHS and SVS respectively, a secondary burst gate signal SBG, and a signal, SSK, representing the skew of the clock signal PCK relative to the secondary horizontal sync signal SHS as a proper fraction of the clock period.
Y/C separation filter 354, separates the secondary composite video samples into a luminance signal component and a chrominance signal component. The luminance signal component and the signal SSK from skew measuring circuitry 359 are applied to skew correcting circuitry 362. The circuitry 362 may be identical to the circuitry described with reference to FIG. 4. It produces luminance samples having equal skew from line-to-line relative to the secondary horizontal sync signal SHS. These samples are applied to the secondary chroma/luma processor 364. The chrominance samples from filter 354 are applied to the processor 364 via the delay element 363. Delay element 363 compensates for the processing delays incurred by the luminance samples in the skew correction circuitry 362 by delaying the chrominance samples by two sample periods.
The secondary luma/chroma processor 364 processes the luminance signal and demodulates the chrominance signal into two quadrature phase related color difference signals. In this instance, however, the color difference signals provided by the processor 364 may not be (R-Y) and (B-Y) signals. The demodulator in the chroma/luma processor 364 will provide (R-Y) and (B-Y) signals only when the sampling clock signal has a frequency of 4f_c and is phase locked to the color burst component of the secondary signal. In this embodiment, the sampling clock signal used to develop the secondary samples is phase locked to the primary color burst component. Since the primary and secondary signals may be from different sources, there may be phase and frequency differences between their respective color burst signals. Consequently, there may be phase errors in the demodulated color difference signals provided by the processor 364 relative to the (R-Y) and (B-Y) phases of the secondary signal. The present embodiment includes chrominance phase error correction circuitry 365 to detect and correct phase errors in the color difference signals provided by processor 364. This circuit is not a part of the present invention. Suitable circuitry 365 may be built by one skilled in the art from the teachings of the patent application Ser. No. 567,190 entitled "A Digital Video Signal Processing System Using Asynchronous A-to-D Encoding", which is hereby incorporated by reference. Briefly, the circuitry 365 converts the two color difference signals into a phase angle signal and an amplitude signal. The phase signal is compared against a reference phase during the secondary burst interval. The difference between the burst phase and the reference phase is used to correct the phase and amplitude signals in a closed loop control system. The corrected phase and amplitude signals are then processed to develop at least two color difference signals (e.g. (R-Y) and (B-Y)).
The phase corrected color difference signals provided by the circuitry 365 and the luminance signal provided by processor 364 via compensating delay element 367 are applied to the PIP field memory 368. The PIP field memory 368, memory write address generator circutry 370 and memory read address generator circuitry 324 may be similar to the respective field memory 68, and memory write and read address generator circutry 70 and 24 of FIG. 2. The circuitry 370 and 324 are responsive to the clock signal PCK and skew corrected clock signal PCK' respectively, but otherwise operate identically to the circuitry described above.
The skew corrected clock signal PCK' is developed by the skew correction circuitry 322. Circuitry 322, which may be similar to the circuitry 22, delays the clock signal PCK by the measured skew value times one-sixteenth of the period of PCK, to produce a skew corrected clock signal PCK'. It is contemplated that circuitry similar to that shown in FIG. 6 may be used in place of the skew correcting circuitry 622 to correct for the skew of the primary signal.
The samples provided by the PIP field memory 368 under control of the memory output address and timing control circuitry are applied to a DAC 372. DAC 372, synchronous with the skew corrected clock signal PCK', develops analog luminance and (R-Y) and (B-Y) color difference signals representing the secondary image and applies these samples to the matrix 374. Matrix 374 converts these luminance and color difference signals into red, green and blue color signals. These color signals, which represent the secondary image, are applied to the second set of signal input terminals of the analog multiplexer 326 as described above.
Although the embodiments described above use digital processing circuitry and use random access memory for the field store, it is contemplated that similar skew correction circuitry could be used with analog sampled data signals and that analog or digital shift register memories could be used for the field store.

ITT NOKIA 6381 PIP DIGIVISION  BLACKLINE  CHASSIS  DIGI BE-2 CONTROL UNIT SYSTEM:




































- ITT CCU-SEL-048
- ITT MEA 2901
- ITT MDA 2062


TDA8172 TV VERTICAL DEFLECTION OUTPUT CIRCUIT

DESCRIPTION
The TDA8172 is a monolithic integrated circuit in
HEPTAWATTTM package. It is a high efficiency
power booster for direct driving of vertical windings
of TV yokes. It is intended for use in Color and B &
W television as well as in monitors and displays.

.POWER AMPLIFIER
.FLYBACKGENERATOR
.THERMAL PROTECTION

MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS
The power dissipated in the circuit must be removed
by adding an external heatsink.
Thanks to the HEPTAWATTTM package attaching
the heatsink is very simple, a screw or a compression
spring (clip) being sufficient.
Between the heatsink and the package it is better
to insert a layer of silicon grease, to optimize the
thermal contact ; no electrical isolation is needed
between the two surfaces, since the tab is connected
to Pin 4 which is ground.

SOME  Other References:

Chorafas, “Interactive Videotex:The Domesticated Computer,” 1981, Petrocelli Books, New York.
Hinton, “Character rounding for the Wireless Word Teletex Decoder,” Wireless World, Nov. 1978, pp. 49-53, vol. 84 No. 1515, IPC Business Press, United Kingdom.
Kruger, “Speicherfernsehen, Das Digitale Kennungssystem ZPS,” Proceedings 9th International Congress Microelectroncis, pp. 39-45.
“Fernsehempfang rund um die Uhr” Funk Technik, Mar. 1981, vol. 36.
“Method for the Transmission of Additional Information,” German Patent Application submitted by Blaupunkt Werke GMBH, filed May 31, 1980.
“Eine Neue Generation Mikroprozessorgesteuerter Datensender Und -Empfänger Für Alle Varianten Der Datenübertragung in Der V-Lücke Des Fernsehisgnals”, A. Ebner and K. Schuster, Rundfunktechnische Mitteilungen, vol. 26, No. 5, pp. 215-220.
“A Novel Television Add-On Data Communication System”, Jan. 1974, Patrick T. King, Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers Journal, vol. 83.
“Actual Two-Way Systems,” Ronald K. Jurgen, IEEE Spectrum, Nov. 1971.
“Additional Information Within the Television Signal”, Sep. 1970, R. A. O'Connor, Journal of the Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers, vol. 79, No. 9, p. 824.
“Applications of Information Networks,” J.C.R. et al, Proceedings of the IEEE, vol. 66, No. 11, pp. 1330-1346, Nov. 1978.
“Automated Control Units for Advertising on Cable,” G. Morgan, Image Technology, vol. 68, No. 9, pp. 457, 460, Sep. 1986.
“Coded Information Within the Picture Area”, Feb.,1974, Wilton R. Holm, Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers Journal, vol. 83.
“Color Decode a PCM NTSC Television Signal”, Jun. 1974, John P. Rossi, Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers Journal, vol. 83.
“Comparison of Technology and Capital Costs of New Home Services,” Metin B. Akgun, IEEE Transactions on Cable Television, vol. CATV-5, No. 3, Jul. 1980.
“Codifica Numerica Del Segnale Sonoro—Interfaccia Per Gli Apparati Professionali”, Oct. 1985, M. Barbero and M. Occhiena, Elettronica e Telecomunicazi oni, vol. 34, No. 5, 9 pp. 209-216.
“Encryption-based security systems”, May 29, 1987-Jun. 1, 1987, Wechselberger, NCTA Convention Records pp. 148-152.
“Experiences with Piolot Projects in North America, Japan, and Europe”, 1977, Eds. W. Kaiser, H. Marko, and E. Witte, Two-Way Cable Television.
“Going for The Microcomputer Market with Commercial Telesoftware”, 1982, M. Shain, Viewdata 82.
“Hard encrypted video & audio television system”, Mar. 15, 1986-Mar. 18, 1986, Jeffers, Glaab 8&. Griffin, NCTA Convention Records pp. 232-234.
“Hybrid Addressability,” Stubbs & Holobinko, National Cable Television Association Convention, pp. 255-265, Jun. 3-6, 1984.
“Individualized Still-Picture Communication on a Two-Way Broad-Band CATV System,” Koji Maeda, IEEE Transactions on Communications, vol. Com-23, No. 1, Jan. 1975.
“Low Cost Interactive Home TV Terminal,” Stetten & Mason, National Cable Television Association Convention, pp. 49-53, Jul. 6-9, 1971.
“Measurement and Control of TV Transmitters,” Shelley and Smart, Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers Journal, vol. 80, Nov. 1971.
“Off Premises Addressability,” Preschutti, National Cable Television Association Convention, pp. 48-57, Jun. 2-5, 1985.
“On Distributed Communications,” Paul Baran, The RAND Corporation, vols. 1-10.
“Operational Implementation of a Broadcast Television Frame Synchronizer”, Mar. 1975, Robert J. Butler , Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers Journal, vol. 84.
“Pilot Two-Way CATV Systems,” Ernest K. Smith, IEEE Transactions on Communications, vol. COM-23, No. 1, Jan. 1975.
“Some Methods of Automatic Analysis of Television Test Signals”, Dec. 1971, R. H. Vivian, Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers Journal, vol. 80.
“SRS El Segundo Interim Test Report,” Callais, National Cable Television Association Convention, pp. 384-407, May 14-17, 1972.
“Status Monitoring System,” Hale, National Cable Television Association Convention, . 153-158, 1974.
“Television Applications and Transmission of Digital Data in the Vertical Blanking Interval”, 1980, J. J. Lopinto ITC/USA/'80, International Telemetering Conference, p. 650, pp. 345-349.
“Television Central,” Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers Journal, vol. 85, Oct. 1976.
“The Digital Video Effects System,” Patten, Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers Journal, vol. 87, Apr. 1978.
“The Magnavox Premium TV System,” Forbes & Cooley, National Cable Television Association Convention, pp. 100-104, Jun. 17-20, 1973.
“The Subscriber Response System,” Durfee & Callais, National Cable Television Association Convention, pp. 28-48, Jul. 6-9, 1971.
“TV Frame Synchronizer,” Kano, et al., Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers Journal, vol. 84, Mar. 1975.
“Two-Way Coax TV System Handles All Communication Needs,” George F. Benton, Communications News, Apr. 1975.
“Use of Low Frequency Bi-Directional Digital Transmission on Cable,” Ellis, National Cable Television Association Convention, pp. 38-45, Apr. 17-20, 1977.
“Videotex & Teletext,” Technical Panel, National Cable Television Association Convention, pp. 160-184, Jun. 12-15, 1983.
“Videotex Network,” J. Stynen and M. Keymolen, Revue HF, vol. 1, No. 12, pp. 413-424, 1981.
“Videotex Technologies,” Technical Panel, National Cable Television Association Convention, pp. 99-123, May 29-Jun. 1, 1981.
Das Digitales Fernsehkennungssystem ZPS, H. Eckhard Kruger, ntz Bd. 35 (1982) Helft 6 (“The Digital Television Identification System ZPS,” ntz, vol. 35, No. 6, 1982, pp. 368-376).
Digitales Kennungssystem ZPS, Dr. H. E. Krüger, Forderungsvorhaben TK 0054/3 (“Digital Identification System ZPS,” Dr. H. E. Krüger, Research Project TK 0054/3, Final Report, Oct. 1, 1978 to Oct. 31, 1979).
Hi-Ovis Development Project, M. Kawahata, Presented in Two-Way Cable Television, Experiences with Pilot Projects in North America, Japan and Europe, Proceedings of a Symposium Held in Munich, Apr. 27-29, 1977, pp. 135-142.
Kinghorn, J.R., 11/00/85, “Using Extensions to World System Teletext,” IEEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics, vol. CE-31, No. 4, pp. 661-666.
The Videotex and Teletext Handbook, Hurly et al., Harper and Row Publishers, Inc., 1985.
Two-Way Applications for Cable Television Systems in the '70s, Ronald K. Jurgen, Editor, IEEE Spectrum, Nov. 1971.
Vereinbarung ZVEI/ARD/ZDF ZUR ZRD/ZDF/ZVVEI—Tichtline “Video-Programm-System (VPS),” ARD/ZDF, Dec. 4, 1984 (Memorandum of Understanding ZVEI/ARD/ZDF on the ARD/ZDF/ZVEI Guideline for a ‘Video Programming System (VPS)’).
Videoprogrammsystem Der 2. Generation, Von Gunther Stacker, net 40 (1986), Heft 7/8 (“Second-Generation Video Programming Systems,” Von Gunther Stacker, net vol. 7/8 No. 40 (1986), pp. 311-315).
Videotext Programmiert Videoheimgerate (VPV), Gerhard Eitz, Karl-Ulrich Oberlies, Fundfunktechnische Mitteilungen, Jahrg. 30 (1986), H. 5 (“VCR Programming VIA Teletext”).
Videotext Programmiert Videorecorder, Von Gunther Hofmann, Andreas Neuman, Karl-Ulrich Oberlies and Eckhard Schadwinkel, Rundfunktech Mitteilunger, Jahrg. 26 (1982) H. 6 (“Videotext Programs Video Recorder”).
Videotext Und Bildschirmtext Mit Den LSI-Schaltungden SAA 5020, SAA 5030, SAA 5041 Und SAA 5051, Valvo, Technische Information fur die Industrie, Apr. 1980 (Videotext and Interactive Videotex With the LSI-Circuits SAA 5020, SAA 5030, SAA 5041 and SAA 5051).
Viewdata: A Public Information Utility, Second Edition, 1980, Dr. Adrian V. Stokes.
Wunschprogramm Aus Der Fernsehzeitschrift, Funkschau Dec. 1981, p. 6070 (“Recording Programs From the Program Guide,” Funkschau Dec. 1982, pp. 60-70).
James, A., “ORACLE—Broadcasting the Written Word,” Wireless Word, Jul. 1975.
Carne, E. Bryan, “The Wired Household,” IEEE Spectrum, Oct. 1979, p. 61-66.
McKenzie, G.A., “Oracle—an Information Broadcasting Service Using Data Transmission in the Vertical Interval,” Journal of the SMPTE, vol. 83, No. 1, Jan. 1974, pp. 6-10.
Edwardson, S.M., “CEEFAX: A Proposed New Broadcasting Service,” Journal of the SMPTE, Jan. 1974, p. 14-19.
J. Chiddix, “Automated Videotape Delay of Satellite Transmissions,” Satellite Communications Magazine, May 1978 (reprint—2 pages).
J. Chiddix, “Tape Speed errors in Line-Locked Videocassettes Machines For CATV Applications,” TVC, Nov. 1977 (reprint—2 pages).
CRC Electronics, Inc. Product Description, “Model TD-100—Time Delay Videotape Controller,” 2 pages.
CRC Electronics, Inc., Net Price List—Mar. 1, 1980 (TD-100 Time Delay Videotape Controller), 1 page.
CRC Electronics, Inc. Product Description, “Model P-1000 Videocassette Programmer,” 4 pages.
CRC Electronics, Inc., Net Price List—Jul. 31, 1981 (P-1000 Video Machine Programmer), 1 page.
Tunmann, E.O. et al. (Tele-Engineering Corp.), “Microprocessor for CATV Systems,” Cable 78— Technical Papers, National Cable Television Association 27th Annual Convention, New Orleans, LA, Apr. 30-May 3, 1978 (“Cable 78”), pp. 70-75.
Vega, Richard L. (Telecommunications Systems, Inc.), “From Satellite to Earth Station to Studio to S-T-L to MDS Transmitter to the Home; Pay Television Comes to Anchorage, Alaska,” Cable 78, pp. 76-80.
Wright, James B. et al. (Rockford Cablevision, Inc.), “The Rockford Two-Way Cable Project: Existing and Projected Technology,” Cable 78, pp. 20-28.
Fannetti, John D. et al. (City of Syracuse), “The Urban Market: Paving the Way for Two-Way Telecommunications,”Cable 78, pp. 29-33.
Schnee Rolf M. et al. (Heinrich-Hertz-Institut Berlin (West)), “Technical Aspects of Two-Way CATV Systems in Germany,” Cable 78, pp. 34-41.
Dickinson, Robert V.C. (E-Com Corporation), “A Versatile, Low Cost System for Implementing CATV Auxiliary Services,” Visions '79—Technical Papers, National Cable Television Association 28th Annual Convention, Las Vegas, NV, May 20-23, 1979, (“Vision '79”), pp. 65-72.
Evans, William E. et al. (Manitoba Telephone System), “An Intercity Coaxial Cable Electronic Highway,” Visions '79, pp. 73-79.
Schrock, Clifford B. (C.B. Schrock and Associates, Inc.), “Pay Per View, Security, and Energy Controls Via Cable: The Rippling River Project,” Visions '79, pp. 80-85.
Southworth, Glen (Colorado Video, Inc.), “Narrow-Band Video: The UPI ‘Newstime’ Technology,” Visions '79pp. 86-88.
Daly IV, Raymond E. (Computer Cablevision, Inc.), “Pontential Use of Microcomputers—The Threats to the Technical Personnel, Manufacturers And Owners,” Vision '79, pp. 124-126.
Grabenstein, James B. (Potomac Valley Television Co., Inc.), “System Design and Operation with ‘Basic’,” Visions '79 (Appendix B), p. 127.
Amell, Richard L. (Cox Cable Communications, Inc.), “Computer-Aided CATV System Design,” Visions '79, pp. 128-133.
Yoshino, Hirokazu et al. (Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.), “Multi-Information System Using Fiber Optics,” Visions '79, pp. 134-137.
Albright, Thomas G. (Printer Terminal Communications Corporation), “Cable Service: A Data Distribution Link,” Visions of the 80's—Technical Papers, National Cable Television Association 29th Annual Convention, Dallas, TX, May 18-21, 1980 (“Visions of the 80's”), pp. 30-34.
Blineau, Joseph J. (Centre Commun d'Etudes de Télévision et Télécommunications), “Measuring Methods and Equipments for Data Packet Broadcasting,” Visions of the 80's, pp. 35-39.
Katz, Harold W. (Interactive Systems/3M), “Status Report on EIA Broadband Modem Standards,” Visions of the 80's, pp. 40-44.
Lopinto, John J. (Home Box Office), “Considerations for Implementing Teletext in the Cable System,” Visions of the 80's, pp. 45-48.
O'Brien, Jr., Thomas E. (General Instrument Corporation), “System Design Criteria of Addressable Terminals Optimized for the CATV Operator,” Visions of the 80's, pp. 89-91.
Ost, Clarence S. et al. (Electronic Mechanical Products Co.), “High-Security Cable Television Access System,” Visions of the 80's, pp. 92-94.
Bacon, John C. (Scientific-Atlanta, Inc.), “Is Scrambling the Only Way?,” Visions of the 80's, pp. 95-98.
Davis, Allen (Home Box Office), “Satellite Security,” Visions of the 80's, pp. 99-100.
Mannino, Joseph A. (Applied Date Research, Inc.), “Computer Applications in Cable Television,” Visions of the 80's, pp. 116-117.
Beck, Ann et al. (Manhattan Cable TV), “An Automated Programming Control System for Cable TV,” Visions of the 80's, pp. 122-127.
Schloss, Robert E. et al. (Omega Communications, Inc.), “Controlling Cable TV Head Ends and Generating Messages by Means of a Micro Computer,” Vision of the 80's, pp. 136-138.
Eissler, Charles O. (Oak Communications, Inc.), “Addressable Control,” Cable: '81 the Future of Communications—Technical Papers, National Cable Television Association 30th Annual Convention, Los Angeles, CA, May 29-Jun. 1, 1981 (“Cable: '81 ”), pp. 29-33.
Schoeneberger, Carl F. (TOCOM, Inc.), “Addressable Terminal Control Using the Vertical Interval,” Cable: '81, pp. 34-40.
Stern, Joseph L. (Stern Telecommunications Corporation), “Addressable Taps,” Cable: '81, p. 41.
Brown, Larry C. (Pioneer Communications of America), “Addressable Control—A Big First Step Toward the Marriage of Computer, Cable, and Consumer,” Cable: '81, pp. 42-46.
Grabowski, Ralph E. (VISIONtec), “The Link Between the Computer and Television,” Cable: '81, pp. 99-100.
Ciciora, Ph.D., W.S. (Zenith Radio Corporation), “Virtext & Virdata: Adventures in Vertical Interval Signaling,” Cable: '81, pp. 101-04.
Gilbert, Bill et al. (Texscan Corporation), “Automatic Status Monitoring for a CATV Plant,” Cable: '81 , pp. 124-128.
Ciciora, Walter et al., “An Introduction to Teletext and Viewdata with Comments on Compatibility,” IEEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics, vol. CE-25, No. 3, Jul. 1979, (“Consumer Electronics”), pp. 235-245.
Tanton, N. E. “UK Teletext— Evolution and Potential,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 246-250.
Bright, Roy D., “Prestel—The World's First Public Viewdata Service,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 251-255.
Bown, H.G. et al., “Telidon: A New Approach to Videotex System Design,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 256-268.
Chitnis, A.M. et al., “Videotex Services: Network and Terminal Alternatives,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 269-278.
Hedger, J. “Telesoftware: Home Computing Via Broadcast Teletext,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 279-287.
Crowther, G.O., “Teletext and Viewdata Systems and Their Possible Extension to Europe and USA,” Consumer Electronics,, pp. 288-294.
Gross, William S., “Info-Text, Newspaper of the Future,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 295-297.
Robinson, Gary et al., “‘Touch-Tone’ Teletext—A Combined Teletext-Viewdata System,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 298-303.
O'Connor, Robert A., “Teletext Field Tests,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 304-310.
Blank, John, “System and Hardware Considerations of Home Terminals With Telephone Computer Access,” Comsumer Electronics, pp. 311-317.
Plummer, Robert P. et al, “4004 Futures for Teletext and Videotex in the U.S.,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 318-326.
Marti, B. et al., The Antiope Videotex System, Consumer Electronics, pp. 327-333.
Frandon, P. et al, “Antiope LSI,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 334-338.
Crowther, G.O., “Teletext and Viewdata Costs As Applied to the U.S. Market,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 339-344.
Mothersole, Peter L., “Teletext Signal Generation Equipment and Systems,” Consumer Electronics pp. 345-352.
Harden, Brian, “Teletext/Viewdata LSI,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 353-358.
Swanson, E. et al., “An Integrated Serial to Parallel Converter for Teletext Application,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 359-361.
Neal, C. Bailey et al., “A Frequency-Domain Interpretation of Echoes and Their Effect on Teletext Data Reception,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 362-377.
Goyal, Shri K. et al., “Reception of Teletext Under Multipath Conditions,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 378-392.
Prosser, Howard F., “Set Top Adapter Considerations for Teletext,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 393-399.
Suzuki, Tadahiko et al., Television Receiver Design Aspects for Employing Teletext LSI, Consumer Electronics, pp. 400-405.
Baer, Ralph H., “Tele-Briefs—A Novel User-Selectable Real Time News Headline Service for Cable TV,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 406-408.
Sherry, L.A., “Teletext Field Trials in the United Kingdom,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 409-423.
Clifford, Colin, “A Universal Controller for Text Display Systems,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 424-429.
Barlow, “The Design of an Automatic Machine Assignment System”, Journal of the SMPTE, Jul. 1975, vol. 84, p. 532-537.
Barlow, “The Automation of Large Program Routing Switchers”, SMPTE Journal, Jul. 1979, Vol. 88, p. 493-497.
Barlow, “The Computer Control of Multiple-Bus Switchers”, SMPTE Journal, Sep. 1976, Vol. 85, p. 720-723.
Barlow, “The Assurance of Reliability”, SMPTE Journal, Feb. 1976, Vol. 85, p. 73-75.
Barlow, “Some Features of Computer-Controlled Television Station Switchers”,Journal of the SMPTE, Mar. 1972, vol. 81, p. 179-183.
Barlow et al., “A Universal Software for Automatic Switchers”, SMPTE Journal, Oct. 1978, vol. 87, p. 682-683.
Butler, “PCM-Multiplexed Audio in a Large Audio Routing Switcher”, SMPTE Journal, Nov. 1976, vol. 85, p. 875-877.
Dickson et al., “An Automated Network Center”, Journal of the SMPTE, Jul. 1975, Vol. 84, p. 529-532.
Edmondson et al., “Nbc Switching Central”, SMPTE Journal, Oct. 1976, Vol. 85, p. 795-805.
Flemming, “NBC Television Central—An Overview”, SMPTE Journal, Oct. 1976, Vol. 85, p. 792-795.
Horowitz, “CBS” New-Technology Station, WBBM-T, SMPTE Journal, Mar. 1978, vol. 87, p. 141-146.
Krochmal et al., “Television Transmission Audio Facilities at NBC New York”, SMPTE Journal, Oct. 1976, vol. 85, p. 814-816.
Kubota et al., “The Videomelter”, SMPTE Journal, Nov. 1978, Vol. 87, p. 753-754.
Mausler, “Video Transmission Video Facilities at NBC New York”, SMPTE Journal, Oct. 1976, vol. 85, p. 811-814.
Negri, “Hardware Interface Considerations for a Multi-Channel Television Automation System”, SMPTE Journal, Nov. 1976, vol. 85, p. 869-872.
Paganuzzi, “Communication in NBC Television Central”, SMPTE Journal, Nov. 1976, vol. 85, p. 866-869.
Roth et al., “Functional Capabilities of a Computer Control System for Television Switching”, SMPTE Journal, Oct. 1976, vol. 85, p. 806-811.
Rourke, “Television Studio Design—Signal Routing and Measurement”, SMPTE Journal, Sep. 1979, vol. 88, p. 607-609.
Yanney, Sixty-Device Remote-Control System for NBC's Television Central Project, SMPTE Journal, Nov. 1976, vol. 85, p. 873-877.
Young et al., “Developments in Computer-Controlled Television Switches”, Journal of the SMPTE, Aug. 1973, vol. 82, p. 658-661.
Young et al., “The Automation of Small Television Stations”, Journal of the SMPTE, Oct. 1971, vol. 80, p. 806-811.
Zborowski, “Automatic Transmission Systems for Television”, SMPTE Journal, Jun. 1978, vol. 87, p. 383-385.
“Landmark forms cable weather news network,” Editor & Publisher, (Aug. 8, 1981) p. 15.
“Broadcast Teletext Specification,” published jointly by British Broadcasting Corporation, Independent Broadcasting Authority, British Radio Equipment Manufacturers' Association (Sep. 1976), pp. 1-24.
“Colormax Cable captioning—16,000,000 Subs Need It!,” Colormax Electronic Corp. (advertisement), 3 pages.
“7609 Sat-A-Dat Decoder/Controller,” Group W Satellite Communications (advertisement) 2 pages.
“Teletext Timing Chain Circuit (SAA5020),” (Aug. 1978), pp. 109.
“Teletext Video Processor (SAA 5030),” Mullard (Dec. 1979), pp. 1-9.
“Video Text Decoder Systems (Signetics)”, Phillips IC Product Line Summary (May 1981), pp. 15-16.
“Teletext Acquisition and Control Circuit (SAA5040 Series),” Mullard (Jun. 1980), pp. 1-16.
“Asynchronous Data Transmission System Series 2100 Vidata,”Wagener Communications, Inc. (advertisement), 2 pages.
“Zenith VIRTEXTTM . . . Vertical Interval Region Text and Graphics,” Zenith Radio Corporation (flyer), 7 paged.
Anon, “Television Network Automated by Microcomputer-Controlled Channels,” Computer Design, vol. 15, No. 11, (Nov. 1976), pp. 50, 59, 62, 66 and 70.
Kinik, et al., “A Network Control System for Television Distribution by Satellite,” Journal of the SMPTE, Feb. 1975, vo. 84 No. 2, pp. 63-67.
Chiddix, “Videocassette Banks Automate Delayed Satellite Programming,” Aug. 1978, TV Comunications, pp. 38-39.
Curnal, et al., “Automating Television Operating Centers,” Bell Laboratories Record, Mar. 1978, pp. 65-70.
Baran, Paul (Packetcable Inc.), “Packetcable: A New Interactive Cable System Technology,” Cable '82—Technical Papers, National Cable Television Association 31st Annual Convention, Las Vegas, NV, May 3-5, 1982 (“CABLE '82”), pp. 1-6.
Tunmann, Ernest O. (Tele-Engineering Corporation), “Two-Way Cable TV Technologies,” Cable '82, pp. 7-15.
Dickinson, Robert V.C. (E-COM Corporation), “Carriage of Multiple One-Way and Interactive Service on CATV Networks,” Cable '82, pp. 16-21.
McNamara, R.P. et al. (Sytek, Incorporated), “MetroNet: an Overview of a CATV Regional Data Network,” Cable '82, pp. 22-31.
Eissler, Charles (Oak Communications Systems), “Addressable Control for the Small System,” Cable '82, pp. 32-36.
Mesiya, M.F. et al. (Times Fiber Communications, Inc.), “Mini-Hub Addressable Distribution System for Hi-Rise Application,” Cable '82, pp. 37-42.
Thomas, William L. (Zenith Radio Corporation), “Full Field Tiered Addressable Teletext,” Cable '82, pp. 44 46.
Langley, Don et al. (University of Cincinnati and Rice-Richter Associates), “Interactive Split Screen Teleconferencing,” Cable '82, pp. 47-50.
Klare, Stephen W. (Scientific—Atlanta), “Bandwidth-Efficient, High-Speed Modems for Cable Systems,” Cable '82, pp. 72-78.
Jubert, Jay (Wang Laboratories, Inc.), “Wangnet, a Cable-Based Localnet,” Cable '82, pp. 79-81.
Switzer, I. (Cable America, Inc.), “Cable TV Advances and TV Receiver Compatibility Problems,” Cable '82, pp. 114-118.
Skrobko, John (Scientific-Atlanta Incorporated), “Improving CATV System Reliability with Automatic Status Monitoring and Bridger Switching,” Cable '82, pp. 133-137.
Dahlquist, John (Jerrold Division, General Instrument Corporation), “Techniques for Improving Continuity of Service in a CATV Distribution System,” Abstract, Cable '82, p. 138.
Polishuk, Paul Dr. (Information Gatekeepers, Inc.) “Present Status of Fiber Optics Technology and its Impact on the CATV Industry,” Cable '82, pp. 142-147.
Dufresne, Michel (Videotron Communications LTEE), “New Services: an Integrated Cable Networks's Approach,” Cable '82, pp. 156-160.
Stanton, Gary W. (Southern Satellite Systems), “Downloading and Addressing via Teletext,” Cable '82, pp. 161-165.
Goldberg, Efrem I. (GTE Laboratories Incorporated), “Videotex on Two-Way Cable Television Systems—Some Technical Considerations,” Cable '82, pp. 166-174.
Noirel, Yves (CCETT/Rennes, France), “Abstract of paper entitled Data Broadcasting: “Didon” and “Diode” Protocols,” Cable '82, pp. 175-179.
von Meister, William F. (Digital Music Company), “The Home Music Store,” Cable '82, pp. 180-182.
Brown, Jr., Robert R. (Cima Telephone and Television), “Inter Bridger Trunking for Information Services,” Cable '82, pp. 183-189.
Alvord, Charles, Dr. (Communications Technology Management, Inc.), “Creating Standards for Interconnect Systems,” Cable '82, pp. 190-196.
Schrock, Clifford B. (Cable Bus Systems Corporation), “Can Noise and Ingress Coexist with Two-Way Services?,” Cable '82, pp. 205-209.
The Weather Channel, “The Weather Star Satellite Transponder Addressable Receiver,” Operation/Installation Manual, Rev. 01.5/82.
Lafayette, Jon, “TV ad monitor system starts tests here Mon.,” New York Post, Oct. 18, 1985, p. 63.
Jones, Stacy V., “Patents/Monitoring Display of TV Ads,” The New York Times, Oct. 19, p. 34.
Remley, F.M., “Television Technology,” SMPTE Journal, May 1982, pp. 458-462.
Proposed American National Standard, “Electrical and Mechanical Characteristics for Digital Control Interface,” SMPTE Journal, Sep. 1982, pp. 888-897.
Zaludek, Jerry P., “Videotape—Past, Present, and Future,” SMPTE Journal, Apr. 1982, pp. 356-360.
Kary, Michael Loran, “Video-Assisted Film Editing System,” SMPTE Journal, Jun. 1982, pp. 547-551.
Glover, S. “Automatic Switching at the Edmonton Television Studios,” SMPTE Journal, Nov. 1966, vol. 75, pp. 1089-1092.
Barlow, M.W.S., “The Remote Control of Multiplexed Telecine Chains,” SMPTE Journal, Apr. 1971, vol. 80, pp. 270-275.
Campbell, Keith D., “An Automated Video-Tape Editing System,” Journal of the SMPTE, Mar. 1970, vol. 79, pp. 191-194.
Bonney, R.B. et al., “A Proposed Standard Time and Control Code for Video-Tape Editing,” Journal of the SMPTE, Mar. 1970, vol. 79, pp. 186-190.
Barlow, M., Letter to the Editor, “Re: Coding and Packaging Film for Broadcasting,” Journal of the SMPTE, Oct. 1969, vol. 78, p. 889.
Barlow, M., Letter to the Editor, “Re: Automation of Telecine Equipment,” Journal of the SMPTE, Apr. 1970, vol. 79, pp. 345-346.
Matley, J. Brian, “A Digital Framestore Synchronizer,” SMPTE Journal, Jun. 1976, vol. 85, pp. 385-388.
Connolly, W.G. et al., “The Electronic Still Store: A Digital System for the Storage and Display of Still Pictures,” SMPTE Journal, Aug. 1976, vol. 85, pp. 609-613.
Sadashige, K., “Overview of Time-Base Correction Techniques and Their Applications,” SMPTE Journal, Oct. 1976, vol. 85, pp. 787-791.
Siocos, C.A., “Satellite Technical and Operational Committee—Television (STOC-TV) Guidelines for Waveform Graticules,” SMPTE Journal, Nov. 1976, vol. 85, pp. 878-879.
“Index to Subjects—Jan.-Dec. 1976 • vol. 85,” 1976 Index to SMPTE Journal, SMPTE Journal, vol. 85, pp. I-5 to I-13, I-15.
Rodgers, Richard W., “Design Considerations for a Transmission and Distribution System for SMPTE Time-Code Signals,” SMPTE Journal, Feb. 1977, vol. 86, pp. 69-70.
Allan, J.J., III, et al., “A Computer-Controlled Super-8 Projector,” SMPTE Journal, Jul. 1977, vol. 86, pp. 488-489.
“Index to Subjects—Jan.-Dec. 1977 • vol. 86,” 1977 Index to SMPTE Journal, SMPTE Journal, vol. 86, pp. I-5 to I-14.
Hamalainen, KJ., “Videotape Editing Systems Using Microprocessors,” SMPTE Journal, Jun. 1978, Vol. 87, pp. 379-382.
McCoy, Reginald F.H., “A New Digital Video Special-Effects Equipment,” SMPTE Journal, Jan. 1978, vol. 87, pp. 20-23.
Leonard, Eugene, “Considerations Regarding the Use of Digital Data to Generate Video Backgrounds,” SMPTE Journal, Aug. 1978, vol. 87, pp. 499-504.
Swetland, George R., “Applying the SMPTE Time and Control Code to Television Audio Post Production,” SMPTE Journal, Aug. 1978, vol. 87, pp. 508-512.
Moore, J.K., et al., “A Recent Innovation in Digital Special Effects, The CBS ‘Action Track’ System,” SMPTE Journal, Oct. 1978, vol. 87, pp. 673-676.
Connolly, William G., “Videotape Program Production at CBS Studio Center,” SMPTE Journal, Nov. 1978, vol. 87, pp. 761-763.
Nicholls, William C., “A New Edit Room Using One-

Inch Continuous-Field Helical VTRs,” SMPTE Journal, Nov. 1978, vol. 87, pp. 764-766.
“Index to vol. 87 Jan.-Dec. 1978,” SMPTE Journal, Part II to Jan. 1979 SMPTE Journal, pp. I-1, I-4 to I-14.
Wetmore, R. Evans, “System Performance Objectives and Acceptance Testing of the Public Television Satellite Interconnection System,” SMPTE Journal, Feb. 1979, vol. 88, pp. 101-111.
Bates, George W., “Cut/Lap: A New Method for Programmable Fades and Soft Edit Transitions Using a Single Source VTR,” SMPTE Journal, Mar. 1979, vol. 88, pp. 160-161.
Douglas, W. Gordon, “PBS Satellite Interconnection Technical Operations and Maintenance,” SMPTE Journal, Mar. 1979, vol. 88, pp. 162-163.
Oliphant, Andrew et al., “A Digital Telecine Processing Channel,” SMPTE Journal, Jul. 1979, vol. 88, pp. 474-483.
Bates, George W. et al., “Time Code Error Correction Utilizing a Microprocessor,” SMPTE Journal, Oct. 1979, vol. 88, pp. 712-715.
Geise, Heinz-Dieter, “The Use of Microcomputers and Microprocessors in Modern VTR Control,” SMPTE Journal, Dec. 1979, vol. 88, pp. 831-834.
“Index to Subjects—Jan.-Dec. 1979 • vol. 88,” 1979 Index to SMPTE Journal, SMPTE Journal, vol. 88, pp. I-4 to I-10.
“Advanced Transmission Techniques,” SMPTE Journal, Report on the 121st Technical Conference, Jan. 1980, vol. 89, pp. 31-32.
“Anderson: Progress Committee Report for 1979—Television,” SMPTE Journal, May 1980, vol. 89, pp. 324-328.
SMPTE Journal, May 1980, vol. 89, p. 391, no title.
“The TCR-119 Reader,” Gray Engineering Laboratories, SMPTE Journal, May 1980, vol. 89, p. 438. (advertisement).
Hopkins, Robert S., Jr., “Report of the Committee on New Technology,” SMPTE Journal, Jun. 1980, vol. 89, pp. 449-450.
Limb, J.O. et al., “An Interframe Coding Technique for Broadcast Television,” SMPTE Journal, Jun. 1980, vol. 89, p. 451.
“Preliminary List of Papers,” SMPTE Journal, Sep. 1980, vol. 89, p. 677.
Davis, John T., “Automation of a Production Switching System,” SMPTE Journal, Oct. 1980, vol. 89, pp. 725-727.
“Video Tape Recording Glossary,” SMPTE Journal, Oct. 1980, vol. 89, p. 733.
Advertisement, “CTVM 3 series of Barco master control color monitors”, “Barco TV Modulator, Model VSBM 1/S”, “VICMACS Type 1724 Vertical Interval Machine Control System”, “Videotape Editing Controllers by US JVC Corp., RM-70U, RM-82U, RM-88U”, SMPTE Journal, Oct. 1980, Vol. 89, p. 820 et seq.
Ciciora, Walter, “Teletext Systems: Considering the Prospective User,” SMPTE Journal, Nov. 1980, vol. 89, pp. 846-849.
Hathaway, R.A. et al., “Development and Design of the Ampex Auto Scan Tracking (AST) System,” SMPTE Journal, Dec. 1980, vol. 89, p. 931.
Connor, Denis J., “Network Distribution of Digital Television Signals,” SMPTE Journal, Dec. 1980, vol. 89, pp. 935-938.
“Index to Subjects—Jan.-Dec. 1980 • vol. 89,” 1980 Index to SMPTE Journal, SMPTE Journal, pp. I-5 to I-11.
“Index to SMPTE-Sponsored American National Standards, Society Recommended Practices, and Engineering Committee Recommendations,” 1980 Index to SMPTE Journal, SMPTE Journal, pp. I-15 to I-20.
Table of Contents, SMPTE Journal, Feb. 1981, vol. 90, No. 2, 1 page.
Table of Contents, SMPTE Journal, Mar. 1981, vol. 90, No. 3, 1 page.
Table of Contents, SMPTE Journal, Apr. 1981, vol. 90, No. 4,1 page.
Table of Contents, SMPTE Journal, May 1981, vol. 90, No. 5, 1 page.
“Television,” SMPTE Journal, May 1981, pp. 375-379.
Table of Contents, SMPTE Journal, Jan. 1981, vol. 90, No. 1,1 page.
Table of Contents, SMPTE Journal, Jun. 1981, vol. 90, No. 6, 1 page.
Table of Contents, SMPTE Journal, Jul. 1981, vol. 90, No. 7,1 page.
Table of Contents, SMPTE Journal, Aug. 1981, vol. 90, No. 8, 1 page.
“American National Standard” “time and control code for video and audio tape for 525-line/ 60-field television systems,” SMPTE Journal, Aug. 1981, pp. 716-717.
Table of Contents, SMPTE Journal, Sep. 1981, vol. 90, No. 9, 1 page.
“Proposed SMPTE Recommended Practice” “Vertical Interval Time and Control Code Video Tape for 525-Line/ 60-Field Television Systems,” SMPTE Journal, Sep. 1981, pp. 800-801.
Table of Contents, SMPTE Journal, Oct. 1981, vol. 90, No. 10, 1 page.
Kaufman, Paul A. et al., “The Du Art Frame Count Cueing System,” SMPTE Journal, Oct. 1981, pp. 979-981.
“American National Standard” “dimensions of video, audio and tracking control records on 2-in video magnetic tape quadruplex recorded at 15 and 7.5 in/ s,” SMPTE Journal, Oct. 1981, pp. 988-989.
Table of Contents, SMPTE Journal, Nov. 1981, vol. 90, No. 11, 1 page.
Table of Contents, SMPTE Journal, Dec. 1981, vol. 90, No. 12, 1 page.
Powers, Kerns H., “A Hierarchy of Digital Standards for Teleproduction in the Year 2001,” SMPTE Journal, Dec. 1981, pp. 1150-1151.
“Application of Direct Broadcast Satellite Corporation for a Direct Broadcast Satellite System,” Before the Federal Communications Commission, Washington, D.C., Jul. 16, 1981.
Rice, Michael, “Toward Enhancing the Social Benefits of Electronic Publishing,” Report of an Aspen Institute Planning Meeting, Communications and Society Forum Report, Feb. 25-26, 1987.
Rice, Michael, “Toward Improved Computer Software for Education and Entertainment in the Home,” Report of an Aspen Institute Planning Meeting, Communications and Society Forum Report, Jun. 3-4, 1987.
Gano, Steve, “Teaching ‘real world’ systems,” 1 page, 1987.
Pollack, Andrew, “Putting 25,000 Pages on a CD,” New York Times, 1 page, Mar. 4, 1987.
Gano, Steve, “A Draft of a Request for Proposals Concerning the Adoption of Computer Technology in the Home,” Jan. 1988, Draft © 1987 Steve Gano.
COMSAT, “Communications Satellite Corporation Magazine,” No. 7, 1982.
COMSAT, “Satellite to Home Pay Television,” no date.
COMSAT, “Annual Report 1981.”
“Comsat's STC: Poised for blastoff into TV's space frontier,” Broadcasting, Feb. 22, 1982, pp. 38-45.
Taylor, John P., “Comsat bid to FCC for DBS authorization: Questions of finances, ‘localism,’ monopoly,” Television/Radio Age, May 4, 1981, pp. 42-44 and 80-81.
Taylor, John P., “Fourteen DBS authorization applications to FCC differ greatly in both structure and operations,” Television/Radio Age, Oct. 5, 1981, pp. 40-42 and 116-119.
Taylor, John P., “Comsat bid to FCC for DBS authorization: Is direct broadcasting the wave of the future?”, Television/Radio Age, Mar. 23, 1981, pp. A-22-24 and A-26 and A-28-31.
“At Sequent Computer, One Size Fits All,” Business Week, Sep. 17, 1984, 1 page.
Hayashi, Alden, M., “Can Logic Automation model its way to success?”, Electronic Business, Aug. 1, 1986, 1 page.
“Imager monitors the bloodstream,” High Technology, Mar. 1987, 1 page.
Merritt, Christopher R.B., M.D., “Doppler blood flow imaging: integrating flow with tissue data,” Diagnostic Imaging, Nov. 1986, pp. 146-155.
Eisenhammer, John, “Will Europe's Satellite TV Achieve Lift-Off?”, Business, Aug. 1986, pp. 56-60.
Hayes, Thomas C., “New M.C.C. Chief's Strategy: To Speed Payoff on Research,” The New York Times, Jun. 24, 1987, 2 pages.
Collins, Glenn, “For Many, a Vast Wasteland Has Become a Brave New World,” New York Times, no date, 2 pages.
Gleick, James, “U.S. Is Lagging on Forecasting World Weather,” The New York TimesFeb. 15, 1987, 2 pages.
Browning, E.S., “Sony's Perseverance Helped It Win Market for Mini-CD Players,” Wall Street Journal, Feb. 27, 1986, 2 pages.
Dragutsky, Paula, “Data in the bank is booming biz,” New York Post, Apr. 29, 1985, 1 page.
Wayne, Leslie, “Dismantling the Innovative D.R.I.,” The New York Times, Dec. 16, 1984, 2 pages.
Sanger, David E., “A Computer Full of Surprises,” The New York Times, May 8, 1987, 2 pages.
Hoffman, Paul, “The Next Leap in Computers,” The New York Times Magazine, Dec. 7, 1986, 6 pages.
Taylor, Thayer C., “Laptops and the Sales Force: New Stars in the Sky,” pp. 81-84.
Parker, Edwin B., “Satellite micro earth stations—a small investment with big returns,” Data Communications, Jan. 1983, 5 pages.
“Micro Key System,” Video Associates Labs, product description.
“SMPTE Journal Five-Year Index 1971-1975,” SMPTE Journal.
“SMPTE Journal Five-Year Index 1976-1980,” SMPTE Journal.
“SMPTE Journal Five-Year Index 1981-1985,” SMPTE Journal, vol. 95, No. 1, Jan. 1986.
“SMPTE Journal Five-Year Index 1986-1990,” SMPTE Journal, vol. 100, No. 1, Jan. 1991.
“Annual Index 1982,” SMPTE Journal, vol. 91, Jan.-Dec. 1982, pp. 1253-1263.
“Highlights, SMPTE, The 124th SMPTE Conference,” SMPTE Journal, Jan. 1983, p. 3.
SMPTE Journal, Jan. 1983, pp. 64, 69-70, 87-90, 92-98.
“Highlights, SMPTE,” SMPTE Journal, Feb. 1983, p. 163.
“Highlights, SMPTE,” SMPTE Journal, Mar. 1983, p. 267.
“Highlights, SMPTE,” SMPTE Journal, Apr. 1983, p. 355.
Thomas, L. Merle, “Television,” SMPTE Journal, Apr. 1983, pp. 407-410.
“Highlights, SMPTE,” SMPTE Journal, May 1983, p. 547.
“Highlights, SMPTE,” SMPTE Journal, Jun. 1983, p. 627.
“Highlights, SMPTE,” SMPTE Journal, Jul. 1983, p. 715.
“Highlights, SMPTE,” SMPTE Journal, Aug. 1983, p. 803.
Tooms, Michael S. et al., “The Evolution of a Comprehensive Computer Support System for the Television Operation,” SMPTE Journal, Aug. 1983, pp. 824-833.
“Highlights, SMPTE,” SMPTE Journal, Sep. 1983, p. 907.
“Highlights, SMPTE,” SMPTE Journal, Oct. 1983, p. 1027.
“Highlights, SMPTE,” SMPTE Journal, Nov. 1983, p. 1173.
“Highlights, SMPTE,” SMPTE Journal, Dec. 1983, p. 1269.
“Index to Subjects—Jan.-Dec. 1983 • vol. 92,” Annual Index 1983, SMPTE Journal, pp. 1385-1391.
“Highlights, SMPTE,” SMPTE Journal, Jan. 1984, p. 3.
“Index to Subjects—Jan.-Dec. 1984 • vol. 93,” Annual Index 1984, SMPTE Journal, pp. 1211-1217.
“Highlights, SMPTE,” SMPTE Journal, Jan. 1985, p. 3.
Barlow, Michael W.S., “Application of Personal Computers in Engineering,” SMPTE Journal, Jan. 1985, pp. 27-30.
“Television Systems and Broadcast Technology,” SMPTE Journal, Jan. 1985, pp. 172-175.
“Highlights, SMPTE,” SMPTE Journal, Feb. 1985, p. 181.
Day, Alexander G., “From Studio to Home—How Good is the Electronic Highway?”, SMPTE Journal, Feb. 1985, pp. 216-217.
“Highlights, SMPTE,” SMPTE Journal, Mar. 1985, p. 265.
“Proposed SMPTE Recommended Practice, Storage of Edit Decision Lists on 8-in. Flexible Diskette Media,” SMPTE Journal, Mar. 1985, pp. 353-354.
McCroskey, Donald C., “Television,” SMPTE Journal, Apr. 1985, pp. 382-395.
“Highlights, SMPTE,” SMPTE Journal, Apr. 1985, p. 361.
SMPTE Journal, Apr. 1985, pp. 366-368, 473-478.
“Highlightsd SMPTE,” SMPTE Journal, May 1985, p. 545.
Morii, Yutaka, et al., “A New Master Control System for NHK's Local Stations,” SMPTE Journal, May 1985, pp. 559-564.
Kuca, Jay, et al., “A Fifth-Generation Routing Switcher Control System,” SMPTE Journal, May 1985, pp. 566-571.
“Highlights, SMPTE,” SMPTE Journal, Jun. 1985, p. 641.
“Highlights, SMPTE,” SMPTE Journal, Jul. 1985, p. 721.
Busby, E.S., “Digital Component Television Made Simple,” SMPTE Journal, Jul. 1985, pp. 759-762.
“Highlights, SMPTE,” SMPTE Journal, Aug. 1985, p. 801.
Rayner, Bruce, “High-Level Switcher Interface Improves Editing Techniques,” , SMPTE Journal, Aug. 1985, pp. 810-813.
Hayes, Donald R., “Vertical-Interval Encoding for the Recordable Laser Videodisc,” SMPTE Journal, Aug. 1985, pp. 814-820.
“SMPTE Recommended Practice, Video Record Parameters for 1-in Type C Helical-Scan Video Tape Recording,” SMPTE Journal, Aug. 1985, pp. 872-873.
“Proposed SMPTE Recommended Practice, Time and Control Codes for 24, 25, or 30 Frame-Per-Second Motion-Picture Systems,” SMPTE Journal, Aug. 1985, pp. 874-876.
“Proposed SMPTE Recommended Practice, Data Tracks on Low-Dispersion Magnetic Coatings on 35-mm Motion-Picture Film,” SMPTE Journal, Aug. 1985, pp. 877-878.
“Highlights,” SMPTE Journal, Sep. 1985, p. 881.
“Proposed SMPTE Recommended Practice, Control Message Archtecture,” SMPTE Journal, Sep. 1985, pp. 990-991.
“Proposed SMPTE Recommended Practice, Tributary Interconnection,” SMPTE Journal, Sep. 1985, pp. 992-995.
“Highlights,” SMPTE Journal, Oct. 1985, p. 1001.
Zimmerman, Frank, “Hybrid Circuit Construction for Routing Switchers,” SMPTE Journal, Oct. 1985, pp. 1015-1019.
“Highlights,” SMPTE Journal, Nov. 1985, p. 1155.
Sabatier, J., et al., “The D2-MAC-Packet System for All Transmission Channels,”SMPTE Journal, Nov. 1985, pp. 1173-1179.
“Highlights,” SMPTE Journal, Dec. 1985, p. 1243.
Shiraishi, Yuma, “History of Home Videotape Recorder Development,” SMPTE Journal, Dec. 1985, pp. 1257-1263.
“Index to Subjects—Jan.-Dec. 1985 • vol. 94,” Annual Index 1985, SMPTE Journal, pp. 1351-1357.
“Highlights,” SMPTE Journal, Jan. 1986, p. 3.
“Proposed American National Standard for component digital video recording—19-mm type D-1 cassette— tape cassette,” SMPTE Journal, Mar. 1986, pp. 362-363.
“Index to SMPTE-Sponsored American National Standards and Society Recommended Practices and Engineering Guidelines,” Smpte Journal, Annual Index 1987, pp. 1258, 1260-1262.
Rice, Philip, et al., “Development of the First Optical Videodisc,” SMPTE Journal, Mar. 1982, pp. 277-284.
Kubota, Yasuo, “The Videomelter,” SMPTE Journal, vol. 87, Nov. 1978, pp. 753-754.
“USTV Direct Satellite to Home Television Service,” General Instrument News Release, Aug. 1982.
“Second Senior Executive Conference on Productivity Improvement,” SALT, Society for Applied Learning Technology, Dec. 4-6, 1986.
“New Publications for 1987 from The Videodisc Monitor,” advertisement, 2 pages.
“The Videodisc Monitor,” vol. IV: No. 10, Oct. 1986.
“The Videodisc Monitor,” vol. IV: No. 12, Dec. 1986.
Smith, Charles C., “Computer Update” “Program Notes,” TWA Ambassador, Sep. 1982, pp. 74-90.
Harrar, George, “Opening Information Floodgates,” American Way, Oct. 1982, pp. 53-56.
“Publishers Go Electronic,” Business Week, Jun. 11, 1984, pp. 84-97.
“Serious Software Helps the Home Computer Grow Up,” Business Week, Jun. 11, 1984, pp. 114-118.
“Videoconferencing: No Longer Just a Sideshow,” Business Week, Nov. 12, 1984, pp. 116-120.
“Ratings War,” Forbes, Aug. 1, 1983, 1 page.
Kindel, Stephen, “Pictures at an exhibition,” Forbes, Aug. 1, 1983, pp. 137-139.
“Merrill Lynch and IBM Form Joint Venture to Market Financial Data Systems and Services,” News Release, Mar. 1984, 2 pages.
Branch, Charles, “Text Over Video,” PC World, Dec. 1983, pp. 202-210.
“Window on the World” “The Home Information Revolution,” 1981, Business Week, Jun. 29, 1981, pp. 74-83.
“Correspondence School Via Computer Is Planned,” The New York Times, Sep. 13, 1983, 1 page.
“‘Smart’ Digital TV Sets May Replace The Boob Tube,” Business Week, Sep. 26, 1983, p. 160, 2 pages.
“Round Two for Home Computer Makers,” Business Week, Sep. 19, 1983, pp. 93-95.
“High Technology,” Business Week, Jan. 11, 1982, pp. 74-79.
Kneale, Dennis, “Stations That Show Only Ads Attract a Lot of TV Watchers,” The Wall Street Journal, Sep. 23, 1982, 1 page.
“Video Kitchen” “Commercial Prospects for Food Data-Base Management,” Prospectus for a Multiclient Study from American Information Exchange, 1982.
I/Net Corporation, Company Brochure.
Diamond, David, “Why Television's Business Programs Haven't Turned a Profit,”The New York Times, Jun. 16, 1985, pp. F10-F11.
Tagliabue, John, “ITT's Key. West German Unit,” The New York Times, Apr. 29, 1985, p. D8.
Tagliaferro, John, “Tag Lines,” 1982, 1 page.
“PBS Project With Merrill,” newsarticle, Apr. 4, 1983.
“Merrill Lynch sinks $4M into FNN's Data Cast service,” Cable Vision, Mar. 11, 1985, p. 23.
“Merrill Lynch bullish on new data service,” Electronic Media, Feb. 28, 1985, p. 4.
“Merrill Lynch Plans Stock-Quote Service Linked to IBM's PC,” The Wall Street Journal, Mar. 21, 1984, p. 60.
Sanger, David E., “Public TV Joins Venture to Send Finance Data to Computer Users,” The New York Times, Feb. 21, 1985, pp. 1 and D8.
Dolnick, Edward, “Inventing The Future,” The New York Times Magazine, Aug. 23, 1987.
“Everything you've always wanted to know about TV Ratings,” A.C. Nielsen Company, brochure, 1978.
“Management With The Nielsen Retail Index System,” A.C. Nielsen Company, 1980.
Pollack, Andrew, “Computer Programs as University Teachers,” The New York Times, 4 pages.
“Business Television” “Changing the Way America Does Business,” PSN, 1986.
Merrell, Richard G., “TAC-Timer,” 1986 NCTA Technical Papers, 1986, pp. 203-206.
“Universal Remote Control,” Radio Shack, Owner's Manual, 4 pages.
Long, Michael, E., “The VCR Interface,” 1986 NCTA Technical Papers, 1986, pp. 197-202.
“Flexible programmieren mit. VPS,” Funkschau, (German publication), 1985. (translation provided).
Chase, Scott, “Corporate Satellite Networks No Longer A Luxury But Rather A Necessity,” Via Statellite, Jul. 1987, pp. 18-21.
Diamond, Sam, “Turning Television Into A Business Tool,” High Technology, Apr. 1987, 2 pages.
“The Portable Plus Personal Computer,” Hewlett-Packard, advertisement, Mar. 1986.
“The Portable Plus for Professionals in Motion,” Hewlett-Packard, advertisement, Jul. 1985.
“KBTV Kodak Business TeleVision,” Kodak, brochure, Sep. 1987.
“Broadway Video,” Brochure, Feb. 1987.
“Digital TV set to burst on U.S. mart,” New York Post, 2 pages.
Prospectus, VIKONICS, Inc., Jul. 14, 1987.
Prospectus, DIGITEXT, Inc., Feb. 27, 1986.
Prospectus, Color Systems Technology, Inc., Aug. 13, 1986.
Prospectus, Cheyenne Software, Inc., Oct. 3, 1985.
1986 Annual Report, the Allen Group Inc.
Wilson, Donald H., “A Process for Creating a National Legal Computer Research Service in The United States,” remarks at the conference on World Peace Through World Law and World Assembly of Judges, Belgrade Yugoslavia, Jul. 23, 1971.
Pollack, Andrew, “Teletext is Ready for Debut,” The New York Times, Feb. 18, 1983, 2 pages.
“Sunny Outlook for Landmark's John Wynne; Landmark Communications Inc.,” Broadcasting, Lexis-Nexis, Jul. 27, 1987.
“Applications Information VCR-3001A Universal Videocassette Control Module,” Channelmatic, Inc., product description, 5 pages, Mar. 1984.
Killion, Bill, “Advertising,” SAT Guide, Jul. 1982.
“PL-5A Price List Typical Systems,” Channelmatic, Inc., Nov. 1984.
“Channelmatic SPOTMATIC Random Access Commercial Insert System,” Channelmatic, Inc., product description, Jul. 1983.
Killion, Bill, “Automatic Commercial Insertion Equipment for the Unattended Insertion of Local Advertising,” paper presented at 33rd Annual National Cable Television Association Convention, Jun. 1984.
“Channelmatic SDA-1A Sync Stripping Pulse Distribution Amplifier,” Channelmatic, Inc., product description, 1 page.
“Broadcast Quality Random Access Commercial Insert System Featuring the Channelmatic SPOTMATIC Z,” Channelmatic, Inc., product description, 1 page.
“Audio Level Detector ALD-3000A,” Channelmatic, Inc., product description, Mar. 1984, 1 page.
“CVS-3000A Commercial Verification System,” Channelmatic, Inc., product description, Mar. 1984, 1 page.
“Four-Channel Commercial Insert System Featuring the Channelmatic CIS-1A SPOTMATIC JR,” Channelmatic, Inc., product description, 1 page.
“Local Program Playback System Featuring the Channelmatic VCR-3005A-5 Videocassette Sequencer,” Channelmatic, Inc., product description, 1 page.
“Channelmatic BBX-1A Billibox Bypass and Test Switcher,” Channelmatic, Inc., product description, 2 pages.
“Channelmatic's Handimod I,” Channelmatic, Inc., product description, 2 pages.
“SPOTMATIC JR. Single VCR Commercial Insert System,” Channelmatic, Inc., product description, 4 pages.
“PL-1A Price List, 3000 Series Equipment,” Channelmatic, Inc., Feb. 1985, 2 pages.
“PL-2B 1000 Series Price List, 1.75× 19 Inch Rack Mounting,” Channelmatic, Inc., Jul. 1985.
“VPD-3001A Signal Presence Detector,” Channelmatic, Inc., product description, Mar. 1984, 1 page.
“Channelmatic CMG-3008A 8-page Color Message Generator Module,” Channelmatic, Inc., product description, 1 page.
“Tone Switching System Model TSS-3000A-1,” Channelmatic, Inc., product description, 1 page.
“Series 3000 Satellite Receiver Controllers,” Channelmatic, Inc., product description, 2 pages.
“Channelmatic UAA-6A Universal Audio Amplifier,” Channelmatic, Inc., product description, 1 page.
“Channelmatic ADA-3006A Audio Distribution Amplifier,” Channelmatic, Inc., product description, 1 page.
“Channelmatic ADA-1A, ADA-2A, ADA-3A Audio Distribution Amplifier,” Channelmatic, Inc., product description, 1 page.
“Channelmatic VDA-3006A Video Distribution Amplifier,” Channelmatic, Inc., product description, 1 page.
“Channelmatic VDA-1A, VDA-2A, VDA-3A Video Distribution Amplifier,” Channelmatic, Inc., product description, 1 page.
“Channelmatic AVS-10A Patchmaster,” Channelmatic, Inc., product description, 2 pages.
“Broadcast Break Sequencer Model BBS-3006A,” Channelmatic, Inc., product description, Mar. 1984, 1 page.
“Audio-Video Emergency Alert System,” Channelmatic, Inc., product description, Mar. 1984, 2 page.
“VCR Automation System LPS-3000A,” Channelmatic, Inc., product description, Mar. 1984, 2 pages.
“Clock Switching System Model CCS-3000A-1,” Channelmatic, Inc., product description, Mar. 1984, 1 page.
“Channelmatic PCM-3000A Superclock Programmable Controller Module,” Channelmatic, Inc., product description, 2 pages.
“PL-3A Price List Videocassette Changers,” Channelmatic, Inc., Nov. 1984, 1 page.
Channelmatic, Inc., advertisement, “Looking at Local Ad Sales?”, 1 page.
“Channelmatic Television Switching and Control Equipment 3000 Series,” Channelmatic, Inc., product descriptions, 1984.
“CIS-1A SPOTMATIC JR. & CIS-2A Li' l Moneymaker,” Channelmatic, Inc., Installation and Operations Guide, 950-0066-00, V1.0.
“1986 Annual Report to Shareowners, Customers and Employees,” The Dun & Bradstreet Corporation.
Landro, Laura, “CBS, AT&T May Start Videotex Business in '83 if 7-Month Home Test Is Successful,” The Wall Street Journal, Sep. 28, 1982, p. 8.
“Video Visionaries,” Review, Sep. 1982, pp. 95-103.
“Video-Game Boom Continues Despite Computer Price War,” Technology, The Wall Street Journal, Oct. 1, 1982, p. 33.
Dunn, Donald H., editor, “How to Pick Your Stocks by Computer,” Personal Business, Business Week, Sep. 12, 1983, pp. 121-122.
Sandberg-Diment, Erik, “Instruction Without Inspiration,” Personal Computers, The New York Times, Sep. 6, 1983, p. C4.
Pace, Eric, “Videotex: Luring Advertisers,” The New York Times, Oct. 14, 1982.
“Will Knight-Ridder Make News With Videotex?”, Media, Business Week, Aug. 8, 1983, pp. 59-60.
Kneale, Dennis, et al., “Merrill Lynch and IBM Unveil Venture To Deliver Stock-Quote Data to IBM PCs,” The Wall Street Journal, Mar. 22, 1984, p. 8.
“Merrill Lynch Joins I.B.M. in Venture, ” The New York Times, Mar. 22, 1984, 1 page.
Kneale, Dennis, “Merrill Lynch Plans Stock-Quote Service Linked to I.B.M.'s PC,” The Wall Street Journal, Mar. 21, 1984, 1 page.
“A Videotex Pioneer Pushes Into the U.S. Market,” Business Week, Apr. 16, 1984, p. 63.
Gregg, Gail, “The Boom In On-Line Information,” New Businesses, Venture, Mar. 1984, pp. 98-102.
Sanger, David E., “Trading Stock by Computer,” Technology, The New York Times, Mar. 29, 1984, 1 page.
Saddler, Jeanne et al., “COMSAT, Citing Risks, Ends Negotiations With Prudential on Satellite—TV Venture,” The Wall Street Journal, Dec. 3, 1984, p. 51.
Pollack, Andrew, “Electronic Almanacs Are There for the Asking,” The New York Times, Mar. 18, 1984, 1 page.
Connelly, Mike, “Knight-Ridder's Cutbacks at Viewtron Show Videotex Revolution Is Faltering,” The Wall Street Journal, Nov. 2, 1984, p. 42.
“Time Inc. May Drop Teletext,” newspaper article, 1 page.
Pollack, Andrew, “Time Inc. Drops Teletext Experiment,” newspaper article, 1 page.
Arenson, Karen W., “CBS, I.B.M., Sears Join in Videotex Venture,” newspaper article, 1 page.
“E.F. Hutton to Start A Videotex Service,” newspaper article, 1 page.
Dunn, Donald H., editor, “Devices That Let You Track Stocks Like A Floor Trader,” Personal Business, Business Week, Jul. 25, 1983, pp. 83-84.
“United Satellite Racing Competitors,” newspaper article, 1 page.
Fantel, Hans, “Videotex to Expand What a TV Can Do,” article, 1 page.
“Zenith and Taft Co. In Teletext Venture,” The New York Times, p. D3.
Pollack, Andrew, “Videodisk's Data Future,” The New York Times, Oct. 7, 1982, p. D2.
Pace, Eric, “Videotex in Years To Come,” The New York Times, Sep. 1, 1982, p. D15.
“Advanced Minicomputer-based Systems for Banking and Financial Institutions,” Money Management Systems, Incorporated, brochure, 1980, 9 pages.
Middleton, Teresa, “The Education Utility,” American Educator, Winter 1986, pp. 18-25.
Perlez, Jane, “Teachers Act to Increase Decision-Making Power,” The New York Times, Jul. 8, 1986, 1 page.
Couzens, Michael, “Invasion of the People Meters,” Channels, Jun. 1986, pp. 40-45.
Behrens, Steve, “People Meters vs. The Gold Standard,” Channels, p. 72, Sep. 1987.
Diamond, Edwin, “Attack of the People Meters,” New York, pp. 38-41, Aug. 24, 1987.
“Ratings Brawl (Is Nielsen losing its grip?)” Time, p. 57, Jul. 20, 1987.
Sheets, Kenneth R., “No go. TV networks nix new high-tech rating system,” U.S. News & World Report, p. 39, Jul. 20, 1987.
Lieberman, David, “The Networks' Big Headache,” Business Week, pp. 26-28, Jul. 6, 1987.
Barbieri, Rich, “Perfecting the Body Count,” Channels, p. 15, Jun. 1987.
Dumaine, Brian, “Who's Gypping Whom in TV Ads?”, Fortune, pp. 78-79, Jul. 6, 1987.
Behrens, Steve, “People Meters' Upside,” Channels, p. 19, May 1987.
“People Meters,” The New Yorker, pp. 24-25, Mar. 2, 1987.
Zoglin, Richard, “Peering Back at the Viewer,” Time, p. 84, Jun. 30, 1986.
Kanner, Bernice, “Now, People Meters,” New York, 3 pages, May 19, 1986.
Trachtenberg, Jeffrey A., “Anybody home out there?”, Forbes, pp. 169-170, May 19, 1986.
Waters, Harry F. et al., “Tuning In on the Viewer,” Newsweek, p. 68, Mar. 4, 1985.
Berss, Marcia, “Tune in,” Forbes, p. 227, Sep. 24, 1984.
“Financial News Network Eyeing Teletext Service Tied To Home Computers,” International Videotex Teletext News, Dec. 1983, 1 page.
Prospectus, Financial News Network, Inc., Jul. 13, 1982.
“ELRA Group Cablemark Reports vol. I,” SAT Guide, Feb. 1982, 1 page.
“DOWALERT,” Brochure, 1983, 6 pages.
New York Stock Exchange, Inc., Computer Input Services, Schedule of Monthly Charges, Aug. 1, 1981, 1 page.
New York Stock Exchange, Inc., Market Data Services, Schedule of Monthly Charges, Jan. 1, 1982, 1 page.
“Introducing DowAlert,” brochure, 1982, 8 pages.
“Dow Jones Cable Information Services,” Company Brochure, 1982.
“Personal Portfolio Button,” brochure, JS&A, 1982.
“Business news breakthrough from Dow Jones,” advertisement, The Wall Street Journal, Jun. 10, 1982, p. 47.
“Charting A More Profitable Course for Your Portfolio?”, advertisement, Dow Jones News/Retrieval, The Wall Street Journal, Jun. 24, 1982, p. 40.
“Now you can get the precise business and financial news you want . . . throughout the business day.” “Dow Alert,” brochure, 1982.
Promotional letter, “Dow Jones Cable News,” Dow Jones & Company, Inc., Jan. 1, 1982, 2 pages.
“1981 Annual Report,” Quotron Systems, Inc.
Prospectus, Quotron Systems, Inc., Nov. 1982.
“Threat to Quotron Discounted,” The New York Times, 1984, 2 pages.
“Quotron's Central Position in Statistics Service Is Facing Competition From Several Challengers,” The Wall Street Journal, Feb. 2, 1984, p. 59.
“European Security Prices Are Now Available As New Service From Quotron Systems,” News Release, Sep. 21, 1984, 1 page.
“1983 Annual Report,” Quotron Systems, Inc.
“How to increase training productivity through Videodisc and Microcomputer systems,” seminar brochure, 1981.
“The Revolution Continues . . . ”, Regency Systems, Inc., company brochure, 1984, 6 pages.
“How personal computers can backfire,” Business Week, Jul. 12, 1982, pp. 56-59.
“Taking control of computer spending,” Business Week, Jul. 12, 1982, pp. 59-60.
Meserve, Everett T., “A History of Rabbits,” Datamation, pp. 188-192.
Meserve, Everett T. (BILL), “The Future of Rabbits,” Datamation, Jan. 1982, pp. 130-136.
PC Ideas International Corp., product catalog, 7 pages, 1985.
UltiTech, Inc., “The Portable Interactive Videodisc System 3,” brochure, 1985.
Sony Video Communications, “LDP-1000A Laser Videodisc Player,” product description, 1983, 2 pages.
TMS Inc., Digital Laser Technology, product information, 1984, 16 pages.
Sony Video Communications, “Videodisc, Premastering and Formatting,” brochure, 1982.
Pioneer Video, Inc., “LD-V4000 Industrial Laserdisc Player,” product description, Feb. 1984, 2 pages.
Pioneer Video, Inc., “LD-V6000 Industrial Laserdisc Player,” product description, May 1985, 2 pages.
Pioneer Video, Inc., “LD-V6000 Industrial Laserdisc Player,” products price list, Apr. 1984, 1 page.
Pioneer Video, Inc., “Customer Support Publications,” 2 pages.
Pioneer Video, Inc., “Pioneer LD-V1000 Laserdisc Player,” price list, Feb. 1984, 1 page.
Pioneer Video, Inc., “LD-V1000 Laserdisc Player,” product description, Feb. 1985, 2 pages.
Pioneer Video, Inc., “LD-V4000 Laserdisc Player,” products price list, Dec. 1983, 1 page.
“Space-Age Navigation For The Family Car,” reprinted from Business Week, Jun. 18, 1984, 2 pages.
Held, Thomas et al., “Videodisc to Lure and to Learn,” reprinted from The Journal of the International Television Association, International Television, May 1984, 4 pages.
Sony, “SONY View System, The Intelligent Video System,” product description, 1985, 2 pages.
Sony, “LDP-2000 Series, VideoDisc Players,” brochure, 1985, 12 pages.
Digital, “Vax Producer, A System for Creating Interactive Applications,” product bulletin, May 1984, 8 pages.
“Laserdata Announces Trio Encoder at the SALT Show,” News release, Aug. 21, 1985, 3 pages.
“Laserdata Still Frame Audio Premastering Guide,” advertisement, 3 pages.
“Laserdata Trio Encoder Product Description,” product description, 4 pages.
“PC Trio,” Laserdata, product description, 2 pages.
Laserdata, price list, Aug. 1, 1985, 4 pages.
News Release, Industrial Training Corporation, Merger of IIAT with and into ITC, Jun. 11, 1985, 1 page.
“A Touch-Screen Disc (Devlin Interviews the Producer),” reprinted magazine, E&ITV magazine, vol. 16, No. 5, May 1984, 4 pages.
“Interactive Videodisc in Education and Training,” Seventh Annual Conference, Society for Applied Learning Technology, conference agenda, Aug. 1985.
“Inter Active Video from . . . . ” BCD Associates, brochure, 1985.
The Videodisc Monitor, vol. II: No. 8, Aug. 1984, 16 pages.
“Products From The VideoDisc Monitor,” order form, 2 pages.
“Interactive Video Served on a disc,” Scotch Laser Videodisc, 3M, brochure, 8 pages.
Scotch Laser Videodisc, Price List, May 1, 1984, 2 pages.
“How to find the pot of gold at the end of this rainbow,” Scotch Videodisc, 3M, brochure.
Scotch Laser Videodisc, Prices for Special Services, Feb. 15, 1984, 2 pages.
Scotch Laser Videodisc, Master Tape Specifications, May 1984, 2 pages.
“IEV Graphics and Interactive Video Products,” IEV Corporation, product information, 1 page.
“IEV-20 High-Resolution Color Graphics for The IBM-PC,” IEV Corporation, product description, 1 page.
“IEV-40 Graphics Overlay and Video Disc and Tape Control for the IBM-PC,” IEV Corporation, product description, 1 page.
“IEV-10 A Direct Replacement for the IBM Color/Graphics Adapter Card with Video Overlay Capability,” IEV Corporation, product description, 1 page.
“Model 60 Graphics Overlay and Disc or Tape Controller,” IEV Corporation, product description, 1 page.
“The IRIS System,” Silicon Graphics, Inc., product brochure, 1983.
“IRIS 1400, High Performance Geometry Computer,” Silicon Graphics, Inc., product specification, 2 pages.
“IRIS 1000/1200, High Performance Geometry Terminals,” Silicon Graphics, Inc., product specification, 2 pages.
“IRIS 1500, High Performance Geometry Computer,” Silicon Graphics, Inc., product specification, 2 pages.
“The IRIS Graphics System,” Silicon Graphics, Inc., system description, 1983, 6 pages.
“UNIX, Operating System for the IRIS Geometry Computer,” Silicon Graphics, Inc., product specification, 1 page.
“IRIS Graphics Library, Programming Support for IRIS Systems,” Silicon Graphics, Inc., product specification, 1 page.
“Ethernet, 10mbit per second Local Area Network,” Silicon Graphics, Inc., product specification, 2 pages.
Sony, Sony Video Communications, “PVM-1910/PVM-1911 19” Trinitron Color Video Monitors, product brochure, 1984, 8 pages.
“Computer Controls for Video Production,” EECO EECODER Still-Frame Decoder VAC-300, product brochure, 1984, 4 pages.
O'Donnell, John et al., “Videodisc Program Production Manual,” Sony, 1981.
“Still Frame Audio Encoder,” Laserdata, product description, 2 pages.
“TRIO 110,” Laserdata, product description, 2 pages.
“LD-V6000, Industrial Laserdisc Player,” A Technical Perspective, Pioneer Video, Inc., May 1984.
“SWSD System,” Stills With Sound and Data, Pioneer Video, Inc., product description, Aug. 1984, 2 pages.
Pioneer Video, Inc., Price List, Industrial Disc Replication and Program Development Services, May 1984, 4 pages.
“V: Link 1000,” Visage, Inc., product description, 1984, 2 pages.
“The University of Delaware Videodisc Music Series presents Interactive Videodisc Instruction in Music,” advertisement, 8 pages.
“Interactive Videodisc In Education and Training,” Sixth Annual Conference, Society for Applied Learning Technology, conference agenda, Aug. 1984, 2 pages.
“Sony engineering introduces to industry the new Sony Laser VideoDisc,” Sony Video Communications, product brochure, 12 pages.
“GraphOver 9500,” Hi-Res Graphics Overlays for NTSC Video, New Media Graphics, product description, 1983, 4 pages.
“New Horizons in Interactive Video,” Puffin product advertisement, IEV Corporation, 2 pages.
IEV Feb. 1985 Price List, 1 page.
“Fast Forth” “No Other Forth Comes Close,” IEV Corporation, product brochure.
“Pro 68 Advanced Technology 16/32 Bit Co-Processor for IBM PC, PC/XT, PC/AT and Capatibles,” Hallock Systems Company, Inc., product description, 7 pages.
“Pro 68 Software Facts,” Hallock Systems Company, Inc., product description, 6 pages.
“Pro CAD A Pro 68 Software Product,” Hallock Systems Company, Inc., product description, 4 pages.
“V: Station 2000 System,” Visage, Inc., product description, 2 pages.
“Upgrade Packages,” Visage, Inc., product description, 1 page.
“Development Software,” Visage, Inc., product description, 4 pages.
“V: Link Modules,” Visage, Inc., product description, 4 pages.
Visage, Price List, Visage, Inc., Apr. 1985, 4 pages.
Kalowski, Nathan, “Player, Monitor, Interface,” reprinted from Jan. 1985 issue of Data Training, 4 pages.
“Five Authoring Languages Now Available for Use With Visage Interactive Video Systems,” Visage News Release, Visage, Inc., Mar. 18, 1985, 5 pages.
“GraphOver 9500,” Hi-Res Hi-Speed Graphics Overlays for Videodisc, New Media Graphics, product description, 1985, 4 pages.
“PC-VideoGraph,” Hi-Res PC Graphics For Videotaping or Display, New Media Graphics, product description, 1985, 4 pages.
“PC-GraphOver,” Interactive Video With Graphics Overlays, New Media Graphics, product description, 1985, 4 pages.
“Off-the-shelf raster scan display generator creates composite video image,” reprinted by Defense Systems Review and Military Communications, Jan. 1985, p. 55.
“The NTN Entertainment Network,” NTN Entertainment Network, programming information sheet, 2 pages.
Dickey, Glenn, “A Game That's Better Than the Real Thing,” San Francisco Chronicle, Dec. 17, 1985, p. 63.
Connell, Steve, “Arm-Chair Quarterbacking (Computer football game makes fans the play-callers),” The Sacramento Union, Jan. 23, 1986, 3 pages.
Gunn, William, “Get Ready For Monday Night Football,” Night Club and Bar, Jul. 1986, pp. 20-22.
Brack, Fred, “QB1 Anyone?”, Alaska Airlines, Aug. 1986, 2 pages.
Dickey, Glenn, “QB1: Bringing The Game Into the Bar,” Sport Magazine, Oct. 1986, 1 page.
“The Most Exciting Customer and Revenue Building Program Since Sports were First Shown on T.V.”, NTN Communications, Inc., QB1 product brochure, 1986, 4 pages.
“NTN—The Company,” NTN Communications, Inc., company description, 1 page.
NTN Communications, Inc., “Trivia Countdown,” and “Trivia Showdown,” product descriptions, 1 page.
Pottle, Jack T. et al., “The Impact of Competitive Distribution Technologies on Cable Television,” Report, prepared for The National Cable Television Association, Mar. 1982.
“Consumer Electronics: A $40-Billion American Industry,” a report prepared by Arthur D. Little, Inc. for the Electronic Industries Association/Consumer Electronics Group, Apr. 1985.
“Camp,” Arbitron Cable, The Arbitron Company, product brochure, May 1980, 8 pages.
“Times Mirror Videotex/Infomart Joint Venture,” Times Mirror, Background, Jan. 8, 1982, 3 pages.
Cable Advertising Conference Feb. 9, 1982, conference agenda, Cabletelevision Advertising Bureau, Inc., 6 pages.
True Stereo Television, Series 1600 Warner-Amex Stereo Processers, Wegener Communications, Inc., product description, 1982, 3 pages.
“EUROM—a single-chip c.r.t. controller for videotex,” Mullard, Technical publication, 1984, 12 pages.
“EUROM” “A display IC for CEPT Videotex,” Mullard, product information, Feb. 1984, 6 pages.
“Satellite-Delivered Text Service Signs 4 Carriers,” Multichannel News, Jun. 18, 1984, p. 18.
Aarsteinsen, Barbara, “How the Chip Spurs TV Growth,” “The promise of digital televison has stirred the U.S. Industry,”The New York Times, May 20, 1984, 1 page.
Pollack, Andrew, “As Usual, Here Comes The Japanese,” The New York Times, May 20, 1984, 1 page.
“Unleashing IBM Could Help a Satellite Venture Blast Off,” Business Week, May 28, 1984, 2 pages.
Mayer, Martin, “Here comes Ku-band,” Forbes, May 21, 1984, pp. 65-72.
“The UCSD p-System Version IV,” SOFTECH Microsystems, product description, 2 pages.
“UCSD p-System Languages, Version IV UCSD Pascal, Fortran-77, Basic and Assembler,” SOFTECH Microsystems, product description, 2 pages.
“Add-On Features, UCSD p-System Version IV,” SOFTECH Microsystems, product description, 2 pages.
“USCD p-System, Version IV.1,” SOFTECH Microsystems, product description, 4 pages.
SOFTECH Microsystems, Product Order Form, Oct. 1982, 2 pages.
“Homecast, A Consumer Market Service from ICM Services,” Chase Econometrics, product brochure, 2 pages.
“Consumer Systems Industry Service,” research notes, Gartner Group, Inc., Jun. 22, 1983, 13 pages.
Download, Monthly Newsletter, vol. 1, No. 1, May 1984.
Nocera, Joseph, “Death of a Computer,” Texas Monthly, Apr. 1984.
Special Report, Business Week, Jul. 16, 1984, pp. 84-111.
Zenith, Video Hi-Tech Component TV, product brochure, Aug. 1982, 8 pages.
Ferretti, Fred, “For Major-League Times, Addicts, A Way to Win a Pennant,” The New York Times, Jul. 8, 1980, 1 page.
Friedman, Jack, “The Most Peppery Game Since The Hot Stove League? It's Rotisserie Baseball,” People weekly, Apr. 23, 1984, 2 pages.
“Information Package for MDS Applicants,” Department of Communications Radio Frequency Management Division, Oct. 1986.
Department of Transport and Communications Radio Frequency Management Division, Licensing Procedures for Ancillary Communications Services (ACS).
Minister for Communications Guidelines for Provision of Video and Audio Entertainment and Information Services, Oct. 13, 1986.
Christopher, Maurine, “BAR cable service set,” Advertising Age, Sep. 21, 1981, pp. 68 & 72.
“In this corner, Digisonics!”, Media Decisions, Jun. 1968, 5 pages.
“Did the ad run?”, Media Decisions, Jul. 1969, pp. 44 et seq.
“Digisonics TV Monitor System Finds Defenders,” Advertising Age, Dec. 8, 1969, 1 page.
“Merrill Lynch Advanced Applications Systems,” Advanced Automation Systems Department, system description, publication date unknown.
Dougherty, Philip, “Gathering Intelligence for Profit,” newspaper article, 1981, p. D7.
“Vidbits,” Advertising Age, Sep. 21, 1981, p. 70.
“Measuring The Cable Audience,” Ogilvy & Mather, Advertising, 1980, pp. H1-H8.
Cooney, John E., “Counting Cable's Gold Coins,” View, Sep. 1981, 4 pages.
“Cable TV Advertising,” Paul Kogan Associates, Inc., No. 22, Feb. 18, 1981, 6 pages,
“IDC begins monitoring,” At Deadline, Broadcasting, Sep. 14, 1970, p. 9.
“Contraband code,” Closed Circuit, Broadcasting, Sep. 28, 1970, 1 page.
“Listeners,” Closed Circuit, Broadcasting, 1 page.
“Digisonics violated standards, says BAR,” Broadcasting, Oct. 5, 1970, pp. 21-23.
“Talent pay code put off,” At Deadline, Broadcasting, Nov. 9, 1970, p. 9.
“Digisonics' Aim Is Info Bank, Not Just Proof of Performance,” Advertising Age, Nov. 9, 1970, 4 pages.
“Digisonics pushes its coding method,” Broadcasting, Dec. 7, 1970, p. 37.
“No. Digisonics friends show in comments,” Broadcasting, May 24, 1971, p. 62.
“Digisonics' dilemma,” Media Decisions, Jun. 1971, 6 pages.
“IDC encoding system still alive at FCC,” Broadcasting, Sep. 27, 1971, p. 31.
Howard, Niles A., “IDC drops tv monitoring; mulls revival,” reprint from Advertising Age, Feb. 3, 1975, 1 page.
“Teleproof I” “An Exciting New Development of International Digisonics Corporation,” product brochure, 13 pages.
“Teleproof 2,” IDC Services, Inc., product description, 6 pages.
“The Best Reason to Buy Odetics On-Air Automation Systems Today?” Advertisement, Odetics Broadcast, 1 page.
“Advertising on Cable” “Automatic Commercial Insertion-Plus-Automatic Print-Out Verification With the New Ad Machine and Ad Log,” Advertisement, Tele-Engineering Corporation, 4 pages.
“NTN Communications, Inc. Entertainment Network Program Schedule,” Advertisement, NTN Communications, Inc., 2 pages.
“Interactive Football for The Home,” Advertisement, U.S. Videotel, 2 pages.
“NTN Programming,” Advertisement, NTN Communications, Inc., 2 pages.
“Electronic Surveys, Inc. Signs NTN Contract,” News Release, NTN Communications, Inc. Carlsbad, CA, 2 pages.
Andrews, Edmund L., “AT&T Sees The Future in Games,” The New York Times, Business Day, 2 pages.
“Total Teleconferencing Solutions for Your Communication and Training Needs,” brochure, Parker Communications Corporation, Parker Associates.
“PSN Signs Fourth High Technology Customer As Amdahl Corporation Implements Business Television,” PSN News, News Release, Private Satellite Network, Inc., 2 pages.
PSN, Private Satellite Network, Inc., product information for MISTS, Mass Interactive Simultaneous Telecommunications System, 6 pages.
“Broadcasting Services,” brochure, PSN, Private Satellite Network, Inc., 6 pages.
Martin, Vivian B., “Companies use TV talk shows to inform workers,” The Hartford Journal, Business Weekly, 1 page.
Fisher, Lawrence M., “TV: Growing Corporate Tool,” The New York Times, 2 pages.
Vaughan, Kimithy, “Evolution of Corporate Television Networks,” Teleconference, The Business Communication Magazine, pp. 38-40.
“New in Teleconferencing Resources,” advertisement, Parker Associates, 4 pages.
“Business Television Services,” Irwin Communications, Inc., brochure, 1 page.
“Corporate Capabilities,” Irwin Communications, Inc., brochure, 1 page.
“Introducing RSVP: The latest breakthrough for cable!”, advertisement, Arbitron, 1 page.
“Viacom Unit Will Tap Into Pay Networks,” newspaper article, 1 page.
“Show or Tell?”, Advertising material, The Weather Star 4000, The Weather Channel, 8 pages.
“Video Hi-Tech Component TV,” CV 1950, CV 510, CV 540, CV 520, CV 150, advertisement, Zenith Radio Corporation, 4 pages.
“Point-To-Multipoint Data Communication Network Services,” product description, Equatorial Communications Company, 5 pages.
“C-100 Series Micro Earth Stations for Satellite Data Distribution,” product description, Equatorial Communications Company, 4 pages.
“C-200 Micro Earth Station for Satellite Data Communications,” product description, Equatorial Communications Company, 3 pages.
“Interactive Data Communication Network Services,” product description, Equatorial Communications Company, 3 pages.
“Data Communications Network Description,” product description, Equatorial Communications Company, 5 pages.
Landro, Laura, “Satellite Company Signs Merill Lynch For Its Video Service,” The Wall Street Journal, 1 page.
“Elite 2000 Creation System,” IBM Compatible Information Display System, advertisement, Display Systems International, Inc., 1 page.
“Video Database Management . . . When Words Are Not Enough,” advertisement, U.S. Video, 2 pages.
“U.S. Video presents . . . True Computer-Video Overlays,” The Raster Master RM-110, product description, U.S. Video, 2 pages.
“Now You Can Find Just the Right Image Every Time Quickly and Easily with Image Search and the IBM PC/XT,” advertisement, Online Computer Systems, Inc., 1 page.
“Touch the Future Today,” advertisement, MetaMedia Systems, Inc., 1 page.
“Training solutions for the 80's and beyond,” advertisement, Online Computer Systems, Inc., 2 pages.
“Experienced Educator/Trainers,” “Use the new Pilot plus Training System to develop highly interactive courseware on your IBM PC that will run on most microcomputers,” advertisement, Online Computer Systems, Inc., 2 pages.
“Technical Specifications for Hardware and Software Products,” Online Products Corporation, 9 pages.
“Museum Image Series,” product information, Online Products Corporation, 2 pages.
“Omega Vision,” product description, Omega Management Group Corp., 2 pages.
“Visage Visual Information Systems,” Interactive Video Products, brochure, Visage, Inc.
“Now the Future Is Clear,” Visage Visual Information Systems, brochure, Visage, Inc., 4 pages.
“Speak Through The Power of Today's Technology,” QUEST, product description, Allen Communication, 4 pages.
“Universal Video Controller,” product description, Allen Communication, 2 pages.
“Video-Microcomputer Interface,” product description, Allen Communication, 2 pages.
“The Leader in Interactive Video,” advertisement, Allen Communication, 2 pages.
“Allen Communication Price List,” Allen Communication, 1 page.
“Touché Interactive videodisc training by IIAT,” advertisement, IIAT, International Institute of Applied Technology, Inc., 1 page.
“Touché Interactive Videodisc System,” product description, IIAT, International Institute of Applied Technology, Inc., 2 pages.
“IIAT ST-1000A IIAT Training Station,” product description, IIAT, International Institute of Applied Technology, Inc., 2 pages.
“IIAT ST-1000B IIAT Training Station,” product description, IIAT, International Institute of Applied Technology, Inc., 2 pages.
“IIAT International Institute of Applied Technology, Inc.,” company description, 4 pages.
“Pilot plus Course Authoring Interpreter,” IIAT Products, product description, 1 page.
“Touch Monitor/ Videodisc Player Interface Card and Video Switch Box,” IIAT Products, product description, 1 page.
“Touch Sensitive Monitor Interface Card for Apple II,” IIAT Products, product description, 1 page.
“Touchpoint, A Total Eclipse of Existing Technology,” product description, Allen Communication, 2 pages.
“Totally Integrated Interactive System—TII-PC,” product description, Allen Communication, 2 pages.
“Most Valuable Peripheral,” product description, Allen Communication, 2 pages.
“Allen Communication Introduces Integrated Interactive Video Systems,” brochure, 2 pages.
“Automation, Control and Monitoring Systems,” brochure, Jasmin Electronics Limited.
“jasmin,” company brochure, Jasmin Electronics Limited, 4 pages.
“jasmin Teletext Systems,” advertisement, Jasmin Electronics Limited, 4 pages.
“jasmin Process Control Systems,” advertisement, Jasmin Electronics Limited, 4 pages.
“Teleprompter of Denver Channel Line Up,” 2 pages.
“City of Seal Beach Channel Utilization Guide,” 3 pages.
“V: Link 1910: The Single-Slot VGA Interactive Video Solution,” product description, Visage, Inc., 4 pages.
“The OASYS Authoring System,” advertisement, Online Computer Systems, Inc., 1 page.
“Advertisers Guide to Cable TV Terms,” brochure, Cable Ad Associates, Inc.
“Cable Audience Measurement Study,” A Prospectus based upon recommendations of the Ad Hoc Cable Measurement Committee, pamphlet.
Kane, Sharyn et al., “Technology in the First Person,” reprint from Delta Air Lines' SKY magazine, 4 pages.
“Training Systems,” brochure, WICAT systems, Training Systems Division, 4 pages.
“The Consultant,” advertisement, Co-Opportunities, Sales Development Information Systems, a division of Jefferson-Pilot Communications Company.
“Introducing Spot Data,” “Cable Ad Sales Just Got Better,” advertisement, TV Data Technologies, 4 pages.
“Do You Want to be Making $5-$10 a Subscriber—Right Now?” “Join Us in Our Success!”, advertisement, Multi-Image Systems, 1page.
“Mediastar,” “The message is clear,” brochure, Multi-Image Systems, 6 pages.
“Art to Go” “The Business Builder in a Box,” advertisement, Multi-Image Systems, 1 page.
“Few Things in Life Work As Well As TAPSCAN,” advertisement, Tapscan Incorporated, 6 pages.
“Dow Jones Cable News Service Daily Features Financial Markets,” product summary, 1 page.
“Financial News Network The Business Connection,” brochure, Financial News Network, 8 pages.
“The Financial News Network Means Business,” advertisement, The Financial News Network, 1 page.
“The Dawn of a New Era in Financial News Broadcasting,” advertisement, Financial News Network, 1 page.
“FNN Financial News Network,” advertisement, brief review of research from the Stanford Research Institute's VALS study, and research from ELRA Group Cablemark Reports vol. I, 4 pages.
“Industrial Skills Training With the Touch of a Finger . . . Introducing . . . Activ,” Advanced Concepts in Touch-Interactive Video, advertisement, Industrial Training Corporation, 4 pages.
“eca,” brochure, Effective Communication Arts, Inc., 4 pages.
“ODC 612 Encoder/Generator,” product description, Optical Disc Corporation, 2 pages.
“. . . the Recordable Laser Videodisc—RLV,” product description, Optical Disc Corporation, 2 pages.
“ODC 610 Videodisc Recording System,” product description, Optical Disc Corporation, 2 pages.
“Hitachi New CD-ROM Drive CDR-2500,” product description, Hitachi, Ltd., 2 pages.
“Hitachi CD-ROM Drive CDR-1502S,” product description, Hitachi, Ltd., 6 pages.
James, A., “Oracle—Broadcasting the Written Word,” Wireles Word, Jul. 1975.
Carne, E. Bryan, “The Wired Household,” IEEE Spectrum, Oct. 1979, p. 61-66.
McKenzie, G.A., “Oracle—An Information Broadcasting Service Using Data Transmission in the Vertical Interval ” Journal of the SMPTE, vol. 83, No. 1, Jan. 1974, pp. 6-10.
Edwardson, S.M., “Ceefax: A Proposed New Broadcasting Service,” Journal of the SMPTE, Jan. 1974, p. 14-19.
J. Chiddix, “Automated Videotape Delay of Satellite Transmissions,” Satellite Communications Magazine, May 1978 (reprint—2 pages).
J. Chiddix, “Tape Speed Errors in Line-Locked Videocassette Machines for CATV Applications,” TVC, Nov. 1977 (reprint—2 pages).
CRC Electronics, Inc. Product Description, “Model TD-100-Time Delay Videotape Controller,” 2 pages.
CRC Electronics, Inc., Net Price List—Mar. 1, 1980 (TD-100 Time Delay Videotape Controller), 1 page.
CRC Electronics, Inc. Product Description, “Model P-1000 Videocassette Programmer,” 4 pages.
CRC Electronics, Inc., Net Price List—Jul. 31, 1981 (P-1000 Video Machine Programmer), 1page.
Tunmann, E.O. et al. (Tele-Engineering Corp.), “Microprocessor for CATV Systems,” Cable 78— Technical Papers, National Cable Television Association 27th Annual Convention, New Orleans, LA, Apr. 30-May 3, 1978 (“Cable 78”), pp. 70-75.
Vega, Richard L. (Telecommunications Systems, Inc.), “From Satellite to Earth Station to Studio to S-T-L to MDS Transmitter to the Home; Pay Television Comes to Anchorage, Alaska,” Cable 78, pp. 76-80, 1978.
Wright, James B. et al. (Rockford Cablevision, Inc.), “The Rockford Two-Way Cable Project: Existing and Projected Technology,” Cable 78, pp. 20-28, 1978.
Fannetti, John D. et al. (City of Syracuse), “The Urban Market: Paving the Way for Two-Way Telecommunications,”Cable 78, pp. 29-33, 1978.
Schnee Rolf M. et al. (Heinrich-Hertz-Institut Berlin (West)), “Technical Aspects of Two-Way CATV Systems in Germany,” Cable 78, pp. 34-41, 1979.
Dickinson, Robert V.C. (E-Com Corporation), “A Versatile, Low Cost System for Implementing CATV Auxiliary Services,” Visions '79—Technical Papers, National Cable Television Association 28th Annual Convention, Las Vegas, NV, May 20-23, 1979, (“Vision '79”), pp. 65-72.
Evans, William E. et al. (Manitoba Telephone System), “An Intercity Coaxial Cable Electronic Highway,” Visions '79, pp. 73-79.
Schrock, Clifford B. (C.B. Schrock and Associates, Inc.), “Pay Per View, Security, and Energy Controls Via Cable: The Rippling River Project,” Visions '79, pp. 80-85.
Amell, Richard L. (Cox Cable Communications, Inc.), “Computer-Aided CATV System Design,” Visions '79, pp. 128-133.
Lopinto, John J. (Home Box Office), “Considerations for Implementing Teletext in the Cable System,” Visions of the 80's, pp. 45-48, 1980.
O'Brien, Jr., Thomas E. (General Instrument Corporation), “System Design Criteria of Addressable Terminals Optimized for the CATV Operator,” Visions of the 80's, pp. 89-91, 1980.
Ost, Clarence S. et al. (Electronic Mechanical Products Co.), “High-Security Cable Television Access System ” Visions of the 80's, pp. 92-94, 1980.
Bacon, John C. (Scientific-Atlanta, Inc.), “Is Scrambling the Only Way?,” Visions of the 80's, pp. 95-98, 1980.
Davis, Allen (Home Box Office), “Satellite Security,” Visions of the 80's, pp. 99-100, 1980.
Mannino, Joseph A. (Applied Date Research, Inc.), “Computer Applications in Cable Television,” Visions of the 80's, pp. 116-117, 1980.
Beck, Ann et al. (Manhattan Cable TV), “An Automated Programming Control System for Cable TV,” Visions of the 80's, pp. 122-127, 1980.
Schloss, Robert E. et al. (Omega Communications, Inc.), “Controlling Cable TV Head Ends and Generating Messages by Means of a Micro Computer, ” Visions of the 80's, pp. 136-138, 1980.
Eissler, Charles O. (Oak Communications, Inc.), “Addressable Control,” Cable: '81 The Future of Communications—Technical Papers, National Cable Television Association 30th Annual Convention, Los Angeles, CA, May 29-Jun. 1, 1981 (“Cable: '81”), pp. 29-33.
Schoeneberger, Carl F. (TOCOM, Inc.), “Addressable Terminal Control Using the Vertical Interval,” Cable: '81, pp. 34-40.
Stern, Joseph L. (Stem Telecommunications Corporation), “Addressable Taps,” Cable: '81, p. 41.
Brown, Larry C. (Pioneer Communications of America), “Addressable Control—A Big First Step Toward the Marriage of Computer, Cable, and Consumer,” Cable: '81, pp. 42-46.
Grabowski, Ralph E. (VISIONtec), “The Link Between the Computer and Television,” Cable: '81, pp. 99-100.
Ciciora, Ph.D., W.S. (Zenith Radio Corporation), “Virtext & Virdata: Adventures in Vertical Interval Signaling,” Cable: '81, pp. 101-104.
Gilbert, Bill et al. (TEXSCAN Corporation), “Automatic Status Monitoring for a CATV Plant,” Cable: '81, pp. 124-128.
Ciciora, Walter et al., “An Introduction to Teletext and Viewdata with Comments on Compatibility,” IEEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics, vol. CE-25, No. 3, Jul. 1979 (“Consumer Electronics”), pp. 235-245.
Tanton, N. E. “UK Teletext— Evolution and Potential,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 246-250, 1979.
Bown, H.G. et al., “Telidon: A New Approach to Videotex System Design,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 256-268, 1979.
Chitnis, A..M. et al., “Videotex Services: Network and Terminal Alternatives ” Consumer Electronics, pp. 269-278, 1979.
Hedger, J. “Telesoftware: Home Computing Via Broadcast Teletext,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 279-287, 1979.
Crowther, G.O., “Teletext and Viewdata Systems and Their Possible Extension to Europe and USA,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 288-294, 1979.
Gross, William S., “Info-Text, Newspaper of the Future ” Consumer Electronics, pp. 295-297, 1979.
Robinson, Gary et al., “‘Touch-Tone’ Teletext—A Combined Teletext-Viewdata System,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 298-303, 1979.
O'Connor, Robert A., “Teletext Field Tests,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 304-310, 1979.
Blank, John, “System and Hardware Considerations of Home Terminals With Telephone Computer Access,” Comsumer Electronics, pp. 311-317, 1979.
Plummer, Robert P. et al., “4004 Futures for Teletext and Videotex in the U.S.,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 318-326, 1979.
Marti, B. et al., The Antiope Videotex System, Consumer Electronics, pp. 327-333, 1979.
Frandon, P. et al., “Antiope LSI,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 334-338, 1979.
Crowther, G.O., “Teletext and Viewdata Costs As Applied to the U.S. Market,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 339-344, 1979.
Mothersole, Peter L., “Teletext Signal Generation Equipment and system,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 345-352, 1979.
Harden, Brian, “Teletext/Viewdata LSI,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 353-358, 1979.
Swanson, E. et al., “An Integrated Serial to Parallel Converter for Teletext Application,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 359-361, 1979.
Neal, C. Bailey et al., “A Frequency-Domain Interpretation of Echoes and Their Effect on Teletext Data Reception,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 362-377, 1979.
Goyal, Shri K. et al., “Reception of Teletext Under Multipath Conditions,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 378-392, 1979.
Prosser, Howard F., “Set Top Adapter Considerations for Teletext,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 393-399, 1979.
Suzuki, Tadahiko et al., Television Receiver Design Aspects for Employing Teletext LSI, Consumer Electronics, pp. 400-405, 1979.
Baer, Ralph H., “Tele-Briefs—A Novel User-Selectable Real Time News Headline Service for Cable TV,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 406-408, 1979.
Sherry, L.A., “Teletext Field Trials in the United Kingdom,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 409-423, 1979.
Clifford, Colin, “A Universal Controller for Text Display Systems,” Consumer Electronics, pp. 424-429, 1979.
Barlow, “The Design of an Automatic Machine Assignment System”, Journal of the SMPTE, Jul. 1975, vol. 84, p. 532-537.
Barlow, “The Automation of Large Program Routing Switchers”, SMPTE Journal, Jul. 1979, vol. 88, p. 493-497.
Barlow, “The Computer Control of Multiple-Bus Switchers”, SMPTE Journal, Sep. 1976, vol. 85, p. 720-723.
Barlow, “The Assurance of Reliability”, SMPTE Journal, Feb. 1976, vol. 85, p. 73-75.
Barlow, “Some Features of Computer-Controlled Television Station Switchers”, Journal of the SMPTE, Mar. 1972, vol. 81, p. 179-183.
Barlow et al., “A Universal Software for Automatic Switchers” SMPTE Journal, Oct. 1978, vol. 87, p. 682-683.
Butler, “PCM-Multiplexed Audio in a Large Audio Routing Switcher”, SMPTE Journal, Nov. 1976, vol. 85, p. 875-877.
Dickson et al., “An Automated Network Center”, Journal of the SMPTE, Jul. 1975, vol. 84, p. 529-532.
Edmondson et al., “NBC Switching Central”, SMPTE Journal, Oct. 1976, vol. 85, p. 795-805.
Flemming, “NBC Television Central—An Overview”, SMPTE Journal, Oct. 1976, vol. 85, p. 792-795.
Horowitz, “CBS” New-Technology Station, WBBM-T, SMPTE Journal, Mar. 1978, vol. 87, p. 141-146.
Krochmal et al., “Television Transmission Audio Facilities at NBC New York”, SMPTE Journal, Oct. 1976, vol. 85, p. 814-816.
Kubota et al., “The Videomelter”, SMPTE Journal, Nov. 1978, vol. 87, p. 753-754.
Mausler, “Video Transmission Video Facilities at NBC New York”, SMPTE Journal, Oct. 1976, vol. 85, p. 811-814.
Negri, “Hardware Interface Considerations for a Multi-Channel Television Automation System”, SMPTE Journal, Nov. 1976, vol. 85, p. 869-872.
Paganuzzi, “Communication in NBC Television Central”, SMPTE Journal, Nov. 1976, vol. 85, p. 866-869.
Roth et al., “Functional Capabilities of a Computer Control System for Television Switching”, SMPTE Journal, Oct. 1976, vol. 85, p. 806-811.
Rourke, “Television Studio Design—Signal Routing and Measurement”, SMPTE Journal, Sep. 1979, vol. 88, p. 607-609.
Yanney, Sixty-Device Remote-Control System for NBC's Television Central Project, SMPTE Journal, Nov. 1976, vol. 85, p. 873-877.
Young et al., “Developments in Computer-Controlled Television Switches”, Journal of the SMPTE, Aug. 1973, vol. 82, p. 658-661.
Young et al., “The Automation of Small Television Stations”, Journal of the SMPTE, Oct. 1971, vol. 80, p. 806-811.
Zborowski, “Automatic Transmission Systems for Television”, SMPTE Journal, Jun. 1978, vol. 87, p. 383-385.
“Landmark forms cable weather news network,” Editor & Publisher, (Aug. 8, 1981) p. 15.
“Broadcast Teletext Specification,” published jointly by British Broadcasting Corporartion, Independent Broadcasting Authority, British Radio Equipment Manufacturers' Association (Sep. 1976), pp. 1-24.
“Colormax Cable captioning—16,000,000 Subs NEED IT !,” Colormax Electronic Corp. (advertisement), 3 pages.
“7609 Sat-A-Dat Decoder/Controller,” Group W Satellite Communications (advertisement) 2 pages.
“Teletext Video Processor (SAA 5030),” Mullard (Dec. 1979), pp. 1-9.
“Video Text Decoder Systems (Signetics)”, Phillips IC Product Line Summary (May 1981), pp. 15-16.
“Teletext Acquisition and Control Circuit (SAA5040 Series),” Mullard (Jun. 1980), pp. 1-16.
“Asynchronous Data Transmission System Series 2100 VIDATA, ”Wagener Communications, Inc. (advertisement), 2 pages.
“Zenith Virtexttm . . . Vertical Interval Region Text and Graphics,” Zenith Radio Corporation (flyer), 7 pages.
Anon, “Television Network Automated by Microcomputer-Controlled Channels,” Computer Design, vol. 15, No. 11, (Nov. 1976), pp. 50, 59, 62, 66 and 70.
Kinik, et al., “A Network Control System for Television Distribution by Satellite,” Journal of the SMPTE, Feb. 1975, vo 84, No. 2, pp. 63-67.
Chiddix, “'Videocassette Banks Automate Delayed Satellite Programming,” Aug. 1978, TV Comunications, pp. 38-39.
Curnal, et al., “Automating Television Operating Centers,” Bell Laboratories Record, Mar. 1978, pp. 65-70.
Chorafas, “Interactive Videotex: The Domesticated Computer,” 1981, Petrocelli Books, New York.
Hinton, “Character rounding for the Wireless Word teletex decoder,” Wireless World, Nov. 1978, pp. 49-53, vol. 84 No. 1515, IPC Business Press, United Kingdom.
Kruger, “Speicherfernsehen, Das Digitale Kennungssystem ZPS,” Proceedings 9th International Congress Microelectronics, pp. 39-45.
“Fernsehempfang rund um die Uhr” Funk Technik, Mar. 1981, vol. 36.
Hanas et al.,“An Addressable Satellite Encryption System for Preventing Signal Piracy”, Nov. 1981, pp. 631-635.
National Cable Television Association Executive Seminar Series, Videotex Services, Oct. 1980, pp. 1-155.
Kokado et al.,“A Programmable TV Receiver”, Feb. 1976, pp. 69-82.
J. Hedger et al., “Telesoftware-Value Added Teletext”,Auqust 1980, pp. 555-567.
Marti , B., The Concept of a Universal “Teletext” Jun. 1979, pp. 1-11.
Article re: America's Talk-Back Television Experiment: Qube.
Article re: “Teletext-Applications in Electronic Publishing”.
Article re: A Description of the Broadcast Telidon System.
Article re: EPEOS—Automatic Program Recording System by G. Degoulet.
Article re: Teletext signals transmitted in Uk . . . .
Article re: New services offered by a packet data broadcasting system.
Article re: Philips TV set indicates station tunign and color settings on screen.
Vincent,A.et al., “Telidon Teletest System. Field Triasl” (Abstract).
Rzeszeewski, T.,“A New Telletex Channel”.
Numaguchi, Y. et al., “Compatibility and Transmision Characteristics of Digital Signals Inserted in the Field-Blanking Interval of the Television Signal” (Abstract).
Zimmerman, R. et al., Bildschirmtextesysteme (Abstract).
Pilz, F., “Digital Codierte Uebertragungen von Text and Graphik in den Vertikal-anstastintervallen des Fernsehsignas” (Abstract).
Pilz, F., “Uebertragung Insaitryliches Informationen, Insbesondere von Texten, In Ungenutryten Zeilen der Vertikal-Anstastlueke des Fernsehsignals” (Abstract).
Numaguchi, Y., Wie man Stillstehende Bilder Uebertraegt. Ueberlick Ueber Teletext-, Fernseheinzelbild-Und Faksimile-Uebertrragunsverfahren (Abstract).
Transcript, Videotex, Viewdata, and Teletext: Viewdata '801 Online Conference on Videotex, Viewdata and Teletext, London. Mar. 26k-28, 1980 (Abstract).
Graf, P.H., “Antiope-Uebertragung fuer Breitbandige Videotex-Verteildienste”, 1981.
Poubread, J.J., “Cryptage' du Son Pour la Televiser A Peague” 1981 (Abstract).
Graf, P.H., “Das Videotex-System Antiope” 1980 (Abstract).
Vardo, J.C., “Les Emetteurs de Television et la Diffusion de Donnees” 1980 (Abstract).
Noirel, Y., “Constructin D'un Reseau de Diffusion de Donnees Par Paquets” 1979 (Abstract).
Vardo, J.C., “ Effet de Distorsions en Diffusion de Donnes. II. Resultats Theoriques” 1979 (Abstract).
Baerfuss, C., “Experiences de Diffusion de Donnees dans un Canal de Television” 1979 (Abstract).
Blineau, J., “Liasons Telex a Support Video Sur Des Circuits de Television Internationaux” 1979 (Abstract) .
Dublet, G., “Methodes Utilisees et Principaux Resultats Obtenus Lors D'Une Campagne de esure ‘Didon’ Dans la Refion Centre-est” 1978 (Abstract).
Guinet, Y., “Etude Comparative des Systems de Teletexte en Radio-Diffusion. Quelques Avantages de la Diffusion des Donnees Par Paques Applique an Teletexte” 1977 (Abstract).
Goff, R., “A Review of Teletext” 1978 (Abstract).
Haplinsky, C.H., “The D**(2)B A One Logical Wire Bus for Consumer Applications” 1981.
Cazals, A., “cts Techniques du Teletexte Diffuse” 1981 (Abstract).
Sechet, C. et al., “Epees et la Viideomessagerie” 1981 (Abstract).
Cayet, A. “La Peritelevison Face a Son Public” 1981 (Abstract).
“La Telematique au Service Des Entreprises et des Particliers: Les Reseaux—Les Produits Noveaux—Les Aplication” 1980 (Abstract).
Sechet, C., “Antiope Teletext Captioning” 1980.
Lambert, O. et al., “Antiope and D.R.C.S.” 1980.
Broggini, P., “Antiope: La Bonne Information Au Bon Moment” 1980 (Abstract).
Strauch, D., “(Texte Sur Ecran An Nivenn International. Viewdata 80. Premeire Confirence Mendiale Sur Viewdata, Video text at Teletext, a Londres)” 1980.
Strauch, D., (Las Media De Telecommunication Devant la Rapture. Les Nonvellas Methodes Presentees a L'Exposition International 1979 de Radio (Et Television)) 1979.
Eymery, G., “Le Teletexte Antiope System D'Information a La Demande” 1979-1980 (Abstract).
Brasq , R., “Micro 8 Bits Dans Linite Gestion da Terminal de Videotex Antiope”.
Hughes, JW,“Videotex and Teletext Systems” 1979.
Marti, B., “Terminolegie Des Services de Communication De Texte” 1979.(Abstract).
Schreber, H., “Antiope et Tietae, La Tele-Informatique Sur L'ecran De Votre Televiscur” 1978 (Abstract).
Kulpok, A., “Videotext, Teletext, Bilschimzeiting” 1979 (Abstract).
Cochard, J.P. et al., “Antiope Prototype da Teletexte De Demain” 1979 (Abstract).
Messerschmid, U., “Videotext: Ein Nueur Informations dienst in Fernschrund funk” 1978 (Abstract).
D'Argoevves, T. et al, “La Chaine Vieo: Magnetoscopes, Videodisqhes, Andiodisques” 1979 (Abstract).
Klingler, R., “Les Systemes de Teletexte Unidirectionals” 1978 (Abstract).
Guillermin, J., “Dix Annees D'Antomatisation Au Service De la Radiodiffusion” 1977 (Abstract).
Brusq, R., “Le Terminal de Teletexte Antiope” 1977 (Abstract).
Guinet, Y., “Les Systemes des Teletextes Antiope” 1977 (Abstract).
Schwartz, C. et al., “Specification Preliminarie du Systeme Teletexte Antope” 1977 (Abstract).
United States International Trade Commission notice of decision not to review Admin. law judges initial dismissal of complaint (case involves certain recombinantly Produced Human Growth Hormones).
U.S. I.T.C.'s order granting Complainants Motion to Desqualify the Law Firm of Finnegan, Henderson et al. (Case involves Certain Cardiac Pacemakers and Components therof).
Decision in Ford Motor Company v. Jerome H. Lemelson.
General Counsel's recommendation to U.S.I.T.C. to refuse a patent-based section 337 investigation based on a complaint filed not by the owner of the patents in issue, but by nonexclusive licensees.
Portion of ITC's Industry and Trade Summary serial publication.
ITC Admin. Judges Order #9: Initial Determination Terminating Investigation (Investigation #337-TA-373) .
“LSI Circuits for Teletext and Viewdata—The Lucy Generation” published by Mullard Limited, Mullard House (1981).
2 page article by Nicholas Negroponte in SID 80 Digest titled, “17.4/10:25 a.m.: Soft Fonts”, pp. 184-185.
IEEE Consumer Electronics Jul. 1979 issue from Spring Conference titled, “Consumer Text Display Systems”, pp. 235-429.
Videotext '81 published by Online Conferences Ltd., for the May 20-22, 1981 Confernece, pp. 1-470.
“Teletext and Viewdata Costs as Applied to the U.S. Market” Published by Mullard House (1979), pp. 1-8.
CCETT publication titled, “Didon Diffusion de donnees parpaquets”.
Dalton,C.J., “International Broadcasting Convention” (1968), Sponsors: E.E.A., I.E.E., I.E.E.E., I.E.R.E., etc.
Shorter, D.E.L., “The Distribution of Television Sound by Pulse-Code Modulation Signals Incorporated in the Video Waveform”.
Chorky, J.M., Shorter, D.E.L., “International Broadcasting Convention” (1970), pp. 166-169.
The Implementation of the Sound-in-Sync project for Eurovision (Feb. 1975), pp. 18-22.
Maegele, Manfred, “Digital Transmissions of Two Television Sound Channels in Horizontal Banking”, pp. 68-70.
Weston, J.D., “Digital TV Transmission for the European Communications Satellite” (1974), pp. 318-325.
Golding, L., “A 15 to 25 Mhz Digital Television System for Transmission of Commercial Color Television” (1967), pp. 1-26.
Huth, Gaylord K., Digital Television System Design Study: Final Report (Nov. 28, 1976), prepared for NASA Lyndon B. Johnson Space Center.
Weston, J.D., “Transmission of Television by Pulse Code modulation”, Electrical Communication (1967), pp. 165-172.
Golding, L, “F1-Ditec-A-Digital Television Communications System for Satellite Links,” Telecommunications Numeriques Par Satellite.
Haberle, H. et al.,“Digital TV Transmission via Satellite”, Electrical Communications (1974).
Dirks, H. et al., TV-PCM6 Integrated Sound and Vision Transmission System, Electrical Communication (1977), pp. 61-67.
Talygin, N. V. et al., The “Orbita” Ground Station for Receiving Television Programs Relayed by Satellites, Elecktrovinz, pp. 3-5.
1973 NAB Convention Program, Mar. 25-28, 1973.
Portions of Electonic Engineer's Reference Book (1989)—Multichannel sound systems, Teletext transmission, cable television, ISDN applications, etc.
Yoshido, Junko, teletext back in focus: VBI service revived as alternative delivery system, Electronic Engineering Times (1994) (Abstract).
Blankenhorn, Dana, “ Int'l Teletext expands market (International Teletext Communication Inc.),” NewsBytes (1993) (Abstract).
Collin, Simon, PC Text II (Hardware Review (Shortlist), PC User (1990).
Alfonzetti, Salvatore, “Interworking between teletext and OSI systems,” Computer Communications (1989).
Gabriel, Michael R., Videotex and teletex: Waiting for the 21st century?, Education Technology (1988).
Voorman, J.O. et al., A one-chip Automatic Equalizer for Echo Reduction in Teletext , IIEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics, pp. 512-529.
National Online Meeting: Proceedings—1982 sponsored by: Online Review, pp. 547-551.
MacKenzie, G.A., A Model for the UK Teletext Level 2 Specification (Ref: GTV2 242 Annex 6″ based on the ISO Layer model.
Chambers, J.P., A Domestic Television Program Delivery Services, British Broadcasting Corporation, pp. 1-5.
McKenzie, G.A., UK Teletext—The Engineering Choices, Independent Broadcasting Authority, pp. 1-8.
Adding a new dimension to British television, Electronic Engineering (1974).
Jones, Keith, The Development of Teletext, pp. 1-6.
Marti, B. et al., Discrete, service de television cryptee, Revue de radiodiffusion—television (1975), pp. 24-30.
Ando, Heiichero et al., Still-Picture Broadcasting—A new Informational and Instructional Broadcasting System, IEEE Transactions on Broadcasting (1973), pp. 68-76.
Sauter, Dietrich, “Intelligente Komponenten Fur Das Afra-Bus-Fernsteuersystem”, Rundfunk technischen Mittelungen, pp. 54-57.
Hogel, T. et al., “Afra-Bus-ein digitales Fersteuersysten fur Fernsehstudion Komplexe”, Fernseh-Und Kino-Technik (1974), pp. 13-14.
Hogel, G., “Das Afra-Bus System: 2. Technische Struktur des AFRA-Bus-Systems”, Fernseh-Und Kino-Technik (1975), pp. 395-400.
Krauss, G., “Das Afra-Bus-System: 4. Wirtschaftlich Keits-betrachtungen und Rationalisierung seifekte beim Einsatz des AFRA-Bus-Systems”, Fernseh-Und Kino-Technik (1976), pp. 40-49.
Wellhausen, H. “Das AFRA-Bus-System: 1. Grundsatzliche-Betrachtungen und Rationlisierung und Automatisierun in den Fernschbetreben”, Fernseh-Und Kino-Technik (1975), pp. 353-356.
Sauter, D., “Das AFRA-Bus-System: 3. Einsatz-moglich Keiten des Afra-Bus Systems in Fernsehbetrieben”, Fernseh-Und Kino-Technik (1976), pp. 9-13.
B.B.C.I.B.A., Specification of Standards for information transmission by digitally coded signals in the field—blanking interval of 625-line systems (1974), pp. 5-40.
Centre Commun Des De Television et Telecommunications, Specification du Systeme Di Teletext, Antiope.
Heller, Arthur, VPS—Ein Neues System Zuragsgesteurten Programmanfzeichnung, Rundfunk technisde Mitteilungen, pp. 162-169.
Institut fur Rundfunktechnik, ARD/SDF/ZXEI—Richlinie “Video Programm-System”, pp. 1-30.
Buro der Technischen Kommission, “Niederschrift uber die Besprechung zwischen Rundfunkanstalten (Techik, Sendeleiter) und ZVEI zur Einfuhrung des Video-Programm-Systems”, pp. 1-4.
Buro der Technischen Kommission, Ergebnisse und Festlegungen anda “Blich einer Besprechung zwishen Rundfunanstalten..”, pp. 1-4.
Koch, H. et al., “Bericht der ad hoc—Arbeitsgruppe ‘Videotext programmiert Videorecorder’ der TEKO”, pp. 1-40.
European Broadcasting Union, “Specification of the Domestic Video Programme Delivery Control System”, pp. 1-72.
ARD/ZDF/ZVEI-Richtlinie “Video Programme System”.
Reports on Developments in USA, Teletext, EIA Meeting.
Videotex '81: A Special Report.
Tarrant, D.R., “Teletext for the World”.
Clifford, Colin et al., “Microprocessor Based, Software Defined Television Controller”, IEEE Transaction on Consumer Electronics (1978), pp. 436-441.
Hughes, William L. et al., “Some Design Considerations for Home Interactive Terminals”, IEEE Transactions on Broadcasting (1971).
Mothersdale, Peter L. , “Teletext and viewdata: new information systems using the domestic television receiver”, Electronics Record (1979), pp. 1349-1354.
Betts, W.R., “Viewdata: the evolution of home and business terminals”, PROC.IEE (1979), pp. 1362-1366.
Hutt, P.R., “Thical and practical ruggedness of UK teletext transmission”, PROC.IEE (1979), pp. 1397-1403.
Rogers, B.J., “Methods of measurement on teletext receivers and decoders”, PROC.IEE (1979), pp. 1404-1407 .
Green, N., “Subtitling using teletext service—technical and editorial aspects”, PROC.IEE (1979), pp. 1408-1416.
Chambers, M.A., “Teletext—enhancing the basic system”, PROC.IEE (1979), pp. 1425-1428.
Crowther, G.O., “Adaptation of Uk Teletex System for 525/60 Operation”, IEEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics (1980), pp. 587-596.
Marti, B. et al., Discrete, service de television cryptee , Revue de radiodiffusion—television (1975), pp. 24-30.
Lopinto, John, “The Application of DRCS within the North American Broad cast Teletext Specification”, IEEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics (1982), pp. 612-617.
BBC, BBC Microcomputer: BBC Microcomputer with Added Processor and Teletex Adaptor (Manual).
Green, N.W., “Picture Oracle,” on Independent Television Companies Association Limited Letterhead.
National Captioning Institute, Comments on the Matter of Amendment of Part 73, Subpart E. of the Federal Communications Rules Government Television Stations to Authorize Teletext (before F.C.C.).
Balchin, C., “Videotext and the U.S.A.”, I.C. Product Marketing Memo.
Koteen and Burt, “British Teletext/Videotex”.
EIA Teletext SubCommittee Meetings, Report on USA Visit.
Brighton's Experience with Software for Broadcast (Draft).
The institution of Electronic and Radio Engineers, Conference on Electronic Delivery of Data and Software.
AT&T, “Videotex Standard Presentation Level Protocol”.
Various Commissioner statements on Authorization of Teletext Transmissions by TV Stations.
Report and Order of FCC on the Matter of Amendment of Parts 2,73, and 76 of the Commission's Rules to Authorize the Transmission of Teletext by TV Stations, pp. 1-37.
IBA Technical Review of Digital Television, pp. 1-64.
National Cable Television Association report, “Videotex Services” given at Executive Seminar.
Lexis Research results for Patent No. 4,145,717.
Web page—Company Overview of Norepack Corporation.
Coversheet titled, “Zing”.
Lemelson v. Apple Computer, Inc. patent case in the Bureau of National Affairs, 1996.
A computer printout from Library Search.
Electronic Industries Association—Teletext Subcommittee Rask Group A—Systems Minutes of Meeting Mar. 30, 1981 at Zenith plus attachments.
Electronic Industries Association—Teletext Subcommittee Task Group A Systems Interim Report, Mar. 30, 1981 by Stuart Lipoff, Arthur D. Little Inc.
Minutes of Eletronic Industries Association Teletext Subcommittee Task Force B —Laboratory & Field Tests Mar. 30, 1981.
National Captioning Institute Report, “The 1980 Closed-Captioned Television Audience”.
Electronic Industries Assoc.—Teletext Subcommittee— Steering Committee Minutes of Meeting on Mar. 31, 1981.
Aug. 6, 1990 letter from Herb Zucker to Walter Ciciora with attachment.
Articles, information sheets under cover sheet “QVP—Pay Per View” Nov. 29, 1982.
National Cable Television Association report, “Videotex Services”.
Scala Info Channel Advertisement, “The Art of Conveying A Message”.
Zenith Corporation's Z-Tac Systems information includes Z-tac specifications, access list, etc.
Report by Cablesystems Engineering Ltd. on, “Zenith Addressable System and Operating Procedures” and Advertising documents.
Memo from W. Thomas to G. Kelly on Jan. 21, 1982 Re: Modified ZTAC/Multi Channel.
Notations by Walt Ciciora dated Aug. 19, 1981 referring to Virtext figures.
Stamped Zenith Confidential, “Preliminay Specification for Basic Text”.
Report titled “The Necams Business Plan,” dated Mar. 18, 1994.
The Personalized Mass Media Corp. reported titled, “Portfolio of Programming Examples” by Harvey, Keil, & Parker 1991.
Petition to FCC dated Mar. 26, 1981 titled, “Petition for Rulemaking of Unighted Kingdom Teletext Industry Goup,” also 1 page of handwritten notes from Walter Ciciora.
“Enhanced Computer Controlled Teletext for 525 Line Systems (Usecct) SAA 5245 User Manual” report by J.R. Kinghorn.
“Questions and Answers about Pay TV” by Ira Kamen.
Oak Industries 1981 Annual Report.
Article, “50 Different Uses for At Home 2-Way Cable TV Systems” by Morton Dubin.
Derwent Info Ltd. search. Integrated broadcasting & Computer Processing system. Inventor J. Harvey/J. Cuddihy.
Telefax from Arjen Hooiveld to Jones, Day, Reavis & Pogue Re: European Patent Appl. No. 88908836.5 and abstract plus related correspondence and Derwent search.
Advertisement in royal TV Society Journal (1972) for PYE TVT.
Letter to Dean Russell listing “reference papers”, pp. 1-4.
Letter from George McKenzie to Dean Russell Re: PMM Corp., v. TWC Inc.
Reisebericht (German memo).
Blanpunk (German memo).
“Relevant papers for Weather Channel V PMMC”.
Letter to Peter Hatt Re: BVT: Advisory UK Industry Contact Group.
Incomplete report on Antiope.
Memo FCC: Next Moves.
Memo—Re: British Teletext—ABC.
Memo with FCC Report and Order Authorizing Teletext Transmission.
Manual.
Notes to Section 22.4: Simple Block Encipherment Algorithm.
Memos on Zenith and Teletext.
Memo to Bernie Kotten about National Cable TV Association meeting and efforst to encourage Sony to integrate teletext chip sets into its TV.
Memo's from Koteen & Naftalin.
Description of patents from Official Gazette.
Explanation of Collateral Estoppel.
DNA's Intellectual Property Library on CD's summary of Jamesbury Corporation v. United States.
BBA's Intellectual Property printouts of Lemelson v. Apple Computer, Inc.
ITC Judge Order denying Motion for Summary Judgment in the Matter of Certain Memory Devices with Increased Capacitance and Products Containing Same, Investigation #337-TA-371.
Decision in court case Corbett v. Chisolm and Schrenk invovling patent #3,557,265.
Matthew Beaden Printouts regarding interference practice and the Board Interference.
BNA's Intellectual Property Library on CD printouts about Corbett v. Chisolm.
Numerous Group W business cards including James Cuddihy.
The Broadcast Teloetext Specification, published by the BBC, The IBA and the British Radio Equipment Manufacturers' Association (1976).
Kahn, et al., “Advances in Packet Radio Technology,” . . . Proceedings of the IEEE, vol. 66, No. 11, Nov. (1978) pp. 1468-1495.
Clifford, C., “A Universal Controller for Text Display Systems,” IEEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics, (1979) pp. 424-429.
Harden, B., “Teletext/Viewdata LSI,” IEEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics, (1979), pp. 353-358.
Bown, H. et al., “Comparative Terminal Realizatins with Alpha-Geometric Coding,” IEEE Transaction on Consumer Electronics, (1980), pp. 605-614.
Crowther, “Dynamically Redefinable Character Sets—D.R.C.S.,” IEEE Transaction on Consumer Electronics, (1980), pp. 707-716.
Chambers, John et al., “The Development of a Coding Hierarchy for Enhanced UK Teletext,” IEEE Transaction on Consumer Electronics, (1981), pp. 536-540.
Reexamination of U.S. Patent No. 4,706,121.
U.S. Patent Application by T. Diepholz (Serial No. 266900).
List of relevant or searched patents.
88908836.5 and Amendments to John C. Harvey,. European Patent Office.
88908836.5 International Application to John C. Harvey.
Kruger, H.E., “Memory Television, the ZPS Digital Identification System,” pp. 1-9.
Gaines, B.R. and Sams, J., “Minicomputers in Security Dealing,” Computer, Sep. 1976, pp. 6-15.
Kazama et al., “Automatic storage and retreival of video taped programs”, Apr. 1979.
Transcript of Viewdata '80, first world conference on viewdata, videotex, and teletext, Mar. 26-28, 1980, London.
Benson, K. B. et al., “CBS New York Video Tape Facilities”.
Brown et al., Project Score, pp. 624-630, 1960.
Burkhardt et al., “Digitial Television Transmisson With 34 Mbit/s”.
Byloff, “Automatic Control of Video Tape Equipment at NBC, Burbank,” by the National Broadcasting Company, Inc. In 1959.
Charles Gerrish, “QUBE”—Interactive Video on the Move.
Crowther, et al. G.O., “Teletext Receiver LSI Data Acquisition and Control,” Jan. 13, 1976, pp. 911-915.
Davidoff, Frank, “The All-Digital Television Studio,” SMPTE Journal, vol. 89, No. 6.
Diederich, Werner DT, “Electronic Image and Tone Return Equipment With Switching System and Remote Control Receiver for Television Decoder”.
Gaucher, “Automatic Program Recording System”.
M.W.S.. Barlow, “Automatic Switching in the CBC—An Update”.
Marsden, “Master Control Techniques,” v 9 of the “Journal of the Television Society,” 1959.
McArthur, David, “The television as a receive only terminal”.
Millar et al., “Transmission of Alphanumeric Data by Television”.
Schober, “The WETA Teletext Filed Trial: Some Technical Concerns . . . ”.
Skilton, The Digitrol 2—Automatic VTR Programme Control.
Stern, “An Auotmated Programming Control Sysem for Cable TV”.
Yamane et al., “System and apparatus for automatic Monitoring control of Broadcast Circuits”.
Zettl, “Television Production Handbook”, second edition.
Schiller et al., “CATV Program Origination and Production”.
Hughes et al., Some Design Considerations for Home Interactive Terminals, IEEE Transaction on Broadcasting, vol. BC-17, No. 2, Jun. 1971.
Kaneko et al., “Digital Transmission of Broadcast Television with Reduced Bit Rate.”
Gautier, C., “Automatic Program Recording Systems”.
Kahn et al. “Advances in Packet Radio Technology,” Proceedings of IEEE, vol. 6.6, No. 11, Nov. 1975.
Marti, B., “The Concept of Universal Teletext,” CCETTt, Rennes 11th International Television Symposium Paper, V11 A-3A, pp. 1-11, May 27, 1979.
“Videotex Services,” National Cable Television Association Executive Seminar Series, NCTA Washington, Oct. 1980, pp. III-VII, 1-3, 23-27, Oct. 1980.
“Specification du service de classe A, TeleDiffusion de France,” Antiope, Feb. 1985.
Gautier, J.P. “Language Telediffuse de Messagerie du Projet Ecrans Hybrides,” Antiope/Didon system, Jun. 1981.
Auer, R., “Die Warteschlange Uberlistet,” Funkschau, pp. 53-56, Jun. 1985.
Grethlein, M., “Videotext und Bildschirmtext,” Funkschau, Heft 5, 1981, pp. 69-73, May 1981.
Heider, et al., “Videotext und Bildschirmtext,” Grundig Technische Informationen, Heft 4/5, 1980, pp. 171-195, Apr. 1980.
Kombinierer fur Videotextsignal, “Runfunktechnische Mitteilungen,” Jahrgang 28, (1984), Heft 6, pp. 273-289, Jun. 1984.
Art Kleiman, “Heathkit GR-2001—Programmable Color TV,” Radio Electronics, May 1977.
Gecsei, Jan. The Architecture of Videotex Systems (Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, Inc., 1983 pp. 174-177, 233-238.
Sigel, Efrem et al. The Future of Videotext: Worldwide Prospects for Home/Office Electronic Information Services (White Plains, N.Y.: Knowledge Industry Publications, Inc., 1983), pp. 28, 119-126.
Raggett, Michael. “Broadcast Telesoftware,” Computer Graphics World, vol. 6, No. 9, Sep. 1983, table of contents, pp. 49, 50, 52 and letters.
Tydeman, John et al. Teletex and Videotex in the United States: Market Potential Technology, Public Policy Issues, Institute for the Future (New York: McGraw-Hill Publications, 1982), pp. 4, 89-99, 122-169.
“Telesoftware and Education Project: Summary of Report,” A Joint BBC/ITV & Brighton Research Project, Summer 1982, 111 p. and appendix.
Damouny, N. G. “Teletext Decoders—Keeping Up with the Latest Technology Advances,” Consumer Electronicsvol. CE-30, No. 3, Aug. 1984, pp. 429-436.
Nishimoto, Naomichi et al. “VHS VCR with Index and Address Search Systems,” Consumer Electronics, vol. CE-33, No. 3 Aug. 1987, pp. 220-225.
Weissman, Steven B. “Teletext in transactional videotex,” Electronic Publishing Review, vol. 2, No. 4, 1982, pp. 301-304.
Crowther, G.O. “Teletext Enhancements—Levels 1, 2 and 3,” IBA Technical Review, May 1983, pp. 11-16.
McIntyre, Colin, “Broadcast teletext—who says it isn't interactive?” pp. 1-12 in: Anon. Videotex -key to the information revolution (Online Publications Ltd., 1982).
Veith, Richard H., “Television's Teletext,” Elsevier Science Publishing, Inc., New York, 1983, pp. 9, 12, 17, 19, 32, 46-47, 136-137, 139.
Alber, Antone F., “Videotex/Teletext, Principles and Practices,” McGraw-Hill Book Company, pp. 37, 138-139, 142-147, 188-191.
Russell, R.T. “Teletext remote control,” part 1, Wireless World, Apr. 1979, 4 pages.
Russell, R.T. “Teletext remote control”, part 2, Wireless World, May 1979, pp. 83-86.
Pandey, K. “Second generation teletext and viewdata decoders,” Proceedings IEE, vol. 126, Dec. 1979, pp. 1367-1373.
Hedger, J. et al. “Telesoftware: adding intelligence to teletext,” Proceedings IEE, vol. 126, Dec. 1979, pp. 1412-1416.
Sigel, Efrem et al. Videotext: The Coming Revolution in Home/Office Information Retrieval, (White Plains, NY: Knowledge Industry Publications, Inc., 1980), pp. 6, 7, 13, 28, 33, 34, 36, 37.
Roizen, Joseph, “Teletext in the USA,” SMPTE Journal, vol. 90, Jul. 1981, pp. 602-610.
Money, Steve A. Teletext and Viewdata (London: Butterworth & Co., Ltd., 1981), preface, pp. 1-145, glossary and index.
Risher, Carol A. “Electronic Media and the Publishers, Part 1: Teletext,” Videodisc Videotex, vol. 1, No. 3, Summer 1981, pp. 162-167.
Chew, J.R. “CEEFAX: evolution and potential,” BBC Reseach Department Report No. BBC RD 1977/26, Aug. 1977, table of contents, pp. 1-14 and appendix.
Hedger, John. “Telesoftware: Home computing via teletext,” Wireless World, Nov. 1978, pp. 61-64.
Anon, Videotex '81, International Conference & Exhibition, May 20-22, 1981 Toronto, Canada (Northwood Hills, UK: Online Conference, Ltd; 1981), pp. 78-84.
Winsbury, Rex, ed. Viewdata in Action: A Comparative Study of Prestel (London: McGraw-Hill, Ltd., 1981), pp. 10-12, 31, 35, 36, 57-61, 102, 103, 109, 202-204, 211-219.
“Colloquium on Broadcast and Wired Teletext Systems—Ceefax, Oracle, Viewdata,” Tuesday, Jan. 13, 1976, IEE Electronics Division, Professional Groupm E14 (Television and Sound), Digest No. 1976/3.
Anon. “Updating databases by off-peak TV,” New Scientist, Oct. 21, 1976, p. 162.
Martin, Bernard. “New Ancillary Services Using a Televison Channel,” SMPTE Journal, vol. 86, Nov. 1977, pp. 815, 817, 818.
Biggs, A.J. et al., “Broadcast data in television,”GEC Journal of Science and Technology, vol. 41, No. 4, 1974, pp. 117-124.
Heuer, D.A. “A Microprocessor Controlled Memory Tuning System,” Consumer Electronics, vol. CE-25, No. 4, Aug. 1979, pp. 677-683.
Marti, Bernard et al. “Antiope, service de télétexte,” journal unk., pp. 17-22.
Lipoff, Stuart J. “Mass Market Potential for Home Terminals,” Consumer Electronics, vol. unk., pp. 169-184.
Crowther, G.O., “Adaptation of U.K. Teletext System for 525/60 Operations,” IEEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics, vol. CE-26, Aug. 1980, pp. 587-599.
Gosch, John, “Code accompanying TV program turns on video cassette recorder in proposed scheme,” Electronics, Feb. 10, 1981, pp. 80-82.
Somers, Eric, “Appropriate Technology for Text Broadcasting,” Viewdata and Videotext 1980-81: A Worldwide Report, Transcript of viewdata '80, first word conference on viewdata and Videotext, and teletext, Knowledge Industry Publications, Inc., White Plains, New York, Copyright 1980 by Online Conference, Ltd., pp. 499-514.
Dages, Charles L., “Playcable: A Technological Alternative for Information Services,” IEEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics, vol. CE-26, Aug. 1980, pp. 482-486.
Norris, Bryan L. et al., “Teletext Data Decoding,” IEEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics, Aug. 1976, pp. 248-253.
Kokado, N. et al., “A Programmable TV Receiver,” IEEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics, vol. 22, No. 1, Feb. 1976, pp. 69-83.
“Advanced Minicomputer-based Systems for Banking and Financial Institutions,” Money Management Systems, Incorporated, brochure, 1980, 9 pages.
“Advanced Transmission Techniques,” SMPTE Journal, Report on the 121st Technical Conference, Jan. 1980, vol. 89, pp. 31-32.
“American National Standard” “dimensions of video, audio and tracking control records on 2-in video magnetic tape quadruplex recorded at 15 and 7.5 in/s,” SMPTE Journal, Oct. 1981, pp. 988-989.
“American National Standard” “time and control code for video and audio tape for 525-line/60-field television systems,” SMPTE Journal, Aug. 1981, pp. 716-717.
“Anderson: Progress Committee Report for 1979—Television,” SMPTE Journal, May 1980, vol. 89, pp. 324-328.
“Application of Direct Broadcast Satellite Corporation for a Direct Broadcast Satellite System,” Before the Federal Communications Commission, Washington, D.C., Gen. Docket No. 80-603, Jul. 16, 1981.
“Cable TV Advertising,” Paul Kogan Associates, Inc., No. 22, Feb. 18, 1981, 6 pages.
“CAMP,” Arbitron Cable, The Arbitron Company, product brochure, May 1980, 8 pages.
“Contraband code,” Closed Circuit, Broadcasting, Sep. 28, 1970, 1 page.
“Did the ad run?”, Media Decisions, Jul. 1969, pp. 44 et seq.
“Digisonics pushes its coding method,” Broadcasting, Dec. 7, 1970, p. 37.
“Digisonics TV Monitor System Finds Defenders,” Advertising Age, Dec. 8, 1969, 1 page.
“Digisonics violated standards, says BAR,” Broadcasting, Oct. 5, 1970, pp. 21-23.
“Digisonics' Aim Is Info Bank, Not Just Proof of Performance,” Advertising Age, Nov. 9, 1970, 4 pages.
“Digisonics' dilemma,” Media Decisions, Jun. 1971, 6 pages.
“Everything you've always wanted to know about TV Ratings,” A.C. Nielsen Company, brochure, 1978.
“How to increase training productivity through Videodisc and Microcomputer systems,” seminar brochure, 1981.
“IDC begins monitoring,” At Deadline, Broadcasting, Sep. 14, 1970, p. 9.
“IDC encoding system still alive at FCC,” Broadcasting, Sep. 27, 1971, p. 31.
“In this corner, Digisonics!”, Media Decisions, Jun. 1968, 5 pages.
“Index to SMPTE-Sponsored American National Standards, Society Recommended Practices, and Engineering Committee Recommendations,” 1980 Index to SMPTE Journal, SMPTE Journal, pp. 1-15 to 1-20.
I“Index to Subjects—Jan.-Dec. 1976 • vol. 85,” 1976 Index to SMPTE Journal, SMPTE Journal, vol. 85, pp. I-5 to I-13, I-15.
“Index to Subjects—Jan.-Dec. 1977 • vol. 86,” 1977 Index to SMPTE Journal, SMPTE Journal, vol. 86, pp. I-5 to I-14.
“Index to Subjects—Jan.-Dec. 1979 • vol. 88,” 1979 Index to SMPTE Journal, SMPTE Journal, vol. 88, pp. I-4 to I-10.
“Index to Subjects—Jan.-Dec. 1980 • vol. 89,” 1980 Index to SMPTE Journal, SMPTE Journal, pp. I-5 to I-11.
“Index to vol. 87 Jan.-Dec. 1978,” SMPTE Journal, Part II to Jan. 1979 SMPTE Journal, pp. I-1, I-4 to I-14.
“Listeners,” Closed Circuit, Broadcasting, 1 page.
“Management With The Nielsen Retail Index System,” A.C. Nielsen Company, 1980.
“Measuring The Cable Audience,” Ogilvy & Mather, Advertising, 1980, pp. H1-H8.
“No Digisonics friends show in comments,” Broadcasting, May 24, 1971, p. 62.
“Preliminary List of Papers,” SMPTE Journal, Sep. 1980, vol. 89, p. 677.
“Proposed SMPTE Recommended Practice” “Vertical Interval Time and Control Code for Video Tape for 525-Line/60-Field Television Systems,” SMPTE Journal, Sep. 1981, pp. 800-801.
“SMPTE Journal Five-Year Index 1971-1975,” SMPTE Journal.
“SMPTE Journal Five-Year Index 1976-1980,” SMPTE Journal.
“Talent pay code put off,” At Deadline, Broadcasting, Nov. 9, 1970, p. 9.
“Television,” SMPTE Journal, May 1981, pp. 375-379.
“The TCR-119 Reader,” Gray Engineering Laboratories, SMPTE Journal, May 1980, vol. 89, p. 438, (advertisement ).
“Vidbits,” Advertising Age, Sep. 21, 1981, p. 70.
“Video Tape Recording Glossary,” SMPTE Journal, Oct. 1980, vol. 89, p. 733.
“Window on the World” “The Home Information Revolution,” Business Week, Jun. 29, 1981, pp. 74-83.
9 Digital Television Developments, Independent Broadcasting Authority (Iba) Technical Review, pp. 19-31.
A System of Data Transmission in the Field Blanking Period of the Television Signal, Iba Technical Review, Digital Television, pp. 37-44.
Adams, D.M., “The Place of Viewdata in Relation to Other Communications Techniques in the Travel Industry : A Personal View,” Viewdata & Videotext, 1980-81: A Worldwide Report, 1980, pp. 379-397.
Addressable Cable Television Control System with Vertical Interval Data Transmission, Campbell et al. abandoned app. No. 348,937, pp. 1-28, abstract, claims 1-42, Fig. 1-13 (Mar. 1980).
Addressable control—A big first step toward the marriage of computer, cable, & consumer, Larry C. Brown, (Pioneer Communications of America), Cable.
Ancillary Signals for Television, U.S. Dept. Of Commerce, Sep. 1975.
Anderson, The Vertical Interval: A General-Purpose Transmission Path, Sep. 1, 1971.
Appx. B of Petition to FCC, p. 72, filed Jul. 29, 1980.
Automated Videotape Delay of Satellite Transmission, Chiddix, “Satellite Communicatins Magazine”, 2 Pages.
Barlow, Automatic Switching in the CBC—A Update, Sep. 1, 1976.
Beakhurst, D.J., et al., “Teletext and Viewdata—A Comprehensive Component Solution,” Illustrations, Proceedings, IEE, vol. 126, Dec. 1979, pp. 1382-1385.
BS-14, Broadcast Specification, Television Broadcast Videotext, Telecommunication Regulatory Service, Jun. 19, 1981.
DeGoulet, et al., “Automatic Program Recording System” Radio diff. Et TV 11/75.
Diederich, Electronic Image and Tone Return Equipment With Switching System and Remote Control Receiver for Television Decoder, May 22, 1975.
Enhanced graphics for Teletext, R.H. Vivian, Aug. 1981, IEEE pp. 541-550.
Etkin, Vertical Interval Signal Applications, Broadcast Engineering, pp. 30-35, Apr. 1970.
Federal Register/vol. 64, No. 146/Friday, Jul. 30, 1999.
Ferre, “Goodbye, TV Snow”, Electronic Servicing, May 1977, pp. 14-22.
From Satellite to Earth Station to Studio to S-T-L to MDS Transmitter to Home; Pay Television Comes to Anchorage Alaska, Verga, “Telecommunications Systems, Inc.”, Baltimore, Md. pp. 76-80.
Gaucher, et al., Automatic Program Recording System, Nov. 1, 1975.
Howell, “A Primer on Digital Television” Journal of the SMPTE, Jul. 1975, 538-541.
Hutt, “A System of Data Transmission in the Field Blanking Period of the Television Signal”, SLICE pp. 37-44, Jun. 1973.
John Hedger, Oracle ( (TCA), U.K. 1980).
Kamishima, et al., A Monitor Device of a Switcher System, May 8, 1981.
Money, “CEEFAX/ORACLE: reception techniques (part 1)” Television, Jul. 1975, vol. 25, No. 9, pp. 398-398.
O'Donnell, John et al., “Videodisc Program Production Manual,” Sony, 1981.
O'Connor, Ad Hoc Committee on Television Broadcast Ancillary Signals, Journal of the SMPTE, vol. 82, Dec. 1973.
Petition for Rulemaking filed with the FCC by CB Inc. on Jul. 29, 1980, p. 72 of Appendix B.
Present Status of Still. Picture Television, Research & Development, Nhk.
Schubin, The First Nationwide Live Stereo Simulcast Network, SMPTE Journal, vol. 86, Jan. 1977.
SMPTE Journal, May 1980, vol. 89, p. 391, no. title.
Stagg, “An integrated Teletext and Viewdata Receiver” The SERT Journal vol. 11, Oct. 1977, pp. 210-213.
Stern, et al., An Automated Programming Control System for Cable TV.
Systems of VSA-Videographic (KCO26867).
Taylor, John P., “Comsat bid to FCC for DBS authorization: Is direct broadcasting the wave of the future?”, Television/Radio Age, Mar. 23, 1981, pp. A-22-24 and A-26 and A-28-31.
Taylor, John P., “Comsat bid to FCC for DBS authorization: Questions of finances, ‘localism,’ monopoly,” Television/Radio Age, May 4, 1981, pp. 42-44 and 80-81.
Taylor, John P., “Fourteen DBS authorization applications to FCC differ greatly in both structure and operations,” Television/Radio Age, Oct. 5, 1981, pp. 40-42 and 116-119.
Teletext Receiver LSI Data Acquisition and Copntrol, G.O. Growther, et al., Jan. 1976 pp. 9/1-9/5.
Television Network Automated by Mini Computer-Controlled Channels, “Computer Design”, vol. 15, No. 11, pp. 58,59,62,66,70.
The Specification of the Parent Application of Campbell et al., filed Mar. 1980 (WO 81/02961 PCT).
Viewdata, First World Conference on Viewdata, Videotext and Teletext, Mar. 26, 1980, pp. 431-445.
VSA's Teletext Products, Videographic Systems of America.
Zettl, Television Production Handbook, Jan. 1, 1969.
Powell, C., “Prestel: The Opportunity For Advertising,” Viewdata & Videotext, 1980-81 A Worldwide Report/Transcript of Viewdata '80 First World Conference On Viewdata, Videotex, and Teletext, Mar. 26-28, 1980, pp. 233-246.
Reuters, “Transmission Protocol for Reuters News-View,” Aug. 1978, 2 pages.
Bright, R., “The Telematique Programme in France,” Viewdata & Videotext, 1980-81 A Worldwide Report/Transcript of Viewdata '80 First World Conference On Viewdata, Videotex, and Teletext, Mar. 26-28, 1980, pp. 19-24.
Barlund, O., et al., “TELSET, the Finnish Viewdata System,” Viewdata & Videotext, 1980-81 A Wolrdwide Report/Transcript of Viewdata '80 First World Conference On Viewdata, Videotex, and Teletext, Mar. 26-28, 1980, pp. 139-148.
Hutt, P., “Oracle—A Fourth Dimension in Broadcasting,” IBM Technical Review, Sep. 1976/9 Digital Television Developments, pp. 3-9.
Hutt, P., “A System of Data Transmission in the Field Blanking Period of the Television Signal,” IBA Technical Review, Jun. 1973, Digital Television, pp. 37-44.
Allora-Abbondi, G., “Transmission System Evaluation for Two-Way Cable,” IEEE Transactions on Cable Television, vol. CATV-4, No. 3, Jul. 1979, pp. 111-118.
Chorafas, D., “Interactive Videotex—The Domesticated Computer,” 1981, pp. 171-183 & preface.
Baer, R., “Innovative Add-On TV Products,” IEEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics, vol. CE-25, Nov. 1979, pp. 765-771.
Henderson, Jr., D., et al., “Issue in Message Technology,” Proceedings, Fifth Data Communications Symposium, Sep. 27-29, 1977, pp. 6-1-6-9.
Schmodel, S., “TV Systems Enabling Viewers to Call Up Printed Data Catch Eye of Media Firms,” newspaper article The Wall Street Journal, Tuesday, Jul. 24, 1979, p. 46.
Braden, R., “A Server Host System on the Arpanet,” Proceedings, Fifth Data Communications Symposium, Sep. 27-29, 1977, p. 4-1-4-9.
Proceedings, Fifth Data Communications Symposium, Sep. 27-29, 1977, Table of Contents.
Greenberg, B., et al., “VIMACS—A Vertical Interval Machine Control System,” pp. 146-152.
Dynamic Technology Limited, Vimacs, Machine Control and Data Transmission Systems, product description, 6 pages.
Online Conference on Videotex, Viewdata, and Teletext, Conference Transcription, Table of Contents, 1980.
Viewdata 81, the second World Conference on viewdata, videotex and teletext, Table of Contents for written papers presented at the Conference, Oct. 1981.
Anderson, T., “The Vertical Interval: A General-Purpose Transmission Path,” IEEE Transactions On Broadcasting, vol. BC-17, No. 3, Sep. 1971, pp. 77-82.
“LSI circuits for teletext and viewdata, The Lucy Generation,” Mullard, Technical Publication M81-0001, Jun. 1981.
Hedger, J., et al., “Telesoftware—Value Added Teletext,” IEEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics, vol. CE-26, Aug. 1980, pp. 555-566.
Hedger, J., “Telesoftware: Using Teletext to Support a Home Computer,” Sep. 1978, pp. 273-276.
Zenith, “Virtext System, VI.6, Hardware and Software Reference Manual,” Zenith Radio Corporation, Apr. 1981.
Hedger, J., “Broadcast Telesoftware: Experience with Oracle,” 1980, pp. 413-429.
Aston, M.H., “Viewdata-Implications for Education,” 1980, pp. 467-476.
de Weger, M., “Virdata Decoder V-2,” circuit diagram, Jul. 1, 1981, 1 page.
“Virtext,” circuit diagram, 1980, 1 page.
“UK Teletext and Videotex—The world's first established electronic information services available to the public,” ORACLE—Ceefax, 12 pages.
Lucas, K., “The Numerical Basis for ORACLE Transmission,” IBA Technical Review, vol. 9, Sep. 1976, Digital Television Developments, pp. 10-16.
Green, N., et al, “ORACLE on Independent Television,” IBA Technical Review, vol. 9, Sep. 1976, Digital Television Developments, pp. 18-31.
Green, N. W., “Computer Aided Programme Presentation,” IBA Technical Review, vol. 1, Sep. 1972, pp. 55-64.
Chambers, J. P., “Enhanced UK Teletext Moves Towards Still Pictures,” IEEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics, vol. CE-26, Aug. 1980, pp. 527-554.
Crowther, G.O., “Dynamically Redefinable Character Sets—D.R.C.S.,” IEEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics, vol. CE-26, Nov. 1980, pp. 707-716.
Kaplinsky, C. H., “The D2B a One Logical Wire Bus for Consumer Applications,” IEEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics, vol. CE-27, Feb. 1981, pp. 102-109.
Vivian, R. H., et al., “Telesoftware Makes Broadcast Teletext Interactive,” pp. 277-280.
Numaguchi, Y., et al., “Experimental Studies of Transmission Bit-Rate for Teletext Signal in the 525-Lane Television System,” IEEE Transactions on Broadcasting, vol. BC-25, Dec. 1979, pp. 137-142.
Arnold, W. F., “Britons Mull ‘Magazine’ Via TV,” Electronics, Feb. 5, 1976, pp. 68-69.
“Telesoftware,” Systems International, Jun. 1980, p. 43.
Baldwin, J. L. E., et al., “A Standards Converter Using Digital Techniques,” IBA Technical Review, vol. 3, Jun. 1973, Digital Television, pp. 15-35.
Hawker, P., “An Introduction to Integrated Circuits and Digital Electronics,” IBA Technial Review, vol. 3, Jun. 1973, Digital Television, pp. 5-13.
Baldwin, J. L. E., “The Digital Future of Television Studio Centres,” IBA Technical Review, vol. 3, Jun. 1973, Digital Television, pp. 45-51.
Bown, H. G., et al., “Comparative Terminal Realizations with Alpha-Geometric Coding,”IEEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics, vol. CE-26, Aug. 1980, pp. 605-614.
Hanas, O. J., et al., “An Addressable Satellite Encryption for Preventing Signal Piracy,” IEEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics, vol. CE-27, Nov. 1981, pp. 631-635.
Breeze, E. G., “Television Line 21 Encoded Information and Its Impact on Receiver Design,” Aug. 20, 1972, pp. 234-237.
Lentz, J., et al., “Television Captioning for the Deaf Signal and Display Specifications,” Report No. E-7709-C, PBS Engineering and Technical Operations, May 1980.
“Pulses on a Television Signal Control Stations in Network,” Electronics, Feb. 6, 1967, pp. 101-102.
“Demonstration of the Principle of Data Transmission in the Vertical Interval of the Television Video Waveform,” Oct. 22, 1968, 4 pages.
King, P. T., “A Novel TV Add-On Data Communication System,” 5 pages.
Pierce, W. D., et al., “A Low Cost Terminal for the 1980's: Project Green Thumb,” IEEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics, vol. CE-26, Aug. 1980, pp. 487-495.
“CBS/ CCETT North American Broadcast Teletext Specification,” (Extended Antiope), May 20, 1981.
Baer, W. S., “Interactive Television: Prospects for Two-Way Services on Cable,” Rand Corporation, Nov. 1971, pp. 1-88.
Noirel, Y, et al., “Architecture of the French LSI Set for Antiope Teletext Decoders,” pp. 134-144.
Beakhust, D. J., et al., “Teletext and Viewdata—A Comprehensive Component Solution,” Proceedings, IEEE, vol. 126, Dec. 1979, pp. 1374-1396.
Money, S. A., et al., “Teletext. Decoder Update—Part 1,” Television, Jun. 1979, pp. 407-409.
Money, S. A., et al., “Teletext Decoder Update—Part 2,” Television, Jun. 1979, pp. 479-481.
Money, S.A., et al., “Teletext Decoder Update—Part 3,” Television, Aug. 1979, pp. 538-541.
Peters, H., “Teletext the Philips Way,” Television, Apr. 1980, pp. 298-301.
Crowther, G. O., “Teletext and Viewdata Systems and Their Possible Extension to the USA,” Proceedings, IEE, vol. 126, No. 12, Dec. 1979, pp. 1417-1424.
Shortland, D., “Teletext with Infra-Red Remote Control,” 1 Practical Electronics, Aug. 1980, pp. 39-44.
Mokhoff, N., “Consumer Electronics,” Technology '80, pp. 64-68.
Government of Canada, Department of Communications, “Broadcast Specification: Television Broadcast Videotex,” Jun. 19, 1981.
Insam, E., et al., “An Integrated Teletext and Viewdata Receiver,” The SERT Journal, vol. 11, Oct. 1977, pp. 210-213.
Thomas, H. B., et al., “Methods of Designing and Evaluating Videotex,” Online: A Transcript of the Online Conference on Videotex, Videodata and Teletext, 1980, pp. 203-216.
Wright, J. B., et al., “An Evolutionary Approach to the Development of Two-Way Cable Technology Communication,” IEEE Transactions on Cable Television, vol. CATV-2, No. 1, Jan. 1977, pp. 52-61.
Fedida, S., et al., “Viewdata—The Post Office's Textual Information Communications System,” Wireless World, Feb. 1977, and pp. 32-35.
Fedida, S., et al., Videodata Revolution, Halsted Press, New York, 1979, pp. 1-31 and 170-183.
Clarke, K. E., “The Application of Picture Coding Techniques to Viewdata,” IEEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics, vol. CE-26, Aug. 1980, pp. 568-577.
Blatt, J. et al., “The Promise of Teletext for Hearing Impaired Audiences,” IEEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics, vol. CE-26, Nov. 1980, pp. 717-722.
Rupp, C. R., “A Stand-Alone CAI System Based on Procedural Grammars,” EASCON '76 Record, Sep. 1976, pp. 1153-A through 1153-Z.
Vezza, A., et al., “An Electronic Message System: Where Does It Fit?,” Trends and Applications 1976: Computer Networks, Nov. 17, 1976, pp. 89-97.
Myer, T. H., et al., “Message Technology in the Arpanet,” NTC '77, 21: 2-1 through 2-8.
Kuo, F. F., “Message Services in Computer Networks,” Interlinking of Computer Networks, Reidel Publishing Co., 1978, pp. 387-395.
Hagan, R., “Interworking Between Different Text Communication Services and Between Different Text Communication Networks,” NTC 1980—Conference Record, Nov. 1980, pp. 28.5.1-28.5.6.
Rinde, J., “Packet Network Access in Electronic Mail System,” NTC 1980—Conference Record, Nov. 1980, pp. 60.4.1-60.4.4.
Wendlinger, F., et al., “Systems for Corporate Text Communication,” NTC 1980—Conference Record, Nov. 1980, pp. 65.5.1-65.5.4.
Naffah, N., “Communication Protocols for Integrated Office Systems,” Computer Networks, vol. 5, No. 6, 1981, pp. 445-454.
Treves, S.R., et al., “Text, Image, and Data Integration In a Distributed Control Digital Voice Switching System,” ISS '81, Sep. 1981.
Wiest, G., et al., “An Integrated Service Broadband Network for Voice, Text, Data and Video,” ISS '81, Sep. 1981.
Dickson, E.M. et al., The Video Telephone, Praeger Publishers, 1973, pp. v. and 9-78.
Rayner, B., “The Application of Switcher-Intelligent Interfaces to Video Tape Editing,” SMPTE Journal, vol. 88, Oct. 1979, pp. 715-717.
Everton, J.K., “A Hierarchical Basis for Encryption Key Management in a Computer Communications Network,” Conference Record—1978 International Conference on Communications, vol. 3, pp. 46.4.1. through 46.4.7.
Davies, D.W., et al., Computer Networks and Their Protocols, John Wiley & Sons, 1979, pp. v-viii and 390-417.
Popek, G.J., et al., Encryption and Secure Computer Networks, Computing Surveys, vol. 11, No. 4, Dec. 1979, pp. 331-356.
Everton, J.K., “Adaptation of the Basic Hierarchy for Encryption Key Management to Serve Applications with Conflicting Requirements,” Proceedings, Computer Networking Symposium, Dec. 1979, pp. 186-191.
Nelson, J., “Implementations of Encryption in an ‘Open Systems’ Architecture,” Proceedings, Computer Networking Symposium, Dec. 1979, pp. 198-205.
Lyons, R.E., “A Total Autodin System Architecture,” IEEE Transactions on Communications, vol. Com-28, No. 9, Sep. 1980, pp. 1467-1471.
Powers, S., et al., “Memo: An Application of Secret Key Cryptography and Public Key Distribution,” CompSac '80, Oct. 1980, pp. 821-827.
Allgaier, G.R., et al., “Navy Command and Control (c2) Using Local Networks,” NTC 1980—Conference Record, Nov. 1980 vol. 1, pp. Local 41.3.1 through 41.3.5.
Kowalchuk, J., et al., “Communications Privacy: Integration of Public and Secret Key Cryptography,” NTC 1980—Conference Record, Nov. 1980, pp. 49.1.1 through 49.1.5.
Denning, D.E., et al., “Timestamps In Key Distribution Protocols,” Communications of the ACM, vol. 24, No. 8, Aug. 1981, pp. 533-536.
Chambers, J.P., et al., “The Development of a Coding Hierarchy for Enhanced UK Teltext,” IEEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics, vol. CE-27, No. 3, Aug. 1981, pp. 536-540.
Takizawa, M., et al., “Resource Integration and Data Sharing on Heterogeneous Resource Sharing System,” Evolutions In Computer Communications, 1978, pp. 253-258.
Smith, R.G., et al., “Considerations for Microprocessor-based Terminal Design,” Conference Record—12th Asilomar Conference on Circuits, Systems and Computers, Nov. 1978, pp. 437-441.
Mowafi, O.A., et al., “Integrated Voice/Data Packet Switching Techniques for Future Military Networks,” Proceedings, Computer Networking Symposium, 1979, pp. 216-223.
Day, J.D., “Terminal Protocols,” IEEE Transactions on Communications, vol. COM-28, No. 4, Apr. 1980, pp. 585-593.
Rosen, E.C., “The Updating Protocol of ARPANET's New Routing Algorithm,” Computer Networks, vol. 4, 1980, pp. 11-19.
Hasuike, K., et al., “Text and Facsimile Integrated Terminal,” NTC 1980-Conference Record, 1980, p. 60.5.1 through 60.5.5.
Cerf, V.G., et al., “An Experimental Service for Adaptable Data Reconfiguration,” IEEE Transactions on Communications, vol. COM-20, No. 3, Jun. 1972, pp. 557-564.
Croll, R.H., et al., “A Distributed Data Acquisition and Processing System for Multiple Aerospace Test Facilities,” Proceedings of the 26th Int'l Instrumentation Symposium, May 1980, pp. 287-295.
Tsay, D.P., et al., “Design of a Robust Network Front-End for the Distributed Double-Loop Computer Network,” Distributed Data Acquisition,Computing, and Control Symposium, Dec. 1980, pp. 141-155.
Glorieux, A.M., et al., “Distributing a Line System into a Distributed Data Base Management System: Sirius-Delta Experience,” Proceedings—Computer Networking Symposium, Dec. 1980, pp. 19-25.
Chambers, J.P., “Potential of Extended Teletext,” Television: Journal of the Royal Television Society, Sep./Oct. 1980, pp. 43-45.
Chambers, J.P., “Teletext—The Potential of an Extended System,” pp. 114-117.
Pandey, K., “Advanced Teletext Systems,” pp. 262-265.
Hartung, R.L., et al., “Virtual I/O—An Experiment,” Sigmicro Newsletter, vol. 10, No. 4, Dec. 1979, pp. 109-113.
Daniels, J.F., “Wireless World Teletext Decoder,” Wireless World, Dec. 1975, pp. 563-566.
“Microprocessor Smartens Teletext,” Electronics, Sep. 28, 1978, pp. 74.
Sowter, B., “Vision of the Future,” International Broadcast Engineer, Dec. 1977/Jan. 1978, pp. 13-19.
VIMACS— Machine Control and Data Transmission System, Advertisement, 3 pages.
O'Connor, R.A., “Current Usage of Vertical Interval Test Signals in Television Broadcasting,” IEEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics, Aug. 1976, pp. 220-229.
Solomon, B., “New World of T.V. Reception,” Popular Electronics, May 1979.
Setos, A., “WASEC's Network Operations Center,” Cable: '81, May 1981, pp. 52-54.
Beakley, G.W., et al., “Cable and Earth Stations—A Business Connection,” Cable: '81, May 1981, pp. 108-113.
“Petition for Rulemaking of United Kingdom Teletext Industry Group,” Before the Federal Communications Commission, Mar. 26, 1981, 139 pages.
Conte, J.J., et al., “A NOAA/ National Weather Service Teletext Type Weather Experiment,” Nov. 1979.
Vivian, R.H., “Level 4 Enhanced UK Teletext Transmits Graphics Through Efficient Alpha-Geometric Coding,” IBA, pp. 1-6.
Bugg, R.E.F., “Microprocessor Peripheral for Viewdata,” Electronic Components & Applications, vol. 3, No. 2, Feb. 1981, pp. 2-11.
Chambers, J.P., “Enhanced UK Teletext Moves Towards Still Pictures,” BBC Research Report-BBC RD 1980/14, Jun. 1980, pp. 1-28.
VG Electronics—Short Form Catalogue, 4 pages.
Multitext—Technical Information 050, Signetics, pp. 3-51.
Presentation Level Protocol—Videotex Standard, Bell System, May 1981, pp. 1-105.
Crozier-Cole, P.A., “Regional Operations Centres—The next Generation,” pp. 7-9.
Crozier-Cole, P.A., “Regional Operations Centres for the IBA UK Transmitter Network,” pp. 197-204.
Lloyd, H.F., et al., “A Television-Network Switching Equipment to 625-Line Colour Standards.” pp. 199-201.
Griffiths, E., “Eurovision's Technical Facilities,” pp. 215-220.
Parker, F.G., “The Impact of Digital Techniques on Studio Equipment,” pp. 267-272.
“Family Functional Specification,” Norpak Limited, Aug. 7, 1981, 14 pages,
“Software Specification for Monitoring the Use of Teletext,” Norpak Limited, Nov. 1980, 4 pages.
Wegner, R., “The 1980's—A New Era for the Data Display System,” pp. 62-64.
“Vidata—2105/Interface,” 9 pages.
“Vidata—352/BNC Connectors,” Wegener Communications, Inc., 8 pages.
Taylor, E.L, “Teletext v. Videotext: Pros and Cons and What's Really Going on,” For TVC Magazine, 6 pages.
Service Bulletin, To All CableText Customers with Zenith Virtext Decoders, Nov. 14, 1980, 8 pages.
Thomas, W., “Zenith Videotex/Teletext Review,”3 pages.
Sullivan, W., “Cabletext: Into Second Year and Developing,” Satellite Communications Corp., 4 pages.
Vidata Interface Cable (Vidata 2105).
Gallagher, E.F., “Digital Time Division Switching for Military Communications,” IEEE Transactions on Communications, vol. COM-27, No. 7, Jul. 1979, pp. 1138-1143.
Roth, M., “Security Alert a Two-Way Digital Communications System,” Official Transcript—20th Annual NCTA Convention, Jul. 1971, pp. 500-506.
Zenith Text Products, Advertisement, 4 pages.
Gardner, T., “Viewers Given Equal Time to Talk Back to TV Sets,” Aug. 1977.
Campbell, S., “Step Ahead of Future TV Market,” The Register, Oct. 26, 1978.
Bown, H.G., et al., “Picture Description Instructions PDI for the Telidon Videotex System,” Department of Communications, Canada, Nov. 1979, pp. 1-71.
“An Example of Aggressive Subcarrier Loading,” Table, United Video Inc.
Livaditis, E., et al., “Optimizing Subcarriers for Satellite Transmission,” National Cable Television's 30th Annual Convention and Exposition, May 1981, 6 pages.
Gunn, H., et al., “A Public Broadcaster's View of Teletext in the United States.”
Fraser, J., “From ‘Pots’ to Pans'—Videotex Development in Canada,” OnLine Conference on Viewdata Service, Mar. 1980, pp. 1-10.
Parkhill, D.F., “An Overview of the Canadian Scene,” Viewdata '80, Mar. 1980, pp. 1-12.
Maguire, W.T., “Videotex and the Newspaper Business,” American Newspaper Publishers Association.
Wilson, L.G., “Vista: Leading to the Successful Implementation of Videotex in Canada,” OnLine Conference On Viewdata Services, Mar. 1980.
Guillermin, J., “Development & Applications of the Antiope-Didon Technology,” Viewdata '80, Mar. 1980, pp. 29-38.
Haimes, A.R., “IVS-3 as a Private Viewdata System,” Viewdata '80, Mar. 1980, pp. 323-336.
Haslam, G., “Information Provider Activities in Canada,” Viewdata '80, Mar. 1980, pp. 1-6.
Heys, E.A., et al., STC's Approach to In-House Viewdata Systems, Viewdata '80, Mar. 1980, pp. 313-322.
Inoue, R., “The Index System of the Captain System Experimental Service,” Viewdata '80, Mar. 1980, pp. 113-122.
Kumamoto, T., et al., “Captain System Features—Presentation Capability and Transmission Method,” Viewdata '80, Mar. 1980, pp. 93-105.
Kurushima, N., “The Cooperative Association of Captain Information Providers and Present State of Information Supply for the Experimental Service,” Viewdata '80, Mar. 1980, pp. 123-132.
Marti, B., “Broadcast Text Information in France,” Viewdata '80, Mar. 1980, pp. 359-370.
Maury, J.P., “Plans and Projection for the Electronic Directory Service,” Viewdata '80, Mar. 1980, pp. 39-50.
Messerschmid, U., “Teletext in the Federal Republic of Germany,” Viewdata '80, Mar. 1980, pp. 431-445.
Montague, P.M., “The Electronic Newspaper,” Viewdata '80, Mar. 1980, pp. 63-71.
Morgan, G., “Britains Teletext Services are a Commercial Success,” Viewdata '80, Mar. 1980, pp. 341-357.
Park, R.F., “The Role of Viewdata in Electronic Funds Transfer,” Viewdata '80, Mar. 1980, pp. 185-201.
Ruiten, P.J.G.M., “Viewdata in the Netherlands,” Viewdata '80, Mar. 1980, pp. 133-138.
Sedman, E.C., “The Use of MicroCobol for Telesoftware,” Viewdata '80, Mar. 1980, pp. 399-411.
Shrimpton, W., “International Business Applications of Viewdata,” Viewdata '80, Mar. 1980, pp. 147-158.
Smirle, J.C., et al., “International Videotex Standardization: A Canadian View of Progess Towards the Wired World,” Viewdata '80, Mar. 1980, pp. 271-280.
Smith, M.G., “Prestel—The Private System or Both?,” Viewdata '80 , Mar. 1980, pp. 337-339.
Tantawi, A.N., et al., “Workstations in the Electronic Office,” Viewdata '80, Mar. 1980, pp. 159-171.
Termens, M., “Teletel—The Planned French Videotex Service,” Viewdata '80, Mar. 1980, pp. 25-28.
Troughton, P., “Prestel Operational Strategy,” Viewdata '80, Mar. 1980, pp. 51-62.
Watson, K., “Prestel User Market Research,” Viewdata '80, Mar. 1980, pp. 281-284.
Winsbury, R., “Prestel as a publishing medium: the elements of success or failure,” Viewdata '80, Mar. 1980, pp. 285-293.
Woolfe, R., “The emerging markets for videotex,” Viewdata '80, Mar. 1980, pp. 217-231.
Yasuda, K., “Conception of Captain System— Background, Experiment and Future Plans,” Viewdata '80, Mar. 1980, pp. 107-111.
Zimmerman, R., “Future Utilization of Interactive and Broadcast Videotex in Germany and its Effects on Standardization,” Viewdata '80, Mar. 1980, pp. 263-269.
Adams, D.M., “The Place of Viewdata in Relation to Other Communications Techniques in the Travel Industry: A Personal View,” Viewdata & Videotext, 1980-81: A. Worldwide Report, 1980, pp. 379-397.
Barren, J., “Electronic Publishing and the Government,” Viewdata & Videotext, 1980-81: A Worldwide Report, 1980, pp. 295-300.
Berkman, S., “A Videotex Trial,”Viewdata & Videotext, 1980-81: A Worldwide Report, 1980, pp. 447-460.
Bochmann, G.V., et al., “Towards Videotex Standards,” Viewdata & Videotext, 1980-81: A Worldwide Report, 1980, pp. 253-262.
Botten, B., “Providing Business Information to Prestel,” Viewdata & Videotext, 1980-81: A Worlwide Report, 1980, pp. 73-81.
Bown, H.G., et al., “Telidon Technology Development in Canada,” Viewdata & Videotext, 1980-81: A Worldwide Report, 1980, pp. 547-558.
Ciciora, W.S., “The Role of the Television Receiver Manufacturer in the United States,” Viewdata & Videotext, 1980-81: A Worldwide Report, 1980 pp. 533-546.
Bowers, P.G., et al., “Telidon and Education in Canada,” Viewdata & Videotext, 1980-81: A Worldwide Report, 1980, pp. 7-17.
Camrass, R., “Viewdata: A Practical Medium for Electronic Mail,” Viewdata & Videotext, 1980-81: A Worldwide Report, 1980, pp. 173-184.
Castell, S., “Prestel and the Law,” Viewdata & Videotext, 1980-81: A Worldwide Report, 1980, pp. 301-312.
Clarke, K.E., “What Kind of Pictures for Videotex?,” Viewdata & Videotext, 1980-81: A Worldwide Report, 1980, pp. 83-92.
Courtney, J.F., “Videotel,” Viewdata & Videotext, 1980-81: A Worldwide Report, 1980, pp. 371-377.
Davis, M., “Prestel and the Travel Industry,” Viewdata & Videotext, 1980-81: A Worldwide Report, 1980, pp. 595-602.
Korda, A., “Private Viewdata Systems,” Viewdata & Videotext, 1980-81: A Worldwide Report, 1980, pp. 515-521.
Maslin, J.M., “An evaluation of viewdata for training in industry,” Viewdata & Videotext, 1980-81: A Worldwide Report, 1980, pp. 523-531.
Morioka, F.K., “An Experiment with Computer-Based Educational Services in a General Public Environment,” Viewdata & Videotext, 1980-81: A Worldwide Report, 1980, pp. 613-623.
Ciciora, W.S., “Twenty-Four Rows of Videotex in 525 Scan Lines,” IEEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics, vol. CE-27, No. 4, Nov. 1981, pp. 575-587.
Ciciora, W.S., “Virtext & Virdata—A Present U.S. Teletext Application,” Videotex '81, May 1981, pp. 77-84.
Johnson, G.A., et al., “The Networking of Oracle,” pp. 27-36.
Mullard Application Laboratory, “Integrated Circuits for Receivers,” pp. 43-56.
Lambourne, A.D., “NEWFOR—An Advanced Subtitle Preparation System,” pp. 57-63.
Keyfax—National Teletext Magazine, Advertisement, 4 pages.
Keyfax—National Teletext Magazine, Technical Bulletin, 1 page.
Keyfax, Keyfax by Satellite, Advertisement, 2 pages.
ORACLE, Advertisement Rate Card No. 1, Sep. 1, 1981, 8 pages.
“Multi-Level Teletext and Interactive Videotex,” Operational Systems Worldwide, Information Sheets.
“Brighton's Experience with Educational Software for Broadcast,” 10 pages.
CCITT, “Recommendation S.100—International Information Exchange for Interactive Videotex,” Geneva, 1980, pp. 165-205.
KSL-TV-Salt Lake City, Utah, Press Release About Telextext Signal, pp. 1-7d.
CBS/ CCETT, “North America Broadcast Teletext Specification,”Jun. 22, 1981, pp. 1-240.
Crudele, J., “TI Tests Home Information System,” Electronic News, Nov. 6, 1978, pp. 24-25.
“Systems—NABTS-NAPLPS,” VSA—Videographic, Advertisement, 5 pages.
“Now,” World System Teletext, Advertisement, 6 pages.
“Context” A Complete Teletext Origination System Developed by Logica and the BBC, Advertisement, 8 pages.
Dages, C.L., “Videotex Services via CATV—Hybrid Systems Approach,” pp. 14-25.
Rogers, B.J., “The Broadcasting Options for Data Transmission Methods in Public Service Broadcasting,” pp. 1-3.
Williams, D., “Oak, Micro TV in Talks for Teletext,” Electronic News, Nov. 13, 1978, pp. 25 & 88.
“U.S. TV Station to Write Viewdata Software Link,” newspaper article, Jan. 22, 1979, p. 81.
Barbetta, F., “CBS Joins EIA in Test of Foreign TV Data System,” newspaper article, 1979, p. 23.
Hershberger, S., “Form Mktg. Unit for Antiope System,” newspaper article, Apr. 2, 1979, p. 27.
Hershberger, S., “Say French in Talks on Teletext,” newspaper article, May 14, 1979, p. 48.
Kinghorn, J.R., “New Features in World System Teletext,” IEEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics, Aug. 1984, vol. CE-30, No. 3, pp. 437-440.
“Audio Service Packages May Shed Stepchild Status,” CableAge, Nov. 16, 1981, pp. 17, 18 & 23.
Technical Publications Department, Mullard Limited, “525 Line NTSC Teletext Decoder Module,” Advanced Development Sample Information, Jan. 1983, 8 pages.
Crowther, G.O., “Subscription T.V., A Concept for a Multi Satellite, Multi Programme Source Environment,” Apr. 27, 1987, 2 pages.
Sillman, David, “Television Captioning for the Deaf,” IEEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics, May 1984, vol. CE-30, No. 2, pp. 62-65.
Institution of Electronic and Radio Engineers, “Programme and Registration Form, International Conference on ‘Telesoftware,’0 Cavendish Conference Centre, London: Sep. 27-28, 1984,”4 pages.
Kruesi, William R., et al., “Residential Control Considerations,” IEEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics, Nov. 1982, vol. CE-28 No. 4, pp. 563-570.
McKenzie, G.A., “Teletext—The First Ten Years,” Developments in Teletext, Independent Broadcasting Authority, May 1983, pp. 4-10.
Vivian, R.H., “Level 4—Teletext Graphics using Alpha-geometric Coding,” Developments in Teletext, Independent Broadcasting Authority, May 1983, pp. 21-26.
Johnson, G.A., et al., “The Networking of ORACLE,” Developments in Teletext, Independent Broadcasting Authority, May 1983, pp. 27-36.
Staff at the Mullard Application Laboratory, “Integrated Circuits for Receivers,” Developments in Teletext, Independent Broadcasting Authority, May 1983, pp. 43-56.
Lambourne, A.D., “NEWFOR—An Advanced Subtitle Preparation System,” Developments in Teletext, Independent Broadcasting Authority, May 1983, pp. 57-63.
Harris, Dr. Thomas G., et al., “Development of the MILNET,” Conference Record, Eascon 82, 1982, pp. 77-80.
Veith, Richard H., “Teletext (Broadcast Videotex) Begins in the United States,” National ONLINE Meeting Proceedings—1982, pp. 547-551.
Beville, Hugh M. Jr., “The Audience Potential of the New Technologies: 1985-1990,” Journal of Advertising Research, Apr./May 1985, pp. RC-3-RC-10.
“Draft, North American Broadcast Teletext Specification (NABTS),” EIA/CVCC, Sep. 20, 1983, 85 pages.
Yamamoto, Toshiaki, et al., “An Experimental System of FM Data-Broadcasting,” NHK Laboratories Note, Dec. 1983, serial No. 293, 12 pages.
Numaguchi, Y, et al., “A Teletext System for Ideographs,” NHK Laboratories Note, Feb. 1982, serial No. 271, 14 pages.
International Telecommunications Union, “Recommendations and Reports of the CCIR, 1982,” XVth Plenary Assembly Geneva, 1982, 393 pages.
Murata, M., et al., “A Proposal for Standardization of Home Bus System for Home Automation,” IEEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics, Nov. 1983, vol. CE-29, No. 4, pp. 524-529.
Yamamoto, Kazuyuki, et al., A Home Terminal System Using the Home Area Information Network, IEEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics, Nov. 1983 vol. CE-30, No. 4, pp. 608-616.
Broadcast Teletext Telesoftware Specification, Apr. 1983, 31 pages.
Lukaart, A., “Dutch Telesoftware Standard,” Netherlands PTT, Sep. 1984, 24 pages.
Rayers, D.J., “The UK Teletext Standard for Telesoftware Transmission,” Telesoftware, Cavendish Conference Center, Sep. 27-28, 1984, IERE Publication No. 60, pp. 1-8.
Kinghorn, J.R., “Receiving Telesoftware with CCT,” Telesoftware, Cavendish Conference Center, Sep. 27-28, 1984, IERE Publication No. 60, pp. 9-14.
Sharpless, G.T., “Telesoftware: Adding Intelligence to Video,” Telesoftware, Cavendish Conference Center, Sep. 27-28, 1984, IERE Publication No. 60, pp. 15-19.
Blineau, J., et al., “How to Execute TeleSoftware within the Terminals,” Telesoftware, Cavendish Conference Center, Sep. 27-28, 1984, IERE Publication No. 60, pp. 21-24.
Brown, L., “Telesoftware: Experiences of Providing a Broadcast Service,” Telesoftware, Cavendish Conference Center, Sep. 27-28, 1984, IERE Publication No. 60, pp. 25-28.
White, M., “Educational Telesoftware,” Telesoftware, Cavendish Conference Center, Sep. 27-28, 1984, IERE Publication No. 60, pp. 29-33.
Yeates, N.J., “Monitoring and Evaluation of the Telesoftware and Primary Education Project,” Telesoftware, Cavendish Conference Center, Sep. 27-28, 1984, IERE Publication No. 60, pp. 35-37.
Stanton, G.W., “Implementation of Teletext on Cable Television System in the United States,” Telesoftware, Cavendish Conference Center, Sep. 27-28, 1984, IERE Publication No. 60, pp. 39-43.
Dowsett, C., “Telesoftware in the Development of Wideband Cable Systems and Services,” Telesoftware, Cavendish Conference Center, Sep. 27-28, 1984, IERE Publication No. 60, pp. 45-48.
Pim, D.N., “Telesoftware via Full Channel Teletext,” Telesoftware, Cavendish Conference Center, Sep. 27-28, 1984, IERE Publication No. 60, pp. 49-54.
Havelock, T.J., “Games Telesoftware on Cable,”Telesoftware, Cavendish Conference Center, Sep. 27-28, 1984, IERE Publication No. 60, pp. 55-58.
Shain, M., “Microcomputer Publishing,” Telesoftware, Cavendish Conference Center, Sep. 27-28, 1984, IERE Publication No. 60, pp. 59-69.
Sweet, A., “The Development of a Commercial Telesoftware Service,” Telesoftware, Cavendish Conference Center, Sep. 27-28, 1984, IERE Publication No. 60, pp. 71-74.
Maurer, H., et al., “Teleprograms—The Right Approach to Videotex . . . If You Do It Right,” Telesoftware, Cavendish Conference Center, Sep. 27-28, 1984, IERE Publication No. 60, pp. 75-76.
Harris, A., “A European Standard Protocol for Videotext Telesoftware,” Telesoftware, Cavendish Conference Center, Sep. 27-28, 1984, IERE Publication No. 60, pp. 79-82.
Griffith, Michael, “Text Services on Wideband Cable Networks,” Sep. 11, 1986, 12 pages.
Pim, D.N., “The World System Teletext Specification,” IERE Conference on Electronic Delivery of Data and Software, London, Sep. 16-17, 1986, Publication No. 69, pp. 3-8.
Dowsett, C., “Code of Practice for Second Generation Teletext,” IERE Conference on Electronic Delivery of Data and Software, London, Sep. 16-17, 1986 pp. 9-26.
Foster, R.A.L., et al., “The European Videotext Standard,” IERE Conference on Electronic Delivery of Data and Software, London, Sep. 16-17, 1986 pp. 27-32.
Brown, Lawson, J., “BBC Telesoftware—3 Years On,” IERE Conference on Electronic Delivery of Data and Software, London, Sep. 16-17, 1986 pp. 35-38.
Harris, Anthony, “A European Standard for Videotex Processable Data,” IERE Conference on Electronic Delivery of Data and Software, London, Sep. 16-17, 1986 pp. 39-42.
Waters, A.G., “The Use of Broadcast and Multicast Techniques on Computer Networks,” IERE Conference on Electronic Delivery of Data and Software, London, Sep. 16-17, 1986 pp. 45-50.
Conway, Paul A., “‘Acotuda’ An adaptive Technique for Optimum Channel Useage in Data Broadcasting,” IERE Conference on Electronic Delivery of Data and Software, London, Sep. 16-17, 1986 pp. 51-56.
Robinson, C.J., “Interactive Video Cable,” IERE Conference on Electronic Delivery of Data and Software, London, Sep. 16-17, 1986 pp. 59-66.
Boyd, R.T., “Interactive Service Development on the BT Switched-Star Network,” IERE Conference on Electronic Delivery of Data and Software, London, Sep. 16-17, 1986 pp. 67-73.
Mason, A., “The Principles of the Over-Air Addressed Pay-Per-View Encryption System for Direct Broadcasting by Satellite and for Teletext,” IERE Conference on Electronic Delivery of Data and Software, London, Sep. 16-17, 1986 pp. 77-85.
Stow, R.G., et al., “Privacy and Security in Broadcast Teletext Systems,” IERE Conference on Electronic Delivery of Data and Software, London, Sep. 16-17, 1986 pp. 87-91.
Chambers, J.P., “BBC Datacast—The Transmission System,” IERE Conference on Electronic Delivery of Data and Software, London, Sep. 16-17, 1986 pp. 93-98.
Bradshaw, D.J., et al., “BBC Datacast—Conditional Access Operation,” IERE Conference on Electronic Delivery of Data and Software, London, Sep. 16-17, 1986 pp. 99-105.
Brown, Lawson, J., “BBC Datacast—Implementing A Data Service,” IERE Conference on Electronic Delivery of Data and Software, London, Sep. 16-17, 1986 pp. 107-110.
Givertz, M.J., “Practical Implementation of an Information Provision Service Using Teletext,” IERE Conference on Electronic Delivery of Data and Software, London, Sep. 16-17, 1986 pp. 111-116.
Tarrant, D.R, “Data Link Using Page-Format Teletext Transmission,” IERE Conference on Electronic Delivery of Data and Software, London, Sep. 16-17, 1986 pp. 119-125.
Hinson, C.R., “A ‘Full Level One+’ World System Teletext Decoder,” IERE Conference on Electronic Delivery of Data and Software, London, Sep. 16-17, 1986 pp. 127-132.
Kinghorn, J.R., et al.,“Packet and Page Format Data Reception Using a Multistandard Acquisition Circuit,” IERE Conference on Electronic Delivery of Data and Software, London, Sep. 16-17, 1986 pp. 133-140.
Gill, B., “A New Teletext Data Acquisition Circuit in CMOS, The MV1812,” IERE Conference on Electronic Delivery of Data and Software, London, Sep. 16-17, 1986 pp. 141-145.
Martin, James, Viewdata and the Information Society, Prentice Hall, 1982, pp. 293+.
Alber, Antone F., Videotex/Teletext, McGraw-Hill, 1985 pp. 495+.
Veith, Richard H., Videotex/Teletext, North-Holland, 1983, pp. 180+.
Joint EIA/CVCC Recommended Practice for Teletext: North American Basic Teletext Specification (NABTS), IS-14, CVCC-TS100, Mar. 1984, pp. 76+.
Videotex/Teletext Presentation Level Protocol Syntax, North American PLPS, ANSI X3.110-1983, CSA T500-1983, ANSI & CSA, Dec. 1983, pp. 105+.
Fletcher, Carol, “Videotext: Return Engagement,” IEEE Spectrum, Oct. 1985, pp. 34-38.
Bortz, Paul I., et al., Great Expectations; A Television Manager's Guide to the Future, National Association of Broadcasters, Apr. 1986, pp. 101-103, 133-136.
Raag, Helmo, “International Electronic Mail,” NTC Record-1981, National Telecommunications Conference, Nov. 29, 1981-Dec. 3, 1981, pp. A9.1.1-A9.1.5.
Hagen, Rolf, “Teletex, A New Text Communication Service and Its Impact on Network Modules,” NTC Record-1981, National Telecommunications Conference, Nov. 29, 1981-Dec. 3, 1981, pp. F5.3.1-F5.3.5.
Holmes, Edith, “Electronic Mail Debuts,” ,ASIS Bulletin, Dec. 1981, pp. 40-42.
Bertsekas, Dimitri P., “Distributed Dynamic Programming,” Proceedings of the 20th IEEE Conference on Decision & Control, Dec. 16, 1981, vol. 1, pp. 774-779.
Herman, James C., “Application of Fiber Optics in CATV Distribution Systems,” Technical Papers. NCTA 31st Annual Convention & Exposition, May 3-5, 1982, pp. 148-152.
“SAT-Guide Tests Electronic Program Guide Unit at Facilities,” SAT Guide, May 1982, pp. 50-52.
Ciciora, Walter S., “Pixels and Bits—How Videotex Works,” The World Videotex Report, 1984, pp. 17-33.
Ciciora, Walter S., “Cable Videotex in the United States,” The World Videotex Report, 1984, pp. 559-573.
“Zenith Teletex Technology: A Backgrounder,” Zenith Radio Corporation, Summer 1983, 6 pages.
“KEYCOM, SSS Boards Approve Joint Venture for KEYFAX National Teletex Magazine,” KEYCOM News Release, Aug. 20, 1982, 3 pages.
“KEYCOM Completes Successful Nite-Owl Experiment,” KEYCOM News Release, Sep. 5, 1982, 3 pages.
“SSS, KEYCOM Formally Launch KEYFAX National Teletext Magazine,” SSS Press Release, Nov. 17, 1982, 2 pages.
“1983 Worldwide Census of Videotex and Cabletext Activities,” CSP International, Sep. 1983, pp. 24+.
“Diode Array Connection,” Virdata 2.1, 1982, 7 pages.
Gits, V., “Surprise a-Tac,” Cablevision, vol. 10, No. 5, Oct. 1984, pp. 30-33.
Rosenthal, E.M., “Keyfax: first nationally but only the beginning,” Cable Age, Jan. 31, 1982, 3 pages.
Mapp, L., et al., Telesoftware & Education Project—Final Report, BBC/ITV and Brighton Polytechnic, Jul. 1982, pp. 1-111.
Roussel, A.D., et al., T400 Teletext Terminal Operators Manual, Logica, Oct. 1985.
Guide to Context—The Logica Teletext Origination System, TV Systems Division—Logica Limited, Jul. 1983.
Hobbs, R., The Guide to Teletext, Logica, Jan. 1986.
LSM General Characteristics, Jun. 1982, 11 pages.
“Vidata Teletext and Vertical Interval Data Products,” Product Summary, Wegener Communications, Apr. 20, 1983.
Roizen, J., “New technologies Make Headlines at Videotex '82,” The International Journal of Broadcast Technology, Aug. 1982, 3 pages.
Weiss, M., et al., “How Teletext Can Deliver More Service and Profits,” The International Journal of Broadcast Technology, Aug. 1982, 4 pages.
Zenith Radio Corporation, News Release, “Teletext: The Newest Window To The Future As Science Fiction Becomes Reality,” Jun. 23, 1983.
Roberts, C., “Will Cable Television Revolutionize Campaigns?,” The Register, Feb. 21, 1982.
Yanagimachi, Akio, “An Experimental Second-Generation Japanese Teletext System,” NHK Laboratorie s Note, Oct. 1983, serial No. 291.
Mothersole, P.L., “Equipment for Network Distribution,” Developments in Teletext, Independent Broadcasting Authority, May 1983, pp. 37-42.
Article, Electronic, Aug. 11, 1981, "Digital VLSI Breeds Next-Generation TV Receivers", by T. Fischer, pp. 97-103.
Pamphlet by Intermetall Semiconductors ITT, "A New Dimension--VLSI Digital TV System", Publically Available Prior to Filing Date of Subject U.S. patent application of H. G. Lewis, Jr.
Data Sheet from Analogic Corporation, "MP8308, MP8318, Ultrafast 8-Bit Video D/A Converters", copyright 1979. 

Article "Color Decoding a PCM NTSC Television Signal" by J. P. Rossi, Jun., 1974, Journal of the SMPTE, vol. 83, No. 6, pp. 489-495.
Article "Digital Television Image Enhancement" by J. P. Rossi, 1975, Journal of the SMPTE, vol. 84, at pp. 545-551.
Text "Theory and Application of Digital Signal Processing" by Rabiner and Gold, (Prentice-Hall, 1975), p. 550.
Paper "Nonrecursive Digital Filters with Coefficients of Powers of Two" by A. Tomozawa, in the IEEE Int'l. Conf. on Comm., pp. 18D-1 through 18D-5.
Paper "Colour Demodulation of an NTSC Television Signal Using Digital Filtering Techniques" by A. G. Deczky, 1975 IEEE Int'l. Conf. on Comm., vol. II, pp. 23-6 through 23-11.
U.S. patent application filed Aug. 31, 1981 in the name of H. G. Lewis, Jr., Digital Color Television Signal Demodulator, Ser. No.: 297,556.
An Approach to the Implementation of Digital Filters by L. R. Jackson, reprinted from IEEE Trans. Audio Electroacoust., vol. AU-16, pp. 413-421, Sep. 1968.
W. Weltersbach et al., "Digitale Videosignalverarbeitung im Farbfernsehempfanger", Fernseh und Kino-Technik, 35 Jahrgang, Nr. 9, Sep. 1981, pp. 317-323, (with translation).
T. Fischer, "Digital VLSI Breeds Next-Generation TV Receivers", Electronics, Aug. 11, 1981, pp. 97-103.
T. Fischer, "Fernsehen Wird Digital", Elektronik, No. 16, 1981, pp. 27-35, (with translation of pp. 30-31).
ITT Intermetall, A New Dimension-VLSI Digital TV System, Sep. 1981, pp. 1-23.  

Pages 57 through 63 of the ITT "Digit 2000 VLSI Digital TV System" Product Description published by the Intermettal Division of ITT in Sep. 1983. 

E. Lerner, "Digital TV: Makers Bet on VLSI", IEEE Spectrum, 2/83, pp. 39-43.
TRW LSI Product Data Sheet--Model TDC1016J, Monolithic Video D/A Converters, 6/79.
B. Amazeen et al., "Monolithic d-a Converter Operates on Single Supply," Electronics, Feb. 28, 1980, pp. 125-131.  

"Digital VLSI Breeds Next-Generation TV Receivers", Electronics, Aug. 11, 1981, pp. 97-103.
Selected pages from a technical bulletin of the Semiconductor Division of ITT Corporation, titled "Digit 2000 VLSI Digital TV System".